Terms and conditions. Disclaimer. Copyright. Trade Marks

Transcription

1

2 blank page

3 Terms and conditions Terms and conditions Disclaimer This Scheme Document is the property of BRE Global Limited and is made publicly available for information purposes only. Any testing, assessment, certification or approval activity related to this Scheme Document must be conducted in accordance with BRE Global Limited s approved processes, and such activity may only be undertaken by authorised employees, agents, and associates of the Building Research Establishment Limited and BRE Global Limited, or approved parties ( Approved Party (ies) ). Any party wishing to use or reproduce this Scheme Document to offer testing, assessment, certification or approval must apply to BRE Global Limited for training, assessment and an associated licence, in order to qualify as an Approved Party; a fee will normally be charged. BRE Global Limited will not unreasonably refuse such applications. BRE Global Limited accepts no responsibility for any unauthorised use or distribution by others of this Scheme Document and may take legal action to prevent such unauthorised use or distribution. Copyright The information and images contained in this document are the property of BRE Global Limited unless explicitly stated to the contrary, and are protected by copyright laws. The information and images contained in this document may be downloaded and printed without requiring specific permission but remains the intellectual property, technical know-how and copyrighted material of BRE Global Limited. Such material is not to be used in a derogatory manner, in a misleading context or for commercial purposes. Where such material is being issued to others, the source including the web address and copyright status must be acknowledged. We may require you to register your details before downloading certain information or documents. Trade Marks BRE, BRE Global, BREEAM, Smartwaste and the Green Guide are all trademarks owned by either BRE or BRE Global Limited and may not be used without written permission from BRE or BRE Global Limited. Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only BRE Global Ltd 2014 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014 i

4 BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Acknowledgements BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 has been made possible through the continued efforts of many dedicated BRE Group staff members, the BRE Global Limited Governing Body, the BRE Global Limited Standing Panel of Experts, BREEAM Assessors and those who have responded to our consultation calls and meetings or provided feedback in other ways. BRE Global Limited also extends its gratitude to those who support BREEAM by continuing to specify and apply the method and contribute towards a sustainable built environment. ii Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

5 About BRE Global Limited BRE Global Limited (part of the BRE (Building Research Establishment) Group) is an independent third party approvals body offering certification of fire, security and sustainability products and services to an international market. BRE Global Limited s mission is to 'Protect People, Property and the Planet'. We aim to achieve this by: 1. Researching and writing standards 2. Testing and certification in the areas of fire, electronics, security and sustainability 3. Developing world leading sustainability assessment methods 4. Undertaking research and consultancy for clients and regulators 5. Promulgating standards and knowledge throughout the industry through publications and events 6. Developing and delivering training BRE Global Limited s product testing and approvals are carried out by recognised experts in our world renowned testing laboratories. BRE Global Limited is custodian of a number of world leading brands including: 1. Building Research Establishment's Environmental Assessment Method (BREEAM) - the world s leading environmental assessment method for buildings 2. Loss Prevention Certification Board (LPCB) for approval of fire and security products and services. BRE Global Limited is a trading subsidiary of the BRE Trust, the registered research and education charity which owns the BRE Group. BRE Global Limited Bucknalls Lane Watford Hertfordshire WD25 9XX T +44 (0) F +44 (0) E enquiries@breglobal.com Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014 iii

6 blank page

7 Table of contents Terms and conditions Acknowledgements About BRE Global Limited Table of contents List of tables List of figures About this Scheme Document i ii iii v viii xi xii Introduction 1 Introduction to BREEAM 2 BREEAM UK New Construction 5 When and how to engage with the BREEAM UK New Construction scheme 7 How to use the BREEAM UK New Construction Scheme 10 Scope of the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version 12 Buildings types not covered under the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version 15 Building life cycle stages covered by the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version 16 Building life cycle stages not covered by the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version 17 Scoring and rating BREEAM assessed buildings 18 BREEAM rating benchmarks 19 Minimum standards 20 Environmental section weightings 22 BREEAM assessment issues and credits 23 Calculating a building's BREEAM rating 24 The BREEAM evidential requirements 26 Management 31 Man 01 Project brief and design 32 Man 02 Life cycle cost and service life planning 38 Man 03 Responsible construction practices 42 Man 04 Commissioning and handover 48 Man 05 Aftercare 53 Health and Wellbeing 58 Hea 01 Visual comfort 59 Hea 02 Indoor air quality 75 Hea 03 Safe containment in laboratories 87 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014 v

8 BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Hea 04 Thermal comfort 90 Hea 05 Acoustic performance 96 Hea 06 Safety and security 110 Energy 115 Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions 116 Ene 02 Energy monitoring 127 Ene 03 External lighting 133 Ene 04 Low carbon design 136 Ene 05 Energy efficient cold storage 144 Ene 06 Energy efficient transportation systems 148 Ene 07 Energy efficient laboratory systems 152 Ene 08 Energy efficient equipment 158 Ene 09 Drying space 163 Transport 166 Tra 01 Public transport accessibility 167 Tra 02 Proximity to amenities 174 Tra 03 Cyclist facilities 178 Tra 04 Maximum car parking capacity 186 Tra 05 Travel plan 192 Water 195 Wat 01 Water consumption 196 Wat 02 Water monitoring 207 Wat 03 Water leak detection 211 Wat 04 Water efficient equipment 215 Materials 218 Mat 01 Life cycle impacts 219 Mat 02 Hard landscaping and boundary protection 234 Mat 03 Responsible sourcing of materials 237 Mat 04 Insulation 245 Mat 05 Designing for durability and resilience 250 Mat 06 Material efficiency 255 Waste 258 Wst 01 Construction waste management 259 Wst 02 Recycled aggregates 268 Wst 03 Operational waste 273 Wst 04 Speculative floor and ceiling finishes 278 vi Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

9 Wst 05 Adaptation to climate change 280 Wst 06 Functional adaptability 285 Land Use and ecology 288 LE 01 Site selection 289 LE 02 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features 293 LE 03 Minimising impact on existing site ecology 299 LE 04 Enhancing site ecology 307 LE 05 Long term impact on biodiversity 311 Pollution 316 Pol 01 Impact of refrigerants 317 Pol 02 NOx emissions 325 Pol 03 Surface water run-off 332 Pol 04 Reduction of night time light pollution 348 Pol 05 Reduction of noise pollution 351 Innovation 354 Inn 01 Innovation 355 Appendices 358 Appendix A BREEAM UK New Construction scope and Healthcare building types 359 Appendix B BREEAM UK New Construction scope and Education buildings 361 Appendix C BREEAM UK New Construction scope and Multi-residential buildings 363 Appendix D BREEAM UK New Construction and shell and core project assessments 364 Appendix E Applicability of BREEAM UK New Construction simple building assessments 369 Appendix F TBA 374 Appendix G TBA 375 Appendix H Examples of BREEAM UK New Construction certificates 376 Index 378 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014 vii

10 BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 List of tables Table - 1: BREEAM 2014 New Construction environmental sections and assessment issues 5 Table - 2: List of non-domestic building types covered under BREEAM UK New Construction Table - 3: BREEAM rating benchmarks 19 Table - 4: Minimum BREEAM standards by rating level 20 Table - 5: BREEAM Environmental section weightings 22 Table - 6: Example BREEAM score and rating calculation 24 Table - 7: Minimum standards for a BREEAM 'Very Good' rating 25 Table - 8: Evidence types 27 Table - 9: Minimum values of average daylight factor required. 60 Table - 10: Daylighting uniformity criteria. 61 Table - 11: Space type and illuminance requirements-both criteria (average illuminance and minimum point illuminance) should be met. 62 Table - 12: View out building specific requirements. 63 Table - 13: Internal and external lighting building specific requirements. 64 Table - 14: Exemplary level values of average daylight factor required. 65 Table - 15: Exemplary level illuminance value requirements. Both criteria (average illuminance and minimum point illuminance) should be met. 66 Table - 16: Reflectance for maximum room depths and window head heights 68 Table - 17: VOC criteria by product type 77 Table - 18: BREEAM acoustic criteria for Education buildings 96 Table - 19: BREEAM acoustic criteria for Healthcare buildings 98 Table - 20: BREEAM acoustic criteria for Office buildings 98 Table - 21: BREEAM acoustic criteria for Law Courts buildings 99 Table - 22: BREEAM acoustic criteria for Industrial, Retail, Prisons and 'Other' building types 100 Table - 23: BREEAM acoustic criteria for Multi-residential buildings and 'Other residential' institutions 102 Table - 24: Ene 01 EPRNC benchmark scale 116 Table - 25: Innovation credits 117 Table - 26: Best Practice Energy Efficient Measures in Laboratories 153 Table - 27: Examples of solutions deemed to comply with the criteria for the reduction of unregulated energy load from significantly contributing systems. 158 Table - 28: Credits available for each building type relating to the public transport Accessibility Index (AI) score. 168 viii Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

11 Table - 29: Credits available for Tra02 for different building types 174 Table - 30: Cycle space criteria for each building type 178 Table - 31: Credits available in Tra04 Maximum car parking capacity for different building types 186 Table - 32: Table - 2Default occupancy rates by building type 189 Table - 33: BREEAM Credits available for percentage improvement over baseline building water consumption.197 Table - 34: Water efficient consumption levels by component type 200 Table - 35: defines for each component type the appropriate data that will need to be collected from manufacturers product information to complete the assessment. 201 Table - 36: Elements assessed by building type 219 Table - 37: Allocation of credits by building type and Mat 01 points 220 Table - 38: The Environmental Product Declaration (EPD) type and tier ranking 226 Table - 39: Green Guide points uplift by EPD type 227 Table - 40: Building type and the use of appropriate Green Guide ratings 230 Table - 41: The number of BREEAM credits achieved is determined as follows 237 Table - 42: Applicable materials (building and associated hard-landscaping) 240 Table - 43: Responsible Sourcing Certification Scheme tier levels and corresponding BREEAM responsible sourcing of materials points. 240 Table - 44: Green Guide rating points/element 246 Table - 45: Applicable building elements, environmental factors and material degradations effects to consider. 250 Table - 46: Construction waste resource efficiency benchmarks 259 Table - 47: Diversion from landfill benchmarks 260 Table - 48: Construction waste groups 264 Table - 49: Minimum levels (by weight and volume) of high-grade aggregate specified per application (where present) that is recycled and/or secondary aggregate 268 Table - 50: BREEAM checklist for defining land of low ecological value 294 Table - 51: Broad habitat types(source: Countryside Survey 2007) 299 Table - 52: Inclusive analysis of average total taxon richness by broad habitat in Fields and Other Main Land Cover Parcels plots in Great Britain. 301 Table - 53: Table 1: Additional measures for the improvement of long term biodiversity 312 Table - 54: Default system operational design life values 320 Table - 55: Average annual leakage rates for the UK 320 Table - 56: List of some common refrigerant types with low GWP 323 Table - 57: Excess oxygen conversion factors 328 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014 ix

12 BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Table - 58: Definition of flood zones by country 345 x Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

13 List of figures Figure 1: The BREEAM Certification mark 3 Figure 2: BREEAM assessment and certification stages and the Royal Institute of British Architects (RIBA) Outline Plan of Work Figure 3: Example of certificate at design stage 376 Figure 4: Example of certificate at post construction stage 377 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014 xi

14 BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 About this Scheme Document This document is the technical guide for the 2014 version of the BREEAM UK New Construction Scheme. It describes an environmental performance standard against which new, non-domestic buildings in the UK can be assessed and achieve a BREEAM New Construction rating. The Scheme Document and the information detailed within is intended for use by trained, qualified and licensed BREEAM Assessors in accordance with the procedural and operational requirements of BREEAM (as described in the BREEAM Operations Manual, SD5070) under the terms and conditions of a BREEAM licence. This document should be used by non- BREEAM Assessors for reference purposes only. xii Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

15 Changes to this BREEAM Scheme Document This Scheme Document is subject to revision and can be re-issued from time-to-time by BRE Global Limited. A schedule of the publication date for each issue of this document is provided below. Any additions to this document that necessitates its re-issue will be highlighted throughout the text (note: deletions are not identified in the updated issue). A detailed list of all additions and deletions made to each issue is available separately. BREEAM Assessors can download this list of changes from the BREEAM Assessor's Extranet. The list of changes is also available to other parties on request; please breeam@bre.co.uk. Scheme document Issue number Date of Issue SD (DRAFT) 11/02/2014 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014 xiii

16 blank page

17 Introduction Introduction Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014 1

18 Introduction BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Introduction to BREEAM BREEAM (Building Research Establishment's Environmental Assessment Method) is the world s first sustainability rating scheme for the built environment and has contributed much to the strong focus in the UK on sustainability in building design, construction and use. BREEAM is now an international standard that is locally adapted, operated and applied through a network of international operators, assessors and industry professionals. Through its application and use BREEAM helps clients measure and reduce the environmental impacts of their buildings and in doing so create higher value, lower risk assets. To-date, BREEAM has been used to certify over 260,000 building assessments across the building life cycle and it is being applied in over 50 countries. Aims of BREEAM To mitigate the life cycle impacts of buildings on the environment To enable buildings to be recognised according to their environmental benefits To provide a credible, environmental label for buildings To stimulate demand and create value for sustainable buildings, building products and supply chains. Objectives of BREEAM To provide market recognition of buildings with a low environmental impact To ensure best environmental practice is incorporated in the planning, design, construction and operation of buildings and the wider built environment. To define a robust, cost-effective performance standard surpassing that required by regulations. To challenge the market to provide innovative, cost effective solutions that minimise the environmental impact of buildings. To raise awareness amongst owners, occupants, designers and operators of the benefits and value of buildings with a reduced life cycle impact on the environment. To allow organisations to demonstrate progress towards corporate environmental objectives. BREEAM is developed and operated to meet the following underlying principles: Ensure environmental quality through an accessible, holistic and balanced measure of environmental impacts. Use quantified measures for determining environmental quality. Adopt a flexible approach that encourages and rewards positive outcomes, avoiding prescribed solutions. Use robust science and best practice as the basis for quantifying and calibrating a cost effective and rigorous performance standard for defining environmental quality. Reflect the social and economic benefits of meeting the environmental objectives covered. Provide a common international framework of assessment that is tailored to meet the local context including regulation, climate and sector. Integrate building professionals in the development and operational processes to ensure wide understanding and accessibility. Adopt third party certification to ensure independence, credibility and consistency of the label. Adopt existing industry tools, practices and other standards wherever possible to support developments in policy and technology, build on existing skills and understanding and minimise costs. Align technically and operationally with relevant international standards, including the suite of standards on the Sustainability of Construction Works prepared by the European Committee for Standardisation Technical Committee CEN/TC 350. Engage with a representative range of stakeholders to inform ongoing development in accordance with the underlying principles and the pace of change in performance standards (accounting for policy, regulation and market capability). 2 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

19 Introduction to BREEAM Introduction The aims, objectives and principles of BREEAM are embodied within a Core Technical Standard owned and managed by BRE Global Limited. This is applied through a suite of BREEAM Schemes covering aspects of the built environment life cycle. These schemes are locally developed and operated by a number of different organisations, called National Scheme Operators (NSOs), across a range of countries. For a full list of BREEAM National Scheme Operators and Schemes visit The UK BREEAM Schemes BRE Global Limited is the National Scheme Operator of BREEAM in the UK. We develop and operate a number of BREEAM schemes, each designed to assess the environmental performance of buildings at various stages in the life cycle, and these include: BREEAM Communities for the master-planning of a larger community of buildings BREEAM New Construction for new build, domestic and non-domestic buildings BREEAM In-Use for existing non-domestic buildings in-use BREEAM Refurbishment for domestic and, from summer 2014, non-domestic building fit-outs and refurbishments Independent BREEAM Assessors, trained, qualified and licensed by BRE Global Limited can undertake a BREEAM assessment using this Scheme Document and associated reporting and calculation tools. Once an assessment is complete and quality assured BRE Global Limited will issue a BREEAM certificate. The BREEAM certificate provides formal verification that the Assessor has completed an assessment of a building in accordance with the requirements of the scheme and its quality standards and procedures. A BREEAM certificate provides assurance to any interested party that a building s BREEAM rating, at the time of certification, accurately reflects its performance against the BREEAM standard. Anyone wishing to verify the BREEAM rating of a building can do so by either checking its BREEAM certificate, which will contain the certification mark, (see below) or by searching the BREEAM buildings listings on Examples of a BREEAM UK New Construction certificate can be found in Appendix H. Figure 1: The BREEAM Certification mark Ensuring quality and consistency All BREEAM Schemes are developed and operated by National Scheme Operators in accordance with the Code for a Sustainable Built Environment. The Code for a Sustainable Built Environment is a set of strategic principles and requirements which define an integrated approach to the design, management, evaluation and certification of the environmental, social and economic impacts of the built environment. Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014 3

20 Introduction BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 The Code is interpreted through the BREEAM Core Process and Technical Standards. These linked documents set out the requirements that a compliant scheme must meet in order to be affiliated with the Code. The Standards ensure that a common scientific and performance basis is used by all compliant schemes operated by National Scheme Operators, whilst ensuring that these are relevant to local demands, standards and practices. The Code and associated standards are developed and maintained by BRE Global Limited with direction from the BREEAM Strategy Board, under the auspices of the BRE Global Governing Board. To ensure independence, competence and impartiality, all National Scheme Operators are required to maintain scheme operations accredited to International Standards. In the UK, BRE Global Limited is accredited by the United Kingdom Accreditation Service (UKAS) to: BS EN ISO (Conformity assessment - General requirements for bodies operating certification of persons) for BREEAM Assessors. BS EN (General requirements for bodies operating product certification systems) for the complete BREEAM assessment process. BRE Global Limited is also certified to ISO 9001 for all its BREEAM related activities. As a certification body accredited by UKAS, BRE Global Limited maintains an open and accountable governance structure. The operation of BREEAM is overseen by an independent Governing Body and a Standing Panel for Peer & Market Review. The Governing Body represents stakeholder interests to ensure, amongst other things, that we at BRE Global Limited are acting independently and impartially, operating our processes correctly, and treating our customers fairly. The Standing Panel provides BRE Global Limited with access to a range of experts that can review BRE Global Limited s standards and schemes to ensure their robustness from a scientific, technical and market perspective as well as ensuring the development of the standards and schemes is open to greater external and independent scrutiny. 4 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

21 BREEAM UK New Construction Introduction BREEAM UK New Construction The BREEAM UK New Construction scheme is a performance based assessment method and certification scheme for new buildings. The primary aim of BREEAM UK New Construction is to mitigate the life cycle impacts of new buildings on the environment in a robust and cost effective manner. This is achieved through integration and use of the scheme by clients and their project teams at key stages in the design and construction process. This enables the client, through the BREEAM Assessor and the BRE Global certification process, to measure, evaluate and reflect the performance of their new building against best practice in an independent and robust manner. This performance is quantified by a number of individual measures and associated criteria stretching across a range of environmental issues see Table - 1, which is ultimately expressed as a single certified BREEAM rating, i.e. the label (section 3 describes how a BREEAM rating is calculated). Table - 1: BREEAM 2014 New Construction environmental sections and assessment issues Management Health and wellbeing Project brief and design Life cycle cost and service life planning Responsible construction practices Commissioning and handover Aftercare Visual comfort Indoor air quality Safe containment in laboratories Thermal comfort Acoustic performance Safety and security Energy Transport Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions Energy monitoring External lighting Low carbon design Energy efficient cold storage Energy efficient transportation systems Energy efficient laboratory systems Energy efficient equipment Drying space Public transport accessibility Proximity to amenities Cyclist facilities Maximum car parking capacity Travel plan Water Materials Water consumption Water monitoring Water leak detection Water efficient equipment Life cycle impacts Hard landscaping and boundary protection Responsible sourcing of materials Insulation Designing for durability and resilience Material efficiency Waste Land use and ecology Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014 5

22 Introduction BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Construction waste management Recycled aggregates Operational waste Speculative floor and ceiling finishes Adaptation to climate change Functional adaptability Site selection Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features Minimising impact on existing site ecology Enhancing site ecology Long term impact on biodiversity Pollution Innovation Impact of refrigerants NO x emissions Surface water run-off Reduction of night time light pollution Reduction of noise pollution Innovation 6 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

23 When and how to engage with the BREEAM UK New Construction scheme Introduction When and how to engage with the BREEAM UK New Construction scheme Timing the engagement with and use of the BREEAM UK New Construction scheme via the BREEAM Assessor is essential for ensuring seamless integration of the methodology in the new build procurement process. Without this, the ability to cost effectively optimise the building s environmental performance and achieve the desired BREEAM rating will be compromised. Appointing a BREEAM Assessor or Accredited Professional early in the project will help in achieving the target rating without undue impacts on the flexibility of design decisions, budgets and potential solutions. Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014 7

24 Introduction BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Figure 2: BREEAM assessment and certification stages and the Royal Institute of British Architects (RIBA) Outline Plan of Work Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

25 When and how to engage with the BREEAM UK New Construction scheme Introduction Figure 2 serves to highlight the link between the BREEAM UK New Construction assessment and certification stages and the RIBA Outline Plan of Work This figure can assist clients in timing their engagement with BREEAM and the appointment of a BREEAM Assessor. Clients can view up-to-date listings of licensed BREEAM UK New Construction Assessors and BREEAM Accredited Professionals at Green Book Live It is important to recognise that BREEAM primarily reflects the overall performance of the building rather than just the opportunities or limitations placed on specific stakeholders involved in the procurement process. This means that the client, design team, principal contractor and BREEAM Assessor, as well as other specialist disciplines, have an important role to play throughout the procurement process, if the desired performance level is to be achieved and reflected through the certified BREEAM rating. The onus of orientating the brief towards sustainability needs to come first and foremost from the client. To facilitate this, BRE Global recommends that clients and their project teams engage with a BREEAM Assessor and/or BREEAM Accredited Professional no later than the Preparation and Brief stage (RIBA Stage 1 or equivalent) and ideally sooner where practical. This will ensure that realistic targets are set and can be met, appropriate responsibilities can be defined and understood and low or no cost solutions to environmental impacts can be sought and applied wherever possible. Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014 9

26 Introduction BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 How to use the BREEAM UK New Construction Scheme This BREEAM Scheme Document is a technical document which has been created to: 1. Enable qualified and licensed BREEAM Assessors to complete BREEAM assessments and determine a rating 2. Enable BRE global Ltd to complete quality assurance reviews of a BREEAM Assessors assessment report, in accordance with the standards to which BRE Global Ltd is accredited 3. As an aid for BREEAM Accredited Professionals (AP) to undertake project team facilitation, in terms of defining, monitoring and successfully achieving the desired BREEAM rating 4. As a reference for clients and members of the project team whose proposed building is being BREEAM assessed. The scheme document is split into six parts: 1. Introduction (section 1) 2. Scope of the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version (section 2) 3. Scoring and rating BREEAM assessed buildingsscoring, including minimum standards (section 3) 4. The BREEAM evidential requirements (section 4) 5. Assessment criteria (sections 5-14) 6. Appendices (A - H). The Scope section describes the types of buildings and stages of assessment that this version of the BREEAM UK New Construction Scheme can be applied to. Appendices A to H provide additional scoping guidance for specific building and project types. The Scope section can be used by clients and BREEAM Assessors to check whether this is the correct BREEAM Scheme to use for their project. The Scoring and rating section illustrates how a building s assessed performance is measured and rated. It outlines the BREEAM rating level benchmarks, the minimum BREEAM standards for each rating level and the BREEAM environmental section weightings. It also includes a description of the BREEAM assessment issues and credits, including BREEAM Innovation credits, and how performance against these is calculated and expressed as a BREEAM rating. Please note that, for the purpose of formal assessment and certification, actual building performance must be determined by the BREEAM Assessor using the relevant BREEAM reporting and calculation tools. The BREEAM evidential requirements section provides guidance to assessors and project teams on the various types and forms of evidence required by the BREEAM Assessor to demonstrate compliance with BREEAM criteria. This includes a description of why BREEAM requires an auditable trail of evidence, a table of general types of building information produced during a building project, and therefore typically required and used as evidence of compliance, and guidance on the differing forms of evidence that can be used and at what stages of the assessment, such as letters of commitment. The Assessment criteria section includes the 51 BREEAM assessment issues, categorised in 10 environmental sections. Each issue defines a level of performance (the assessment criteria) against which the assessed building demonstrates compliance (using appropriate project information, i.e. evidence) in order to achieve a corresponding number of available BREEAM credits. The majority of BREEAM issues and credits are tradable, meaning that a client and their project team can pick and choose which to target in order to build their BREEAM performance score and achieve the desired BREEAM rating. Several BREEAM issues have minimum standards, meaning that to achieve a particular BREEAM rating specific credits or criteria must be achieved (BREEAM s minimum standards are outlined in the section Scoring and rating BREEAM assessed buildings). Each BREEAM issue is structured as follows: 10 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

27 How to use the BREEAM UK New Construction Scheme Introduction 1. Issue information: This contains the assessment issue reference, title, number of credits available 1 and whether the issue forms part of BREEAM s minimum standards. 2. Aim: This outlines the broad objective of the issue and the impact it measures/mitigates. 3. Assessment criteria: This outlines the good/best practice performance level benchmark(s) and criteria. Where the building complies with the assessment criteria, as determined by the BREEAM Assessor, the relevant number of BREEAM credits can be awarded. Some issues have Exemplary Level Criteria; where a building demonstrates that it meets Exemplary Level Criteria, a BREEAM Innovation credit can be awarded (refer to the Innovation section for more details). Up to a maximum of 10 Innovation credits are available. 4. Checklists and tables: This section contains any checklists and tables referenced in the assessment criteria section. This can include tables of benchmarks or building type specific performance criteria. 5. Compliance notes: These notes provide additional guidance that supports the application and interpretation of the main assessment criteria, including how to assess compliance in a particular location or for a particular building or project type, e.g. shell only. 6. Methodology: This section includes a description of any methodology used to determine the number of BREEAM credits achieved for a given level of building performance. It includes, for example, calculation procedures or guidance on how non-breeam schemes, standards or qualifications referenced in the assessment criteria relate to those criteria. 7. Evidence: This section describes the type(s) of project information that must be provided by the design team/client and given to the BREEAM Assessor to enable verification of the building s performance against the assessment criteria and so justify the award of the relevant number of BREEAM credits. Section 4, the BREEAM evidential requirements provides further guidance on evidential requirements. 8. Additional information: This section contains any further information relevant to the application of the assessment criteria, including any definition of terms used in the assessment issue or sources of additional information that may be of use in addressing the issue. The Appendices provide supporting information relevant to either the scope of the BREEAM 2014 scheme or its assessment criteria. 1 For some assessment issues the number of credits available will vary by building type. Furthermore, some issues may not be applicable to certain building types or buildings which do not contain a particular function or area, e.g. a laboratory. Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

28 Scope BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Scope of the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version The BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme can be used to assess the environmental life cycle impacts of new nondomestic buildings at the design and construction stages. New Construction is defined as development that results in a new standalone structure, or new extension to an existing structure, which will come into operation or use for the first time upon completion of the works. This BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version is applicable to new non-domestic buildings in the United Kingdom only. Type of buildings that can be assessed using the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version The non-domestic building types which can be assessed and rated using this scheme version are outlined in Table - 2. Additional guidance for some of the building types listed is also provided in the appendices (refer to the footnotes). Table - 2: List of non-domestic building types covered under BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 Sector Building type Description Commercial Offices General office buildings Offices with research and development areas (i.e. category 1 labs only) Industrial Industrial unit warehouse storage/distribution Industrial unit process/manufacturing/vehicle servicing Retail Shop/shopping centre Retail park/warehouse Over the counter service provider e.g. financial, estate and employment agencies and betting offices Showroom Restaurant, café and drinking establishment Hot food takeaway Public (non-housing) Education 1 Pre-school Schools and sixth form colleges Further education/vocational colleges Higher education institutions Healthcare 2 Teaching/specialist hospitals General acute hospitals Community and mental health hospitals 1 For schools, further and higher educational building types, see also Appendix B BREEAM UK New Construction scope and Education buildings. 2 For healthcare building types, see also Appendix A BREEAM UK New Construction scope and Healthcare building types. 12 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

29 Scope Sector Building type Description GP surgeries Health centres and clinics Prisons 1 High security prison Standard secured prison Young offender institution and juvenile prisons Local prison Holding centre Law Courts Law courts Crown and criminal courts County courts Magistrates courts Civil justice centres Family courts Youth courts Combined courts Multi-residential accommodation/supported living facility 2 Residential institutions (long term stay) Residential care home Sheltered accommodation Residential college/school (halls of residence) Local authority secure residential accommodation Military barracks Other Residential institutions (short term stay) Hotel, hostel, boarding and guest house Secure training centre Residential training centre Non residential institutions Art gallery, museum Library Day centre, hall/civic/community centre Place of worship Assembly and leisure Cinema Theatre/music/concert hall Exhibition/conference hall Indoor or outdoor sports, fitness and recreationcentre (with/without pool) Other Transport hub (coach/bus station and above ground rail station) Research and development (category 2 or 3 laboratories - non-higher education) Crèche 1 The Prisons category includes any building type that is part of a prison establishment, including residential blocks or a hybrid of building types. 2 For multi-residential building types, see also Appendix C BREEAM UK New Construction scope and Multi-residential buildings for further detail of scope Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

30 Scope BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Mixed use developments and building types Developments which consist of a number of separate buildings of differing functional types, or a single building containing a number of different functions e.g. office and retail or retail and GP surgery, will typically require an assessment and therefore BREEAM rating and certificate for each individual building or functional use within a single building. This is necessary as BREEAM defines differing criteria and benchmarks for some assessment issues according to building type, function and use. Therefore to maintain comparability and consistency of the assessment and BREEAM rating, a separate assessment score and rating are required for each building type function or use in the development, Further guidance on how to define mixed-use developments for the purpose of a BREEAM assessment can be found in Guidance Note TBC Mixed-use developments and similar buildings (or units), Similar building types (or units) on the same site It is possible to assess and rate a number of separate but similar buildings, or individual units within a larger building development, within one BREEAM assessment report. Further guidance on this type of assessment can be found in Guidance Note TBC Mixed-use developments and similar buildings (or units), Shell and core/speculative buildings Non fitted-out speculative new buildings, often referred to as shell and core buildings, can be assessed using the BREEAM UK New Construction scheme. Further details on the application of the scheme to these types of new building can be found in Appendix D BREEAM UK New Construction and shell and core project assessments. Simple building developments Less complex building types can be assessed using a set of simple buildings criteria, defined within this BREEAM UK New Construction Scheme. Further details on the application of this scheme to simple buildings can be found in Appendix E Applicability of BREEAM UK New Construction simple building assessments For each individual assessment issue, guidance on simple buildings compliance is provided in the Compliance Notes section. 14 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

31 Buildings types not covered under the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version Scope Buildings types not covered under the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version Building types not listed in Scope of the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version Table - 2: will fall into one of two categories, those where a current but separate BREEAM New Construction scheme document exists and those which currently do not have an existing, up-to-date scheme document. Other current BREEAM New Construction schemes Data centres: 2010 version There is a separate BREEAM UK New Construction 2010 scheme version and technical manual for Data Centres (SD5068); the 2010 version should be used for the assessment and certification of data centres in the UK. Other building types not defined If a particular building type requiring assessment is not listed above or in Scope of the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version Table - 2:, it can still be assessed using BREEAM UK New Construction. Such building types will require the development of a set of tailored assessment criteria, i.e. a BREEAM Bespoke assessment. In such instances BREEAM Assessors and clients should contact BRE Global for advice and information on how to proceed. Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

32 Scope BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Building life cycle stages covered by the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version This BREEAM UK New Construction Scheme can be used to assess and rate the environmental impacts arising from a newly constructed building development (including external site areas), at the following life cycle stages: 1. New Build Design Stage (DS) - leading to an Interim BREEAM rating and certificate of assessment 2. New Build Post-Construction Stage (PCS) leading to a Final BREEAM rating and certificate of assessment Design Stage The DS assessment and interim BREEAM rating confirms the proposed new building s performance at the design stage of the life cycle. Assessment and ideally certification will occur prior to the beginning of operations on site. The BREEAM rating at this stage is labelled as interim because it does not represent the building s final, new construction BREEAM performance. To complete an assessment at this stage the design must be advanced to a point where the relevant design information is available to enable the BREEAM Assessor to evaluate and verify the building s performance against the criteria defined in this Scheme Document. The interim DS assessment will therefore be completed and certified at the scheme design or detailed design stages. Post-Construction Stage (PCS) The PCS assessment and BREEAM rating confirms the final as-built performance of the building at the new construction stage of the life cycle. A final PCS assessment is completed and certified after practical completion of the building works. There are two approaches to assessment at the post-construction stage: 1. A post-construction review (PCR) of an interim design-stage assessment 2. A post-construction assessment (PCA) A PCR serves to confirm that the building s as built performance and rating is in accordance with the assessment certified at the interim design stage. Where an interim DS assessment has not been carried out i.e. certified, and a BREEAM assessment and rating is required, a full post construction stage assessment can be conducted. 16 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

33 Building life cycle stages not covered by the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version Scope Building life cycle stages not covered by the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version The BREEAM UK New Construction scheme is not designed for, and therefore not appropriate to assess the environmental impacts of buildings at the following life cycle stages: 1. Existing building refurbishment and fit-out (see Appendix TBC for more information) 2. Existing building in operation or existing unoccupied building (refer to the BREEAM In-Use scheme) 3. Existing building de-construction (no BREEAM scheme for this life cycle stage at present) 4. Infrastructure projects (no BREEAM scheme for this life cycle stage at present) Part new-build, part refurbishment projects TBC Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

34 Scope BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Scoring and rating BREEAM assessed buildings 18 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

35 BREEAM rating benchmarks Scope BREEAM rating benchmarks There are a number of elements that determine the overall performance of a new construction project assessed using BREEAM, these are as follows: 1. The BREEAM rating level benchmarks 2. The minimum BREEAM standards 3. The environmental section weightings 4. The BREEAM assessment issues and credits How these elements combine to produce a BREEAM rating for a new building is summarised on the following pages. This is followed by a description and example describing the methodology for calculating a rating. The BREEAM rating benchmarks for projects assessed using the 2014 version of BREEAM UK New Construction are as follows: Table - 3: BREEAM rating benchmarks BREEAM Rating % score OUTSTANDING 85 EXCELLENT 70 VERY GOOD 55 GOOD 45 PASS 30 UNCLASSIFIED < 30 The BREEAM rating benchmarks enable a client and all other stakeholders to compare the performance of a newly constructed building with other BREEAM rated buildings, and the typical sustainability performance of a stock of new nondomestic buildings in the UK. In this respect each BREEAM rating broadly represents performance equivalent to: 1. Outstanding: Less than top 1% of UK new non-domestic buildings (innovator) 2. Excellent: Top 10% of UK new non-domestic buildings (best practice) 3. Very Good: Top 25% of UK new non-domestic buildings (advanced good practice) 4. Good: Top 50% of UK new non-domestic buildings (intermediate good practice) 5. Pass: Top 75% of UK new non-domestic buildings (standard good practice) An unclassified BREEAM rating represents performance that is non-compliant with BREEAM, in terms of failing to meet either the BREEAM minimum standards of performance for key environmental issues or the overall threshold score required to achieve at least a Pass rating.. Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

36 Scope BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Minimum standards To maintain a flexible system BREEAM adopts a balanced score-card approach to the assessment and rating of building performance. This means that, to achieve a particular level of performance the majority of BREEAM credits can be traded, i.e. non-compliance in one area can be off-set through compliance in another to achieve the target BREEAM rating. However, to ensure that performance against fundamental environmental issues is not over-looked in pursuit of a particular rating, BREEAM sets minimum standards of performance in key areas e.g. energy, water, waste etc. It is important to bear in mind that these are minimum acceptable levels of performance and, in that respect they should not necessarily be viewed as levels that are representative of best practice for a BREEAM rating level. To achieve a particular BREEAM rating, the minimum overall percentage score must be achieved and the minimum standards, detailed in Table - 4 below, applicable to that rating level complied with. Table - 4: Minimum BREEAM standards by rating level Minimum standards by BREEAM rating level BREEAM issue Pass Good Very Good Excellent Outstanding Man 01: Project brief and design None None One credit (Stakeholder consultation (project delivery)) One credit (Stakeholder consultation (project delivery)) One credit (Stakeholder consultation (project delivery)) Man 03: Responsible construction practices Criterion 2 None Criterion 2 None Criterion 2 None Criterion 2 One credit (Considerate construction) Criterion 2 Two credits (Considerate construction) Man 04: Commissioning and handover None None None Criterion 9 Criterion 9 Man 5: Aftercare None None None One credit (Seasonal commissioning One credit (Seasonal commissioning) Ene 01: Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions None None None Five credits Eight credits Ene 02: Energy monitoring None None One credit (First sub-metering credit) One credit (First sub-metering credit) One credit (First sub-metering credit) Wat 01: Water consumption None One credit One credit One credit Two credits Wat 02: Water monitoring None Criterion 1 only Criterion 1 only Criterion 1 only Criterion 1 only 20 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

37 Minimum standards Scope Minimum standards by BREEAM rating level BREEAM issue Pass Good Very Good Excellent Outstanding Mat 03: Responsible sourcing of materials TBC TBC TBC TBC TBC Wst 01: Construction waste management None None None None One credit Wst 03: Operational waste None None None One credit One credit LE 03: Minimising impact on existing site ecology None None One credit One credit One credit Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

38 Scope BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Environmental section weightings Environmental weightings are fundamental to any building environmental assessment method as they provide a means of defining, and therefore ranking, the relative impact of environmental issues. BREEAM uses an explicit weighting system derived from a combination of consensus based weightings and ranking by a panel of experts. The outputs from this exercise are then used to determine the relative value of the environmental sections used in BREEAM and their contribution to the overall BREEAM score. This weighting system is defined in greater detail within the BRE Global Core Process Standard (BES 5301) and it s supporting procedural documents. These form part of the over-arching BREEAM Standard and the Code for a Sustainable Built Environment. The same ranking of impacts used in BREEAM underpins the scoring mechanisms in the BRE Green Guide to Specification and the BRE Environmental Profiling Method for construction materials. Table - 5 outlines the weightings for each of the nine environmental sections included in the BREEAM UK New Construction Scheme. Table - 5: BREEAM Environmental section weightings Environmental section Weighting Fully fitted out Shell only Shell and core only Management 12% 12.50% 11% Health and Wellbeing 15% 10% 10.50% Energy 15% 14.50% 15% Transport 9% 11.50% 10% Water 7% 4% 7.50% Materials 13.5% 17.50% 14.50% Waste 8.5% 11% 9.50% Land Use and Ecology 10% 13% 11% Pollution 10% 6% 11% Total 100% 100% 100% Innovation (additional) 10% 10% 10% Each of the above environmental sections consists of a differing number of assessment issues and BREEAM credits (as described below and defined in detail in the technical sections of this Scheme Document). 22 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

39 BREEAM assessment issues and credits Scope BREEAM assessment issues and credits BREEAM UK New Construction consists of fifty one individual assessment issues spanning the nine environmental categories, plus a tenth category called innovation (described below). Each issue addresses a specific building related environmental impact or issue and has a number of credits assigned to it. BREEAM credits are awarded where a building demonstrates that it meets the best practice performance levels defined for that issue, i.e. it has mitigated an impact or, in the case of the health and wellbeing section, addressed a specific building occupant-related issue, e.g. good thermal comfort, daylight or acoustics. The number of credits available for an individual assessment issue will vary and generally the higher the number there are for a given issue, the more important that issue is in terms of mitigating its impact. In most cases, where there are multiple credits available, the number awarded is based on a sliding scale or benchmark, where progressively higher standards of building performance are rewarded with a higher number of credits. It is worth noting that, in addition to the environmental section and overall score and BREEAM rating, verified performance against individual assessment issues also provides users with a credible set of key building performance indicators for a range of embodied, operational and construction phase building impacts. In this respect, in addition to using BREEAM to define overall targets, it is possible to use the method to define performance levels in support of specific organisational policy objectives for individual environmental issues. Care should be taken when setting design targets using individual issues and credit levels in this way as it can limit design flexibility and have an impact on project costs. Awarding credits for innovation It is one of the aims of BREEAM to support innovation within the construction industry and its supply chain. BREEAM does this by making additional credits available for the recognition of sustainability related benefits or performance levels which are currently not recognised by standard BREEAM assessment issues and criteria. By doing this BREEAM is rewarding buildings that go beyond best practice in terms of a particular aspect of sustainability i.e. where the building or its procurement has demonstrated innovation. Awarding credits for innovation enables clients and design teams to boost their building s BREEAM performance and, in addition, helps to support the market for new innovative technologies, and design or construction practices. There are two ways in which BREEAM awards innovation credits to recognise innovation in building design and procurement. The first is by meeting exemplary performance criteria defined within an existing BREEAM issue i.e. going beyond the standard BREEAM assessment criteria and therefore best practice. Note, not all assessment issues have exemplary performance criteria. The second route is where an application is made to BRE Global by the registered project s BREEAM Assessor to have a particular building technology or feature, design or construction method or process recognised as innovative. If the application is successful and subsequently compliance is verified, an innovation credit can be awarded. An additional 1% can be added to a building s overall score for each innovation credit achieved. The maximum number of innovation credits that can be awarded for any one building is 10; therefore the maximum available additional score for innovation is 10%. Innovation credits can be awarded regardless of the building s final BREEAM rating, i.e. they can be awarded at any BREEAM rating level. Refer to the Inn 01 Innovation section for more detail. Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

40 Scope BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Calculating a building's BREEAM rating A BREEAM Assessor must determine the BREEAM rating using the appropriate assessment tools and calculators. An indication of performance against the BREEAM scheme can also be determined using a BREEAM Pre-Assessment Estimator. The Pre- Assessment Estimator is available from the BREEAM website The process of determining a BREEAM rating is outlined below and an example calculation included in Table For each of BREEAM s nine environmental sections the number of credits awarded must be determined by the BREEAM Assessor in accordance with the criteria of each assessment issue (as detailed in the technical sections of this document). 2. The percentage of credits achieved is then calculated for each section. 3. The percentage of credits achieved in each section is then multiplied by the corresponding section weighting. This gives the overall environmental section score. 4. The section scores are then added together to give the overall BREEAM score. 5. The overall score is then compared to the BREEAM rating benchmark levels and, provided all minimum standards have been met, the relevant BREEAM rating is achieved. 6. An additional 1% can be added to the final BREEAM score for each innovation credit achieved (up to a maximum of 10%). Table - 6: Example BREEAM score and rating calculation BREEAM Section Credits Achieved Credits Available % of Credits Achieved Section Weighting (fully fitted) Section Score Management % % Health and Wellbeing % % Energy % % Transport % % Water % % Materials % % Waste % % Land Use and Ecology % % Pollution % % Innovation % % Final BREEAM score 55.57% BREEAM Rating VERY GOOD 24 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

41 Calculating a building's BREEAM rating Scope Table - 7: Minimum standards for a BREEAM 'Very Good' rating Minimum Standards for BREEAM Very Good rating Achieved? Man 01: Project brief and design Y Man 03: Responsible construction practices Y Ene 02: Energy monitoring Y Wat 01: Water consumption Y Wat 02: Water monitoring Y Mat 03: Responsible sourcing of materials Y LE 03: Minimising impact on existing site ecology Y Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

42 BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 The BREEAM evidential requirements This section provides guidance to assessors and project teams on the types of evidence required to demonstrate compliance with BREEAM issues. Why does BREEAM require evidence? BREEAM is a third party assessment and certification scheme operated in accordance with international standards. Operating to international standards ensures that certification schemes such as BREEAM are run in a consistent and reliable manner. The BREEAM Assessor's assessment report and the BRE Global Quality Assurance process are the fundamental tenets of BREEAM, ensuring consistency of, and confidence in, the BREEAM rating awarded by the assessor. To maintain this consistency and credibility all certification decisions must be based on verified and credible project information that is traceable, i.e. evidence based. This is not only important for ensuring compliance with the international standards to which BREEAM operates, but also in terms of managing risk to clients and BREEAM Assessors in the event that a certification outcome is challenged. The assessment report and the BREEAM Assessor role It is the BREEAM Assessor who determines the BREEAM rating and the assessment report is the formal record of an assessor s audit against the criteria defined in the Technical Manual for a BREEAM scheme. The BREEAM certificate issued by BRE Global provides assurance that the service provided by the assessor (that is, the process of producing the assessment report) has been conducted in accordance with the requirements of the scheme. The purpose of the certificate is therefore to give confidence to the client in the assessor s performance and processes in determining a BREEAM rating. It is the role of the assessor to gather project information and use it to assess performance against the BREEAM scheme in a competent and impartial manner. To award a BREEAM credit, the assessor must be satisfied beyond reasonable doubt that the evidence gathered demonstrates unambiguous compliance with all relevant criteria defined in the BREEAM scheme. All evidence must be appropriately referenced in the formal report produce by the assessor and made available on request from BRE Global Ltd for quality assurance checks. Clear, ordered and well referenced evidence for each BREEAM issue and criterion facilitates efficient quality assurance and certification. BREEAM Assessors can access further guidance on assessment report referencing in a Guidance Note to be provided on the BREEAM website. Evidence types Evidence should not necessarily need to be prepared specifically for the purpose of the BREEAM assessment. In many instances, the assessor should be able to source readily available and prepared project information for the purpose of demonstrating compliance. For this reason, BREEAM aims to avoid being prescriptive on the type of evidence required, although some issues do require specific documents to be provided. The assessor and project team will find that many assessment issues require more than one piece or type of information to demonstrate compliance with one criterion, or alternatively, one piece of information may be sufficient to demonstrate compliance with multiple criteria. To assist project teams and the BREEAM assessor in their collation of building information at each stage of assessment, the different types of documentation that can be used as evidence of compliance are listed below. These evidence types fall broadly into three categories: 26 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

43 1. General evidence type 2. Specific evidence type 3. Other evidence type. For some assessment issues, the assessor is likely to require a mixture of general and specific evidence types. General evidence includes a broad list of defined building information commonly produced for a building project. One or a mix of these types of building information can be used to demonstrate compliance for one or more of the BREEAM issues and criteria, as deemed appropriate by the BREEAM Assessor for the stage of assessment. General BREEAM evidence types are listed below in Table - 8, and are not specifically listed in the Evidence section found within each BREEAM issue. Note, not all general evidence types will be appropriate for all issues and it is the responsibility of the assessor to ensure that the evidence provided demonstrates compliance. Specific evidence is defined building information that must be provided to verify compliance with the relevant criteria for the BREEAM credit sought. In most cases it will be the only type of evidence capable of verifying compliance. Where specific evidence is not provided and appropriately referenced in the assessment report, the Quality Assurance checks will identify non-conformity and certification will be delayed. An example of specific evidence would be a copy of the building regulations output document from the approved software for BREEAM issue Ene 01. When required, specific evidence is defined and listed for each BREEAM issue in the Evidence section for both final and interim stages of assessment. Note, not all BREEAM issues will have specific evidence requirements. Although the Evidence section of each issue highlights the evidence required to demonstrate compliance with particular criteria, simply submitting this evidence may not be sufficient to demonstrate compliance with that criteria. Additional general evidence types may be required to confirm full compliance with the criteria. For example Mat 01; to demonstrate compliance with criteria 1-5 at the design stage, a copy of the Mat 01 tool is listed in the Evidence table. However, in addition to the Mat 01 tool, further evidence is required to demonstrate how this tool has been completed, i.e. general evidence types such as building specifications confirming the materials to be used. Other types of evidence can still be used to demonstrate compliance where an information type provided by a client/design team is not listed in Table - 8 or the Evidence table for each issue. To avoid non-conformities and delays in certification, undefined alternative types of evidence must demonstrate credible, robust and traceable assurance to the same level as, or better than, specified or general evidence types. If in doubt, please contact BREEAM prior to accepting such evidence. Table - 8: Evidence types Ref Document/evidence type Description/notes E1 As constructed information Information produced at the end of a project to represent what has been constructed. This will comprise a mixture of as-built information/drawings and surveys from specialist subcontractors and the final construction issue from design team members. E2 Building information model (BIM) The BIM (or BIM files) used for the project containing relevant information/evidence of compliance. E3 BRE Global correspondence reference number For example the reference number for a BRE Global response to an assessors technical query. E4 BREEAM Assessor s site inspection report A formal report based on the BREEAM Assessor's own survey of the site/building to confirm compliance with BREEAM criteria. An assessor s site inspection report will be distinct from their formal BREEAM assessment report, serving as a form of evidence of compliance in its own right, and it may include photographs taken by the assessor as part of the survey. Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

44 BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Ref Document/evidence type Description/notes E5 Building contract(s) The contract (or excerpts/clauses from it) between the client and the contractor for the construction of the project. In some instances, the Building Contract may contain design duties for specialist subcontractors and/or design team members. E6 Certificates of compliance (third party) Examples include ISO 14001, BES 6001, FSC (Forest Stewardship Council), EPC (environmental profile certificate), EPD (environmental product declaration), Considerate Constructors etc. E7 Communication records Formal communication records between/from relevant project stakeholders and/or other third parties confirming an appointment, action or outcome. This may be in the form of a letter, meeting minutes, correspondence, publication or another form of media (see also additional guidance on following pages). E8 Communication strategy The strategy that sets out when the project team will meet, how they will communicate effectively and the protocols for issuing information between the various parties, both informally and at information exchanges E9 Computer aided modelling results/outputs Examples include thermal modelling, flooding, life cycle assessment, life cycle costing, ventilation modelling etc. E10 Construction specification The specification for the project/building. 1 E11 Construction stage data/information For example, purchase orders, metering data, log books, commissioning records/reports etc. E12 Contractual tree A diagram that clarifies the contractual relationship between the client and the parties undertaking the roles required on a project. E13 Cost information Project costs, including the cost estimate and life cycle costs. E14 Design drawings 2 Developed Design and Technical Design, including the coordinated architectural, structural and building services design. Site plans, drainage designs. E15 Design programme A programme setting out the strategic dates in relation to the design process. It is aligned with the Project Programme but is strategic in its nature, due to the iterative nature of the design process, particularly in the early stages. E16 Design responsibility matrix A matrix that sets out who is responsible for designing each aspect of the project and when. This document sets out the extent of any performance specified design. E17 Feasibility study Studies undertaken to test the feasibility of the Initial Project Brief for the site or in a 1 For the purpose of BREEAM the specific clause of the specification must be referenced within the report. 2 Evidence in the form of design drawings must be presented in a clear, professional working format with clearly identified legends indicating revision number, date, title, owner etc. (where appropriate). 28 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

45 Ref Document/evidence type Description/notes specific context and to consider how site-wide issues will be addressed. E18 Final project brief The Initial Project Brief amended so that it is aligned with the Concept Design and any briefing decisions made during this stage. E19 Other third party information For example, maps, public transport timetables, product data/details, manufacturers literature, government /EU standards or codes, EU labelling. E20 Professional services contract An agreement to provide professional or consulting services such as, designing, feasibility studies, or legal or technical advice. E21 Professional specialist reports Professional reports resulting from specialist surveys/studies/test results, e.g. contaminated land, ecology, flood risk assessment, surface water run-off report, site investigation, acoustics, indoor air quality plan, low and zero carbon technologies study, transportation analysis, commissioning reports, passive design analysis report, free cooling analysis report, life cycle assessment, landscape and habitat management plan etc. E22 Project Execution or Quality Plan The Project Execution Plan is produced in collaboration between the project lead and lead designer, with contributions from other designers and members of the project team. The Project Execution Plan sets out the processes and protocols to be used to develop the design. E23 Project programme The overall period for the briefing, design, construction and post completion activities of a project. E24 Project roles table A table that sets out the roles required on a project as well as defining the stages during which those roles are required and the parties responsible for carrying out the roles. E25 Project strategy The strategies developed in parallel with the Concept Design to support the design and, in certain instances, to respond to the Final Project Brief as it is concluded. Examples include strategies for sustainability, acoustics, handover, maintenance and operational, fire engineering, building control, technology, health and safety, construction, travel plan, sustainable procurement plan. E26 Risk assessment The risk assessment considers the various design risks and other risks on a project and how each risk will be managed and the party responsible for managing each risk. E27 Schedule of services A list of specific services and tasks to be undertaken by a party involved in the project which is incorporated into their professional services contract. E28 Strategic or initial project brief The brief prepared following discussions with the client to ascertain the project objectives, the client s business case and, in certain instances, in response to site feasibility studies. Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

46 BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 BRE Global Ltd endeavours to ensure that BREEAM requires only types or categories of information which already exist as a result of the design and procurement process for a new building. This information should therefore be readily available from the project team and easily referenced. The assessor is responsible for auditing the evidence as it is provided to them and is not required or expected to tailor evidence; doing so is likely to result in non-conformities and a delay in certification as the conflict of interest that may arise is investigated. Communication records Any communication records used as evidence must provide clear confirmation of the author s identity and role, the date and the recipient(s) identity. Formal letters of correspondence must be on company/organisation headed note-paper with a signature (electronic signatures are acceptable). Meeting minutes must include date, location and attendee information (names, organisations and roles), along with a record of the meeting and agreed actions. Written commitments at the interim stage of assessment Design stage At the interim design stage of assessment it is permissible to use letters or s to demonstrate intent to comply with BREEAM criteria (provided they meet the requirements for the communication records above). Such evidence must also make clear the actions and evidence (or an understanding thereof) that will be undertaken and provided to ensure the projects ongoing compliance, particularly at the final stage of assessment, i.e. post-construction. This is to ensure that the party who makes the commitment is clearly aware of the actions and evidence that needs to be supplied to demonstrate compliance with BREEAM at the final stage of assessment. Whilst letters of commitment can play a role in demonstrating compliance, they are not a replacement for more formal and established types of project information. The assessor must not award credits where they have a reason to doubt the validity or intent of written commitments or where it is not unreasonable to expect formal design or specification information to be available to confirm compliance. Written commitments at the final stage of assessment Postconstruction Evidence supplied at the post-construction stage must be reflective of the completed building and must therefore demonstrate what has actually been implemented. For example if sub-meters have been specified at design stage, evidence at the post construction stage would need to demonstrate that these have actually been installed. Appropriate evidence may be a photograph or as-built drawings showing the location of the sub-meters. Letters of commitment cannot be used to demonstrate compliance at the final, post-construction stage of assessment. The only exception to this is where the criteria require an action to take place post-construction, i.e. after handover and possibly during the building operation. An example could be a letter from the building owner/occupier making a commitment to conduct post-occupancy evaluation. As with letters of commitment at the design stage, the BREEAM Assessor must not award BREEAM credits where they have a reason to doubt the validity or intent of written commitments or where it is not unreasonable to expect a formal documentation, e.g. a schedule of services and/or professional services contract. 30 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

47 Management Management Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

48 Management BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Man 01 Project brief and design Number of credits available Minimum standards 4 Yes Aim To recognise and encourage an integrated design process that optimises building performance. Assessment criteria This issue is split into two parts: Stakeholder consultation (2 credits) Sustainability Champion (2 credits). The following is required to demonstrate compliance for: One credit Stakeholder consultation (project delivery) 1. Prior to completion of the Concept Design (RIBA Stage 2), the project delivery stakeholders have met to identify and define their roles, responsibilities and contributions for each of the key phases of project delivery. 2. In defining the roles and responsibilities for each key phase of the project, the following must be considered: a. End user requirements b. Aims of the design and design strategy c. Particular installation and construction requirements/limitations d. Occupiers budget and technical expertise in maintaining any proposed systems e. Maintainability and adaptability of the proposals f. Requirements for the production of project and end user documentation g. Requirements for commissioning, training and aftercare support. 3. The project team demonstrate how the project delivery stakeholder contributions and outcomes of the consultation process has influenced or changed the Initial Project Brief, including if appropriate, the Project Execution Plan, Communication Strategy, and the Concept Design. One credit - Stakeholder consultation (third party) 4. Prior to completion of the Concept Design stage, all relevant third parties have been consulted by the design team on the minimum consultation content. 5. The project must demonstrate how the stakeholder contributions and outcomes of the consultation exercise have influenced or changed the Initial Project Brief and Concept Design. 6. Prior to completion of the Technical Design (RIBA Stage 4), consultation feedback has been given to, and received by, all relevant parties. Additionally for Education, Healthcare, Law Courts and Major Transport Node building types only: (criterion 7) 7. The consultation exercise used a method carried out by an independent party. One credit - Sustainability Champion (design) 8. An a Sustainability Champion has been appointed to facilitate the setting and achievement of BREEAM performance target(s) for the project. The design stage Sustainability Champion is appointed to perform this role during the project preparation and brief stage, as defined by the RIBA Plan of Work The defined BREEAM performance target(s) has been contractually agreed between the client and design/project team 32 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

49 Man 01 Project brief and design Management no later than the Concept Design stage. 10. To achieve this credit at the interim (design) assessment stage, the agreed BREEAM performance target(s) must be demonstrably achieved by the project design. This is demonstrated via the BREEAM Assessor s design stage certification report. One credit - Sustainability Champion (monitoring progress) 11. The Sustainability Champion criteria 8, 9 and 10 have been achieved. 12. A Sustainability Champion is appointed to monitor progress against the agreed BREEAM performance target(s) throughout the design process and formally report progress to the client and design team. To do this the Sustainability Champion must attend key project/design team meetings during the Concept Design, Developed Design and Technical Design stages, as defined by the RIBA Plan of Work 2013, reporting during, and prior to, completion of each stage, as a minimum. Checklists and tables None. Compliance notes Ref Terms Description Shell and core CN1 Applicable assessment criteria Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options. Simple buildings CN2 Applicable assessment criteria Stakeholder consultation (project delivery) - (1 credit) 1. Criteria 1 to 3 Stakeholder consultation (third party) - (1 credit) 2. Criteria 4 to 6 3. Criterion 7 is not applicable. Exemplary level criteria The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve an innovation credit for this BREEAM issue. Sustainability Champion (design) - (1 credit) 4. Criteria 8 to 10. Sustainability Champion (monitoring progress) - (1 credit) 5. Criteria 11 to 12. Country specific Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

50 Management BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Ref Terms Description CN3 Country specific guidance No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. General CN4 Minimum consultation content Minimum consultation content will be dependent on the building but would typically include the following: 1. Functionality, build quality and impact (including aesthetics) 2. Provision of appropriate internal and external facilities (for future building occupants and visitors/users) 3. Management and operational implications 4. Maintenance resources implications 5. Impacts on the local community, e.g. local traffic/transport impact 6. Opportunities for shared use of facilities and infrastructure with the community/appropriate stakeholders, if relevant/appropriate to building type. 7. Compliance with statuary (national/local) consultation requirements. In the case of educational building types, minimum content also includes: 8. How the building/grounds could best be designed to facilitate learning and provide a range of social spaces appropriate to pupils, students and other users needs. In the case of building types containing technical areas/functions, e.g. laboratories, workshops etc., minimum content also includes: 9. The end-users broad requirements for such facilities, including appropriate sizing, optimisation and integration of equipment and systems. CN5 Assessing and awarding the available credits for a Sustainability Champion There is an additional credit for appointing a Sustainability Champion during the construction and handover phase (see BREEAM issue Man 03 Responsible construction practices). The key aim of the credit in Man 03 is to encourage and reward contractors and project teams that appoint a Sustainability Champion and therefore ensure continuation of the sustainability objectives during the construction phase and that the constructed building meets the client's target BREEAM rating. CN6 BREEAM related performance targets If, at Post Construction, the BREEAM performance targets set at the end of the Concept Stage have not been achieved, the credits awarded at the interim design certification stage for appointing the BREEAM Sustainability Champion must be withheld in the final assessment. See Relevant definitions. Methodology None. 34 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

51 Man 01 Project brief and design Management Evidence Criteria Interim design stage Final post-construction stage All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria. 1-3 Consultation plan setting out the process and scope of the consultation. As per interim design stage Additional information Relevant definitions BREEAM Accredited Professional (AP) An individual qualified and accredited by BRE as a specialist in built environment sustainability, environmental design and assessment. The role of the BREEAM AP is to facilitate the project team's efforts to successfully schedule activities, set priorities and negotiate the trade-offs required to achieve a target BREEAM rating when the design is formally assessed. For a list and contact details of BREEAM Accredited Professionals visit BREEAM related performance targets BREEAM performance targets refer specifically to the BREEAM rating and minimum standards required. This does not necessarily include individual targeted BREEAM issues/credits, which may be traded over the course of the project as it evolves. In agreeing a BREEAM target it is recommended that individual BREEAM issues, credits and criteria are targeted or prioritised to ensure that the agreed target is achievable, and achieved without potentially costly alterations to the design at a later stage. Communication strategy The RIBA Plan of Works 2013 defines the Communication Strategy as a strategy that sets out when the project team will meet, how they will communicate effectively and the protocols for issuing information between the various parties, both informally and at Information Exchanges. Consultation feedback This is feedback which focuses on the stakeholder suggestions, comments, recommendations and the consultation outcomes. This includes how the suggestions and outcomes influenced, or resulted in modifications to, the proposed design and building operation/use. Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

52 Management BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Independent party With respect to compliance with the criterion relating to using an 'independent party', the client/design team needs to demonstrates that either: 1. They have used a party independent of the design process to conduct the necessary consultation exercise, using a compliant method. Examples of independent third party compliant methods include the Design Quality Indicator 1 (DQI),and the Achieving Excellence Design Evaluation Toolkit (AEDET) in Healthcare buildings. Or alternatively; 2. If the consultation is to be carried out by an organisation involved with the design of the building e.g. the project architect, then they must present the assessor with evidence that robustly demonstrates the independence of the consultation process. BREEAM has not attempted to define what form this evidence must take; the onus is on the design team or relevant individual to clearly demonstrate to the BREEAM Assessor a credible level of independence. Key design team meetings Key design team meetings can be defined as those where fundamental decisions that influence or affect the building s proposed, design and its construction in accordance with the design (and therefore the building s sustainability impacts and BREEAM performance), are discussed and made. These meetings would typically include representatives from at least three of the parties listed below. 1. Representatives of the client/developer 2. The principal contractor 3. The architect 4. Structural engineers 5. Building services engineers 6. Cost consultants 7. Environmental consultants 8. Project management consultants. Key phases The definition of key phases of project delivery includes the following: Concept Design Developed Design Construction Commissioning and Handover In Use occupation. Project delivery stakeholders The purpose of criterion 1 is to reflect the need to consider the input of all the major project stakeholders from the earliest practical stage, to ensure smooth and successful delivery of the project's sustainability objectives. Project delivery stakeholders therefore include the client, the building occupier (where known), the design team and the principal contractor. With regards to contractors involvement, it ensures their input in terms of formulating sustainable design solutions, commenting/inputting on the practicality and build ability of (one or more) design solutions and their impact on programming, cost etc. BREEAM recognises that traditionally for some projects the contractor for the works might not be appointed at the early stages of the project and therefore compliance with criterion 1 would not be possible. In these instances, to ensure the aim of the criteria is upheld, provided that a suitably experienced person with substantial construction/contracting experience in projects similar to the proposed works is involved prior to appointment of the contractor, criterion 1 will be met. A suitably experienced person could be a contractor appointed as a consultant for this stage or a construction project manager. Project Execution Plan The RIBA Plan of Works 2013 defines a Project Execution Plan as a plan produced in collaboration between the project lead and lead designer, with contributions from other designers and members of the project team. The Project Execution Plan sets out the processes and protocols to be used to develop the design. It is sometimes referred to as a 'project quality plan'. 1 The Design Quality Indicator is a method to assess the design quality of buildings Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

53 Man 01 Project brief and design Management Relevant third parties. (see criterion 4) This includes but is not limited to the following: 1. Actual/intended building users (if known) including facilities management (FM) staff or those responsible for the day-to-day operation of the building and grounds. 2. Representative consultation group from the existing community (if the building is a new development in an existing community) or for a community still under construction. 3. Existing partnerships and networks that have knowledge and experience from existing buildings of the same type. 4. Potential users of any shared facilities, e.g. operators of clubs and community groups. AND the following where relevant: 5. In educational buildings, representatives of Local Education Authority, Board of Governors etc. 6. Local or national historic/heritage groups (over and above any requirements relating to statutory consultees). 7. Specialist service and maintenance contractors/representatives where the building function has particular technical requirements in complex environments, e.g. buildings containing laboratories. Sustainability Champion (design) With respect to the use of the term within this BREEAM issue only, an Sustainability Champion is an individual qualified and accredited to provide the design team with advice on built environment sustainability, environmental design and environmental assessment (including BREEAM). They will facilitate the team's efforts to successfully schedule activities, set priorities and negotiate the trade-offs required to achieve the target BREEAM rating when the design is formally assessed by the BREEAM Assessor. The aim of the Sustainability Champion credits is to encourage an integrated design and construction process that uses BREEAM as a framework for establishing, agreeing and achieving the desired level of sustainability performance for the project. The Sustainability Champion credits in this issue focus on achieving this objective during the preparation and brief, and design stages of the project. Individuals who are accredited under the following schemes approved by BRE Global meet the definition of an approved Sustainability Champion: BREEAM Accredited Professionals. Providers of schemes/qualifications who feel their members meet this definition and who would like to be listed under the definition of approved Sustainability Champion should contact BRE Global. Other information None. Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

54 Management BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Man 02 Life cycle cost and service life planning Number of credits available Minimum standards 4 No Aim To deliver whole life value from investment and promote economic sustainability by recognising and encouraging the use of life cycle costing and service life planning to improve design, specification and through-life maintenance and operation. Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance: Two credit - Elemental life cycle cost (LCC) 1. An elemental life cycle cost (LCC) analysis has been carried out, at Process Stage 2 (equivalent to Concept Design - RIBA Stage 2) together with any design option appraisals in line with 'Standardized method of life cycle costing for construction procurement' PD : The LCC analysis shows: a. An outline LCC plan for the project based on the buildings basic structure and envelope, appraising a range of options and based on multiple cash flow scenarios e.g. 20, 30, 50+ years; b. The fabric and servicing strategy for the project outlining services component and fit-out options (if applicable) over a 15 year period, in the form of an 'elemental LCC Plan'. One credit - Component level LCC Plan 3. A component level LCC plan has been developed by the end of Process Stage 4 (equivalent to Technical Design RIBA Stage 4) in line with PD :2008 and includes the following component types (where present): a. Envelope, e.g. cladding, windows, and/or roofing b. Services, e.g. heat source cooling source, and/or controls c. Finishes, e.g. walls, floors and/or ceilings d. External spaces, e.g. alternative hard landscaping, boundary protection. 4. Demonstrate, using appropriate examples provided by the design team, how the component level LCC plan has been used to influence building and systems design/specification to minimise life cycle costs and maximise critical value. One credit - Capital cost reporting 5. Report via the BREEAM assessment reporting tool, the predicted capital cost for the building in pounds per square metre ( k/m 2 ). Checklists and tables None. 38 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

55 Man 02 Life cycle cost and service life planning Management Compliance notes Ref Terms Description Shell and core CN1 Applicable assessment criteria Elemental life cycle cost, capital cost reporting and maintenance strategy,criteria 1 to 2 and 5 Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Component level LCC plan, criteria 3 to 4 Both options: The plan must include all component types to be installed by the developer. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options. Simple buildings CN2 Applicable assessment criteria Capital cost reporting - (1 credit) 1. Criterion 5 is applicable. Country specific CN3 Country specific guidance No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. General CN4 Appropriate examples See criterion 4. The option(s) selected to demonstrate how life cycle costs have been minimised and critical value maximised must be appropriate in terms of its relative impact on project costs, future building maintenance burden and size (volume or area). CN5 Pre-defined specifications Where the building is constructed to a pre-defined standard specification, the LCC plan for this specification may be used to help demonstrate compliance. CN6 Capital cost reporting At the design stage of assessment, where the information is not yet available, the credit can be awarded where the client commits to providing this information for the final stage of assessment. Building type specific CN7 Law Courts buildings responsibility for compliance When considering this issue, the term project team includes the Ministry of Justice. Responsibility for complying with the criteria of this issue may fall with any or all of the project team members and it is likely that this will vary depending on the procurement route used for the project. Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

56 Management BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Methodology None. Evidence Criteria Interim design stage Final post -construction stage All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria. 1-2 Elemental life cycle cost plan As per interim design stage 3-4 Component level life cycle cost plan As per interim design stage Additional information Relevant definitions Life cycle cost (LCC) The cost of an asset, or its parts throughout its life cycle, while fulfilling the performance requirements; a methodology for systematic economic evaluation of life cycle costs over a period of analysis, as defined in the agreed scope. Elemental LCC plan This is commonly used for developing solutions at project level during option appraisals. Costs are normally at building elemental level on the entire asset. Information may be a mix of typical benchmark costs for key elements, comparative cost modelling or approximate estimates. It is expressed as cost per square meter of gross internal floor area (GIFA) and presented for elemental analysis, aligned to the level of capital cost plans. Predicted capital cost TBC Other information Capital cost reporting This information is collected to assist research into the cost and savings of developing sustainable/breeam assessed buildings to inform the business case for sustainability and the ongoing development of BREEAM. All data submitted will be treated as confidential and only used anonymously. Component level LCC plan A component level LCC plan is commonly used for cost planning specification choices of systems, elements or component levels during design development. Component level LCC appraisal for service life planning at the feasibility stage requires the environment of the building and other local conditions to be identified, and the fundamental requirements to be met in planning the service life of the building. Decisions should be made on; 40 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

57 Man 02 Life cycle cost and service life planning Management the likely design life of the building (rather than the contractual design life) minimum functional performance criteria for each component over the building s design life components that must be repairable, maintainable or replaceable within the design life of the building. When to undertake life cycle costing Life cycle costing is relevant throughout the building or constructed asset s life cycle, in particular during the project planning, design and construction and also during the in-use phases. (For further information please refer to standard PD Supplement to ISO: ) Standardised method for life cycle costing (SMLCC) for construction The objectives of the Standardised method for life cycle costing (SMLCC) for construction procurement are to provide: 1. A UK standard cost data structure for life cycle costing, which aligns with BS ISO and with the Building Cost Information service (BCIS) Standard Form of Capital Cost Analysis (SFCA) and industry recognised occupancy cost codes. (Refer to Annexes A, B and C) ( ) 2. Life cycle costing practitioners with a standardised method of applying life cycle costing, applicable to the UK construction industry and to the key stages of the procurement process. 3. Process mapping the life cycle costing stages to help structure how to plan, generate, and interpret and present the results for a variety of different purposes and levels of life cycle cost planning. 4. Instructions on how to define the client s specific requirements for life cycle costing and the required outputs and forms of reporting and to decide on which method of economic evaluation to apply. 5. Simplification and demystification by providing practical guidance, instructions and definitions, together with informative worked examples on how to undertake life cycle costing (for construction). 6. An industry accepted methodology, to facilitate a more accurate, consistent and robust application of life cycle costing estimation and option appraisals, thereby creating a more effective and robust basis for life cycle cost analysis and benchmarking. This document, PD 15865, also seeks to help eliminate confusion over scoping and terminology and to address concerns over the uncertainty and risks that are undermining confidence in life cycle costs used for construction procurement. (For further information please refer to standard PD Supplement to ISO: from which this extract was sourced.) 1 PD 15865:2008 Standardized method of life cycle costing for construction procurement: a supplement to BS ISO Buildings and constructed assets - Service life planning - Part 5: Life cycle costing Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

58 Management BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Man 03 Responsible construction practices Number of credits available Minimum standards 6 Yes Aim To recognise and encourage construction sites which are managed in an environmentally and socially considerate, responsible and accountable manner. Assessment criteria This issue is split in to four parts: Environmental management (1 credit) Construction stage Sustainability Champion (1 credit) Considerate construction (up to 2 credits) Monitoring of construction site impacts (2t credits). The following is required to demonstrate compliance for: One credit Environmental management 1. The principal contractor operates an environmental management system (EMS) covering their main operations. The EMS must be either: a. be third party certified, to ISO 14001/EMAS or equivalent standard; or b. have a structure that is in compliance with BS and has reached phase four of the implementation stage, implementation and operation of the environmental management system, and has completed phase audits one to four, as defined in BS All site timber used in the project is sourced in accordance with the UK government s Timber Procurement Policy, seerelevant definitions). 3. The principal contractor implements best practice pollution prevention policies and procedures on site in accordance with Pollution Prevention Guidelines (PPG) 6 Working at construction and demolition sites. One credit Sustainability Champion (construction) 4. A Sustainability Champion is appointed to monitor the project to ensure ongoing compliance with the relevant sustainability performance/process criteria, and therefore BREEAM target(s), during the Construction, Handover and Close Out stages (as defined by the RIBA Plan of Works 2013). To do this the Sustainability Champion will ideally be site based or will visit the site regularly to carry out spot checks and, frequently and without prior warning to monitor site activities, with the relevant authority to do so. The Sustainability Champion will report on progress at relevant project team meetings including identifying potential areas of noncompliance and any action needed to mitigate. 5. The defined BREEAM performance target forms a requirement of the principal contractor's contract (See Compliance note CN6). 6. To achieve this credit at the final post-construction stage of assessment, the BREEAM related performance target for the project must be demonstrably achieved by the project. This is demonstrated via the BREEAM assessor s final postconstruction stage certification report. 42 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

59 Man 03 Responsible construction practices Management Up to two credits - Considerate construction 7. Where the principal contractor has used a compliant organisational, local or national considerate construction scheme and their performance against the scheme has been confirmed by independent assessment and verification. The BREEAM credits can be awarded as follows: a. One credit where the contractor achieves compliance with the criteria of a compliant scheme. b. Two credits where the contractor significantly exceeds compliance with the criteria of the scheme. Refer to therelevant definitionssection for a list of compliant schemes and therefore how performance, as determined by a compliant scheme, translates in to BREEAM credits. Up to two credits - Monitoring of construction site impacts 8. Responsibility has been assigned to an individual(s) for monitoring, recording and reporting energy use, water consumption and transport data (where measured) resulting from all on-site construction processes (and off site were possible) throughout the build programme. To ensure the robust collection of information, this individual(s) must have the appropriate authority and responsibility to request and access the data required. Where appointed, the Sustainability Champion could perform this role. One credit - Utility consumption Energy consumption 9. Monitor and record data on principal constructor's and sub-contractors' energy consumption in kwh (and where relevant, litres of fuel used) as a result of the use of construction plant, equipment (mobile and fixed) and site accommodation. 10. Report the total carbon dioxide emissions (total kgco 2 /project value) from the construction process via the BREEAM scoring and reporting tool. Water consumption 11. Monitor and record data on principal constructor's and sub-contractors' potable water consumption (m 3 ) arising from the use of construction plant, equipment (mobile and fixed) and site accommodation. 12. Using the collated data report the total net water consumption (m 3 ), i.e. consumption minus any recycled water use, from the construction process via the BREEAM scoring and reporting tool. One credit - Transport of construction materials and waste 13. Monitor and record data on transport movements and impacts resulting from delivery of the majority of construction materials to site and construction waste from site. As a minimum this must cover: a. Transport of materials from the factory gate to the building site, including any transport, intermediate storage and distribution, See Relevant definitions. b. Scope of this monitoring must cover the following as a minimum: i. Materials used in major building elements (i.e. those defined in BREEAM issue Mat 01 Life cycle impacts), including insulation materials. ii. Ground works and landscaping materials. c. Transport of construction waste from the construction gate to waste disposal processing/recovery centre gate. Scope of this monitoring must cover the construction waste groups outlined in the project's waste management plan. 14. Using the collated data, report separately for materials and waste, the total fuel consumption (litres) and total carbon dioxide emissions (kgco 2 eq), plus total distance travelled (km) via the BREEAM scoring and reporting tool. Exemplary level criteria The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve one innovation credit for this BREEAM issue: 15. With reference to the considerate construction criterion 7, in addition to meeting the criteria for two credits the contractor achieves compliance with the criteria of the compliant scheme to an exemplary level of practice. Checklists and tables None. Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

60 Management BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Compliance notes Ref Terms Description Shell and core CN1 Applicable assessment criteria Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options. Simple buildings CN2 Applicable assessment criteria Environmental management (1 credit) 1. Criteria 1 to 3 Considerate construction (up to 2 credits) 2. Criterion 7 Monitoring of construction site impacts Utility consumption (1 credit) 3. Criteria 8 to 12 Country specific CN3 Country specific guidance No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. General CN4 Site Clearance The scope of this issue applies to the principal contractor and their scope of works. If the scope of their works includes demolition and site clearance then this stage of work falls within the scope of the assessment and therefore the issue criteria. CN5 Site timber and reusable formwork See criterion 9. Re-usable timber formwork itself does not automatically comply. All timber used in the manufacture of the formwork must either be initially reclaimed, or sourced in accordance with the UK government's Timber Procurement Policy. CN6 Target setting At present data from construction sites do not generally exist in enough detail to set benchmarks and targets. BREEAM therefore does not set any requirements at present in terms of specific targets for reducing energy, water and transport consumption resulting from the construction process. Whilst BREEAM does not require them, it is strongly recommended that site specific targets are set and reported against. Following adoption of widespread and consistent measurement and reporting protocols for construction site impacts and collation of construction site data, BREEAM is likely in future to establish consistent and complimentary targets as part of demonstrating compliance with this BREEAM issue (see alsoadditional information). 44 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

61 Man 03 Responsible construction practices Management Ref Terms Description CN7 Healthcare buildings (NHS sites) See criterion 1. As a prerequisite of awarding any of the available credits for this issue, the principal contractor must achieve the measure requiring operation of An Environmental Management System (as defined in criterion 1 One credit Environmental management). Methodology None. Evidence Criteria Interim design stage Final post-construction stage All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria. Additional information Relevant definitions Compliant organisational, local or national considerate construction schemes The following are defined as compliant schemes for the purpose of this BREEAM issue: Considerate Constructors Scheme To achieve BREEAM credits using the Considerate Constructors Scheme (CCS) and its Code of Considerate Practice, the principal contractor must achieve scheme certification and a CCS score as follows: 1. One credit: a CCS score between 25 and 34* 2. Two credits: a CCS score between 35 and 39** 3. Exemplary level performance: a CCS score of 40 or more***. * score of 5 in each of the five sections must be achieved ** score of 7 in each of the five sections must be achieved *** score of 7 in each of the five sections must be achieved A site can be visited by a CCS Monitor more than once and the CCS Certificate will be awarded based on the results of the Monitor s final visit. At the final stage of the BREEAM assessment the number of BREEAM credits awarded should therefore be based on the final visit and the subsequent Monitor s report and certified CCS score. Considerate Constructors Scheme The Considerate Constructors Scheme (CCS) is a national initiative set up by the UK construction industry to improve its image. The scheme is a self-financing, independent organisation owned by the Construction Umbrella Bodies (Holdings) Ltd (made up of the Construction Products Association and the Construction Industry Council). Sites and companies that register with the scheme sign up and are monitored against a Code of Considerate Practice, designed to encourage best practice beyond statutory requirements. Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

62 Management BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Construction processes The construction process includes the enabling works, assembly, installation and dis-assembly activities necessary for servicing the construction and completion of a new building. Factory gate For the purposes of this issue, the factory gate is defined as being the product manufacturer gate (i.e. where manufacture and pre-assembly finishes and the material is in its final product form). Examples might include: 1. Steel/concrete/glass manufacturers for cladding, windows and beams etc 2. Quarry gate for aggregate and sand 3. Concrete plant for concrete 4. Saw mill and timber processing plant for timber. Sustainability Champion With respect to the use of the term within this BREEAM issue only, a Sustainability Champion is an individual trained and qualified to provide advice on built environment sustainability, environmental design/construction, and environmental assessment (including BREEAM). They will monitor and audit construction site activities and facilitate the construction team's efforts to successfully schedule activities, set priorities and take the necessary action required to meet the sustainability related performance levels required to achieve the target BREEAM rating, when the final building is formally assessed by the BREEAM Assessor.The aim of the Sustainability Champion credits is to encourage an integrated design and construction process that uses BREEAM as a framework for establishing, agreeing and achieving the desired level of sustainability performance for the project. The Sustainability Champion credits in this issue focus on achieving this objective during the construction, handover and close out stages of the project. Individuals who are accredited under the following schemes approved by BRE Global meet the definition of an approved Sustainability Champion: BREEAM Accredited Professionals Providers of other schemes or qualifications who feel their members meet this definition and who would like to be listed under the definition of a Sustainability Champion should contact BRE Global. Other information CO 2 Reporting protocols At time of publication the following guidance is available for CO 2 measuring protocols. 1. Encord: (have launched a CO 2 e protocol) 2. GHG Protocol DECC guidance for business: Tools for monitoring and targeting construction site impacts smarter is an add-on to BRE s online waste management planning tool SMARTWaste Plan. smarter enables SMARTWaste users to capture, monitor and target a project's onsite energy consumption, and therefore produce a CO 2 footprint, water consumption and responsible sourcing of timber. The system can be used as a tool to help meet the criteria of this issue and as a source of evidence for demonstrating compliance. It is available through the SMARTWaste Membership scheme. Transport and CCS data can also be collected by developing tailor-made versions of SMARTWaste. More details are available at Compliant organisational, local or national considerate construction schemes Where a considerate construction/constructors scheme exists and is not listed as a BREEAM compliant scheme, the scheme administrator/operator should apply to BRE Global Ltd. for details on how to achieve recognition as a compliant scheme. Construction Excellence and reporting of construction site impacts Constructing Excellence publish the construction industry key performance indicators (KPIs) based on data collected by the Department for Business, Innovation and Skills via a voluntary quarterly survey returns by contractors throughout the UK. The Office of National Statistics also reports the annual results in the Construction Statistics 46 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

63 Man 03 Responsible construction practices Management Annual. One of the key performance indicators is the amount of CO 2 emissions caused by the energy used during the construction process per 100,000 of project value (kg CO 2 / 100k). Information collated by contractors as part of their voluntary submissions to Constructing Excellence may also serve to help demonstrate compliance with this BREEAM issue. Reporting protocols (energy) (see criteria 2 and 3) At present, BREEAM sets no requirement on the use of a particular method or protocol for reporting energy/carbon from construction sites, as there are currently no uniformly accepted protocols for the collection of data and assessment of emissions from construction sites (source: Carbon: Reducing the footprint of the construction process, an action plan to reduce carbon (Strategic Forum and Carbon Trust, 2010). Until such time as there is a consistent measurement protocol for reportingco 2 /Energy from construction sites, BREEAM requires confirmation of the methodology and/or protocol used for monitoring, collating and reporting data on construction site energy consumption, as part of the reporting and certification process. Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

64 Management BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Man 04 Commissioning and handover Number of credits available Minimum standards 4 Yes Aim To encourage a properly planned handover and commissioning process that reflects the needs of the building occupants. Assessment criteria This issue is split into four parts: Commissioning schedule and responsibilities (1 credit) Commissioning building services (1 credit) Commissioning building fabric (1 credit) Handover (1 credit). The following is required to demonstrate compliance: One credit - Commissioning schedule and responsibilities 1. There is a schedule of commissioning that identifies and includes a suitable timescale for commissioning and recommissioning of all complex and non-complex building services, control systems and building fabric. 2. All commissioning activities are carried out in accordance with current Building Regulations, BSRIA 1 and CIBSE 2 guidelines and/or other appropriate standards, where applicable. Where a building management system (BMS) is specified, refer to the Compliance note CN7 on BMS commissioning procedures. 3. An appropriate project team member(s) is appointed to monitor and programme pre-commissioning, commissioning and, where necessary, re-commissioning activities on behalf of the client. 4. The principal contractor accounts for the commissioning programme, responsibilities and criteria within their budget and main programme of works, allowing for the required time to complete all commissioning activities prior to handover. One credit - Commissioning building services 5. For buildings with complex building services and systems, a specialist commissioning manager is appointed during the design stage (by either the client or the principal contractor) with responsibility for: a. Undertaking design reviews and giving advice on suitability for ease of commissioning. b. Providing commissioning management input to construction programming and during installation stages. c. Management of commissioning, performance testing and handover/post hand-over stages. Where there are simple building services, this role can be carried out by an appropriate project team member (see criterion 3 above), provided they are not involved in the general installation works for the building services system(s). One credit - Commissioning building fabric 6. The commissioning schedule and responsibilities criteria above are achieved (criteria 1-4). 7. The integrity of the building fabric, including continuity of insulation, avoidance of thermal bridging and air leakage paths is quality assured through completion of a thermographic survey and/or airtightness testing and inspection. The survey/testing is undertaken by Suitably Qualified Professional (see compliance note 3) in accordance with the appropriate standard. 8. Any defects identified in the thermographic survey and/or airtightness testing report is rectified prior to building handover and close out. Any remedial work must meet the required performance characteristics for the building/element. 48 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

65 Man 04 Commissioning and handover Management One credit - Handover A Building User Guide is developed prior to handover for distribution to the building occupiers and premises managers. A training schedule is prepared for building occupiers/premises managers, timed appropriately around handover and proposed occupation plans, which includes the following content as a minimum: 9. The building s design intent 10. The available aftercare provision and aftercare team main contact(s), including any scheduled seasonal commissioning and post occupancy evaluation 11. Introduction to, and demonstration of, installed systems and key features, particularly building management systems, controls and their interfaces 12. Introduction to the Building User Guide and other relevant building documentation, e.g. design data, technical guides, maintenance strategy, operations and maintenance (O&M) manual, commissioning records, log book etc. 13. Maintenance requirements, including any maintenance contracts and regimes in place. Checklists and tables None. Compliance notes Ref Terms Description Shell and core CN1 Applicable assessment criteria Commissioning schedule and responsibilities, commissioning building services, criteria 1 to 5 Option1- Shell only: These criteria are not applicable to this shell and core assessment option. Option 2- Shell and core only: With regard to the scope of services being specified/installed, all assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply and require assessment. Commissioning fabric, criteria 6 to 8 Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Handover, criterion 9 Option1- Shell only: This criterion is not applicable to this shell and core assessment option. Option 2- Shell and core only: The guide includes as far as possible all relevant sections regarding the services and fabric installed. On completion of works the building owner/agent/user hands it over to the fit-out contractor who can then complete the relevant sections based on the fit-out strategy. Handover, criterion 10 Both options: This criterion is not applicable. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options. Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

66 Management BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Ref Terms Description Simple buildings CN2 Applicable assessment criteria Commissioning schedule and responsibilities (1 credit) 1. Criteria 2 to 4 Handover (1 credit) 2. Criteria 9 and 10 Country specific CN3 Country specific guidance No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. General CN4 Other appropriate standards See criterion 2. Appropriate standards for completion of this criteria are referenced accordingly and include standards covering: building fabric commercial refrigeration fume cupboards microbiological safety cabinets. CN6 Process related equipment See criterion 2. Any process or manufacture-related equipment specified as part of the project may be excluded from the assessment of the commissioning credits, except where they form an integral part of the building HVAC services, such as some heat recovery systems. CN7 BMS commissioning procedures See criterion 2. Where a BMS is specified, the following commissioning procedures must be carried out: 1. Commissioning of air and water systems is carried out when all control devices are installed, wired and functional 2. In addition to air and water flow results, commissioning results include physical measurements of room temperatures, off coil temperatures and other key parameters as appropriate 3. The BMS/controls installation should be running in auto with satisfactory internal conditions prior to handover 4. All BMS schematics and graphics (if BMS is present) are fully installed and functional to user interface before handover 5. The occupier or facilities team is fully trained in the operation of the system. Methodology None. 50 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

67 Man 04 Commissioning and handover Management Evidence Critera Design stage Final post-construction stage All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria Thermographic survey and level 2 thermography certificate Building User Guide Additional information Relevant definitions Building User Guide Dedicated building/site specific guidance for the non-technical building user. The purpose of the guide is to help building users access, understand and operate the building efficiently and in a manner in keeping with the original design intent. A Building User Guide will provide easily accessible and understandable information relevant to the following stakeholders: The building s staff (or where relevant residents) The non-technical facilities management team/building manager Other building users, e.g. visitors/community users The content of the guide will be specific to the building type, but should include information on the following: Overview of the building and its environmental strategy, e.g. energy/water/waste efficiency policy/strategy and how users should engage with/deliver the policy/strategy. Building services overview and access to controls, e.g. where to find them, what they control, how to operate effectively and efficiently etc. Pre-arrival information for visitors, e.g. access and security procedures/provisions Provision of, and access to, shared facilities Safety and emergency information/instructions Building related operational procedures specific to building type/operation, e.g. laboratories. Building related incident reporting/feedback arrangements Building related training information/links Provision of, and access to, transport facilities, e.g. public transport, cyclist facilities, pedestrian routes etc. Provision of, and access to, local amenities Re-fit, refurbishment and maintenance arrangements/considerations Links, references and relevant contact details There is no requirement on what format the Building User Guide should take. Complex systems There include, but are not limited, to air conditioning, comfort cooling, mechanical ventilation, displacement ventilation, complex passive ventilation, building management systems (BMS), renewable energy sources, microbiological safety cabinets and fume cupboards, cold storage enclosures and refrigeration plant, fume cupboards, microbiological safety cabinets. Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

68 Management BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Suitably qualified professionals - thermographic survey and airtightness testing Thermography surveys and airtightness testing are to be undertaken by suitably qualified professionals in accordance with the appropriate standards, as follows: Airtightness testing: by professionals with membership of ATTMA (Air Tightness Testing and Measurement Association) attained at organisational level maintaining UKAS accreditation (as air tightness testing laboratories to ISO 17025). Thermographic survey: by a professional holding a valid Level 2 certificate in thermography (as defined by the UKTA website Other information None 1 BSRIA Commissioning Guides: Application Guide 1/91 - Commissioning of VAV systems in Buildings Application Guide 20/95 - Commissioning of Pipework Systems Commissioning HVAC Systems: Guidance on the division of responsibilities (TM 1/88.1) Commissioning of Air Systems. Application procedures for buildings Application Guide 3/89.3 Pre-Commission Cleaning of Pipework Systems (BG 29/2012) 3/89.3 Commissioning Water Systems application procedures for buildings Superseded AG Commissioning Water Systems (BG 2/2010). Commissioning Job Book - A framework for managing the commissioning process (BG 11/2010) 2 CIBSE Commissioning Codes: Set of Seven Codes (2003) CIBSE Commissioning Code A: Air Distribution Systems (1996 confirmed 2006). ISBN: CIBSE Commissioning Code B: Boilers ISBN: CIBSE Commissioning Code C: Automatic Controls ISBN: CIBSE Commissioning Code L: Lighting (SLL Commissioning Code L). ISBN: CIBSE Commissioning Code M: Commissioning Management. ISBN: CIBSE Commissioning Code R: Refrigerating Systems. ISBN: CIBSE Commissioning Code W: Water Distribution Systems ISBN: Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

69 Man 05 Aftercare Management Man 05 Aftercare Number of credits available Minimum standards 3 Yes Aim To provide post-handover aftercare to the building owner/occupants during the first year of occupation to ensure the building operates and adapts, where relevant, in accordance with the design intent and operational demands. Assessment criteria This issue is split in to three parts: Aftercare support (1 credit) Seasonal commissioning (1 credit) Post occupancy evaluation (1 credit). The following is required to demonstrate compliance : One credit - Aftercare support 1. There is (or will be) operational infrastructure and resources in place to provide aftercare support to the building occupier(s), which includes the following as a minimum: a. A meeting programmed to occur between the aftercare team/individual and the building occupier/management (prior to initial occupation, or as soon as possible thereafter) to: i. Introduce the aftercare team or individual to the aftercare support available, including the Building User Guide (where existing) and training schedule/content. ii. Present key information about the building including the design intent and how to use the building to ensure it operates as efficiently and effectively as possible. b. Onsite facilities management training, to include a walkabout of the building and introduction to and familiarisation with the building systems, their controls and how to operate them in accordance with the design intent and operational demands. c. Initial aftercare support provision for at least the first month of building occupation, e.g. on-site attendance on a weekly basis to support building users/management (this could be more or less frequent depending on the complexity of the building/building operations). d. Longer term aftercare support provision for occupants for at least the first 12 months from occupation, e.g. a helpline, nominated individual or other appropriate system to support building users/management. 2. There is (or will be) operational infrastructure and resources in place to co-ordinate the collection and monitoring of energy and water consumption data for a minimum of 12 months, once the building is occupied. This is done to facilitate analysis of discrepancies between actual and predicted performance, with a view to adjusting systems and/or user behaviours accordingly. Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

70 Management BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 One credit - Seasonal commissioning 3. The following seasonal commissioning activities will be completed over a minimum 12 month period, once the building becomes substantially occupied: a. Complex systems - Specialist Commissioning Manager: i. Testing of all building services under full load conditions, i.e. heating equipment in mid-winter, cooling/ventilation equipment in mid-summer, and under part load conditions (spring/autumn). ii. Where applicable, testing should also be carried out during periods of extreme (high or low) occupancy. iii. Interviews with building occupants (where they are affected by the complex services) to identify problems or concerns regarding the effectiveness of the systems. iv. Re-commissioning of systems (following any work needed to serve revised loads), and incorporating any revisions in operating procedures into the operations and maintenance (O&M) manuals. b. Simple systems (naturally ventilated) - external consultant/aftercare team/facilities manager i. Review thermal comfort, ventilation, and lighting, at three, six and nine month intervals after initial occupation, either by measurement or occupant feedback. ii. Take all reasonable steps to re-commission systems following the review to take account of deficiencies identified and incorporate any relevant revisions in operating procedures into the O&M manuals. One credit - Post occupancy evaluation 4. The client or building occupier makes a commitment to carry out a post occupancy evaluation (POE) exercise one year after initial building occupation. This is done to gain in-use performance feedback from building users to inform operational processes, including re-commissioning activities, and maintain or improve productivity, health, safety and comfort. The POE is carried out by an independent party (see Man 01 Project brief and design Relevant definitions) and needs to cover: a. A review of the design intent and construction process (review of design, procurement, construction and handover processes). b. Feedback from a wide range of building users including facilities management on the design and environmental conditions of the building covering: i. Internal environmental conditions (light, noise, temperature, air quality) ii. Control, operation and maintenance iii. Facilities and amenities iv. Access and layout v. Other relevant issues. c. Sustainability performance (energy/water consumption, performance of any sustainable features or technologies e.g. materials, renewable energy, rain- water harvesting etc.). 5. The client or building occupier makes a commitment to carry out the appropriate dissemination of information on the building s post occupancy performance. This is done to share good practice and lessons learned and inform changes in user behaviour, building operational processes and procedures, and system controls. Refer to Compliance notes CN5CN6 for a definition of appropriate dissemination. This also provides advice on appropriate dissemination where the building or building information is commercially or security sensitive. Exemplary level criteria The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve one innovation credit for this BREEAM issue: 5. There is (or will be) operational infrastructure and resources in place to co-ordinate the following activities at quarterly intervals for the first three years of building occupation: a. Collection of occupant satisfaction, energy consumption and water consumption data. b. Analysis of the data to check the building is performing as expected and make any necessary adjustments to systems controls or to inform building user behaviours. c. Setting targets for reducing water and energy consumption and monitor progress towards these. d. Feedback any lessons learned to the design team and developer for use in future projects. e. Provision of the actual annual building energy, water consumption and occupant satisfaction data to BRE. Checklists and tables None. 54 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

71 Man 05 Aftercare Management Compliance notes Ref Terms Description Shell and core CN1 Applicable assessment criteria This issue is not applicable. Simple buildings CN2 Applicable assessment criteria This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional guidance on how to apply the criteria. Country specific CN3 Country specific guidance No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. General CN4 Collection and monitoring of energy and water consumption data See criteria 2 and 4. This function can be coordinated/carried out by a dedicated aftercare team or, where the building occupier is known and able to confirm compliance based on their existing or proposed operations for the building, the building owner/occupier s estates/facilities management team. CN5 Appropriate dissemination of post occupancy evaluation information See criterion Appropriate dissemination includes communication to immediate stakeholders such as building occupants, managers and owners. In addition information should be communicated externally. 2. Appropriate dissemination in most cases will be the production and publication of a building case study through one of the following means: 1. Client s/building owner s own website, publicly available literature or press release 2. Industry/sector or government/local authority sponsored website or information portals. Where there is a demonstrably justifiable reason why public dissemination is not possible, for example the information is commercially or security sensitive, compliance can be demonstrated by a commitment to produce and disseminate the relevant information at an organisational level or to appropriate internal/external stakeholders. Alternatively, the sensitive parts of the relevant information for dissemination can be omitted from the publication. CN6 Relevant information for dissemination See criterion 4. This includes the following information about the building and its performance: 1. A basic description of the project and building 2. BREEAM rating and score 3. The key innovative and low-impact design features of the building 4. Project cost 5. Project size: floor area, site area Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

72 Management BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Ref Terms Description 6. Facilities available for community use (where relevant) 7. Any steps taken during the construction process to reduce environmental impacts, i.e. innovative construction management techniques 8. Predicted and actual carbon dioxide emissions and/or Energy Performance Certificate rating. 9. Outcomes of the post occupancy evaluation study, to share the lessons learned from the project including: a. Occupant feedback b. Energy and water consumption including renewable energy generation, level of rainwater/grey water provision. CN7 Provision of annual energy and water consumption and occupant satisfaction data See criterion 4. One way of demonstrating compliance with this criterion is for the client/end user to register and therefore commit the building for assessment under the relevant part of the BREEAM In-Use scheme. Methodology None. Evidence Criteria Interim design stage Final post-construction stage All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria. Additional information Relevant definitions Complex systems These include, but are not limited to, air conditioning, mechanical ventilation, displacement ventilation, complex passive ventilation, building management systems (BMS), renewable energy sources, microbiological safety cabinets and fume cupboards, cold storage enclosures and refrigeration plant, fume cupboards, microbiological safety cabinets. Soft Landings Framework 1 (see criterion 1) A framework written and produced by Useable Buildings Trust (UBT) and Building Services Research and Information Association (BSRIA) that seeks to promote improved briefing, design, handover and building performance in use. Embedding the principles of this framework within a project should ensure that the evidence is available to demonstrate compliance with particular aspects of the criteria under this BREEAM issue. Please also note that BSRIA has produced a BREEAM New Construction/Soft landings interpretation note 2 for clients and design teams. 56 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

73 Man 05 Aftercare Management Specialist Commissioning Manager The Specialist Commissioning anager is a specialist contractor rather than a general sub-contractor. Other information It should be noted that the government Soft Landings programme will become compulsory for local government developments after This is a version of the Soft Landings concept tailored for use on public sector related projects to link in with the work of the government s Building Information Modelling Task Group. Further information is available from: 1 The Soft Landings Framework, for better briefing, design, handover and building performance in use, Usable Buildings Trust (UBT), BSRIA BG 4/ BREEAM 2011 and Soft Landings, an interpretation note for clients and designers, BSRIA BG 28/2011. Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

74 Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Health and Wellbeing 58 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

75 Hea 01 Visual comfort Health and Wellbeing Hea 01 Visual comfort Number of credits available Minimum standards Building type dependent No Aim To ensure daylighting, artificial lighting and occupant controls are considered at the design stage to ensure best practice visual performance and comfort for building occupants. Assessment criteria This issue is split into three parts: Daylighting and glare control (up to3 credits - building type dependent) View out (1 credit except for a healthcare building with inpatient areas, which has 2 credits available) Internal and external lighting (1 credit) The following is required to demonstrate compliance: One credit - Glare control 1. The potential for disabling glare has been designed out of all relevant building areas using a glare control strategy, either through building form and layout and/or building design measures (see Compliance notes CN5). 2. The glare control strategy avoids increasing lighting energy consumption, by ensuring that: a. The glare control system is designed to maximise daylight levels under all conditions whilst avoiding disabling glare in the workplace or other sensitive areas. The system should not inhibit daylight from entering the space under cloudy conditions, or when sunlight is not on the facade. AND b. The use or location of shading does not conflict with the operation of lighting control systems. Up to two credits - Daylighting (building type dependent) 3. The glare control criteria 1 and 2 have been achieved. 4. Daylighting criteria have been met using either of the following options: a. The relevant building areas meet good practice daylight factor(s) and other criterion as outlined in Table - 9 and Table OR b. The relevant building areas meet good practice average and minimum point daylight illuminance criteria as outlined in Table Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

76 Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Table - 9: Minimum values of average daylight factor required. Building/area type Credits Daylight factor required Minimum area (m 2 ) to comply Other requirements Education buildings Pre-schools, schools, further educationoccupied spaces Higher educationoccupied spaces 2 2% 80% EITHER (a) OR {(b) and (c)} in Table % 60% OR Higher educationoccupied spaces 2 2% 80% Healthcare buildings Staff and public areas 2 2% 80% EITHER (a) OR {(b) and (c)} in Table - 10 Occupied patient s areas (dayrooms, wards) and consulting rooms 3% 80% Multi-residential buildings Kitchen 1 2% 80% EITHER (a) OR (c) in Table - 10 Living rooms, dining rooms, studies (including home office) 2 % 80% Non-residential or communal occupied spaces 2% 80% Retail buildings Sales areas 1-35% Point daylight factors of 2% or more Other occupied areas 1 2% 80% EITHER (a) OR {(b) and (c)} in Table - 10 Prison buildings 60 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

77 Hea 01 Visual comfort Health and Wellbeing Building/area type Credits Daylight factor required Minimum area (m 2 ) to comply Other requirements Cells and custody cells 1 1.5% 80% N/A Internal association or atrium area (prison buildings only) 3% 80% EITHER a uniformity ratio of at least 0.7 OR a minimum point daylight factor of 2.1% Patient care spaces 3% 80% EITHER (a) OR {(b) and (c)} in Table - 10 Teaching, lecture and seminar spaces 2% 80% EITHER (a) OR {(b) and (c)} in Table - 10 Courts, industrial, office buildings and all other building types All occupied spaces, unless indicated in Relevant definitions 1 2% 80% EITHER (a) OR {(b) and (c)} in Table - 10 Table - 10: Daylighting uniformity criteria. Ref Criteria (a) A uniformity ratio of at least 0.3 or a minimum point daylight factor of at least 0.3 times the relevant average daylight factor value in Table - 9. Spaces with glazed roofs, such as atria, must achieve a uniformity ratio of at least 0.7 or a minimum point daylight factor of at least 0.7 times the relevant average daylight factor value in Table - 9. (b) At least 80% of the room has a view of sky from desk or table top height (0.85m in multi-residential buildings, 0.7m in other buildings). (c) The room depth criterion d/w +d/hw < 2/(1-RB) is satisfied. Where: d = room depth, w = room width, HW = window head height from floor level, RB = average reflectance of surfaces in the rear half of the room, Note: Table - 16gives maximum room depths in metres for different room widths and window head heights of sidelit rooms Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

78 Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Table - 11: Space type and illuminance requirements-both criteria (average illuminance and minimum point illuminance) should be met. Area type Credits Minimum area to comply Average daylight illuminance (averaged over entire space) Minimum daylight illuminance at worst lit point Education buildings Pre-schools, schools, further education - occupied spaces 2 80% At least 300 lux for 2000 hours per year or more At least 90 lux for 2000 hours per year or more Higher education - occupied spaces 1 60% OR Higher education - occupied spaces 2 80% Healthcare buildings Staff and public areas 2 80% At least 300 lux for 2000 hours per year or more At least 90 lux for 2000 hours per year or more Occupied patient's areas (dayrooms, wards) and consulting rooms 80% At least 300 lux for 2650 hours per year or more At least 300 lux for 2650 hours per year or more Multi-residential buildings Kitchen 1 100% At least 100 lux for 3450 hours per year or more At least 30 lux for 3450 hours per year or more Living rooms, dining rooms, studies (including home office) At least 100 lux for 3450 hours per year or more At least 30 lux for 3450 hours per year or more Nonresidential/communal occupied spaces 80% At least 200 lux for 2650 hours per year or more At least 60 lux for 2650 hours per year or more Retail buildings Sales areas 1 35% At least 200 lux point daylight illuminances for 2650 hours per year or more Other occupied areas 1 80% At least 200 lux for 2650 hours per year or more At least 60 lux for 2650 hours per year or more 62 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

79 Hea 01 Visual comfort Health and Wellbeing Area type Credits Minimum area to comply Average daylight illuminance (averaged over entire space) Minimum daylight illuminance at worst lit point Prison buildings Cells and custody cells 1 80% At least 100 lux for 3150 hours per year or more N/A Internal association / atrium area 80% At least 300 lux for 2650 hours per year or more At least 210 lux for 2650 hours per year or more Patient care spaces 80% Teaching, lecture and seminar spaces 80% At least 300 lux for 2000 hours per year or more At least 90 lux for 2000 hours per year or more Courts, industrial, office buildings and all other building types All occupied spaces, unless indicated in Relevant definitions 1 80% At least 300 lux for 2000 hours per year or more At least 90 lux for 2000 hours per year or more One credit - View out 5. 95% of floor space in relevant building areas is within 7m of a wall which has a window or permanent opening that provides an adequate view out. 6. The window/opening must be 20% of the surrounding wall area (refer to relevant definition in the Additional information section). Where the room depth is greater than 7m, compliance is only possible where the percentage of window/opening is the same as, or greater than, the values in table 1.0 of BS In addition, the building type criteria in Table - 12 are applicable to view out criteria. Table - 12: View out building specific requirements. Building type View out requirements Prison buildings Cells An adequate view out from a normal standing or sitting position and the distance between each window and nearest external solid object (i.e. buildings, screens, walls/fences) is 10m. Where existing features prevent compliance with this criteria in less than 20% of the cells within the building, the credit can still be awarded. Patient occupied spaces See Healthcare requirements for these spaces. Multi-residential buildings Living rooms (self contained flats), communal lounges, individual bedrooms and bedsits (sheltered housing) All positions within relevant areas are to be within 5m of a wall which has a window or permanent opening providing an adequate view out. The window/opening must be 20% of the surrounding wall area. Healthcare buildings with inpatient areas Patient occupied spaces, e.g. wards and dayrooms As criterion 5 for the relevant building areas PLUS the distance between the wall with the Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

80 Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Building type View out requirements (one additional credit) window/opening and nearest external solid object (e.g. buildings, screens, walls/fences) is 10m. One credit - Internal and external lighting levels, zoning and control Internal lighting 8. All internal lighting systems are designed to avoid flicker and stroboscopic effects. 9. Internal lighting in all relevant areas of the building is designed to provide an illuminance (lux) level appropriate to the tasks undertaken, accounting for building user concentration and comfort levels. This can be demonstrated through a lighting design strategy that provides illuminance levels in accordance with the CIBSE Code for Lighting 2012 and any other relevant industry standard. 10. For areas where computer screens are regularly used, the lighting design complies with CIBSE Lighting Guide 7 2 sections 3.3, 4.6, 4.7, 4.8 and 4.9. This gives recommendations highlighting: a. Limits to the luminance of the luminaires to avoid screen reflections. (manufacturers data for the luminaires should be sought to confirm this). b. For up-lighting, the recommendations refer to the luminance of the lit ceiling rather than the luminaire; a design team calculation is usually required to demonstrate this. c. Recommendations for direct lighting, ceiling illuminance, and average wall illuminance. External lighting 11. All external lighting located within the construction zone is designed to provide illuminance levels that enable users to perform outdoor visual tasks efficiently and accurately, especially during the night. To demonstrate this, external lighting provided is specified in accordance with BS :2013 Lighting of roads and public amenity areas 3. Zoning and occupant control 12. Internal lighting is zoned to allow for occupant control (see relevant definition) in accordance with the criteria below for relevant areas present within the building: a. In office areas, zones of no more than four workplaces b. Workstations adjacent to windows/atria and other building areas separately zoned and controlled c. Seminar and lecture rooms: zoned for presentation and audience areas d. Library spaces: separate zoning of stacks, reading and counter areas e. Teaching space or demonstration area f. Whiteboard or display screen g. Auditoria: zoning of seating areas, circulation space and lectern area h. Dining, restaurant, café areas: separate zoning of servery and seating/dining areas i. Retail: separate zoning of display and counter areas j. Bar areas: separate zoning of bar and seating areas k. Wards or bedded areas: zoned lighting control for individual bed spaces and control for staff over groups of bed spaces l. Treatment areas, dayrooms, waiting areas: zoning of seating and activity areas and circulation space with controls accessible to staff. Note: the criteria for zoning of lighting control are excluded for assessments of prison buildings. 13. Areas used for teaching, seminar or lecture purposes have lighting controls provided in accordance with CIBSE Lighting Guide In addition the building type criteria intable - 13 (where relevant); Table - 13: Internal and external lighting building specific requirements. Building type Internal and external lighting requirements Education buildings Manual lighting controls are easily accessible for the teacher whilst teaching and on 64 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

81 Hea 01 Visual comfort Health and Wellbeing Building type Internal and external lighting requirements entering/leaving the teaching space. Prison buildings Cells Lit to a maintained illuminance of 200 lux at table-top level. In addition there must be the facility (using, for example, dimming, step switching or separate task and general lighting) for the occupant of the cell to select a lower level of general lighting if required. Exercise yards Lit to a maintained illuminance of at least 10 lux. However, if such spaces are, or will be, used as sports facilities they must be lit to a maintained illuminance of 100 lux. Court buildings Separate zoning is also provided for the following areas (as a minimum): 1. Judge s/magistrate s bench 2. Dock 3. Jury area 4. Public seating area. Lighting control of the zones in the above spaces, and the courtroom as a whole, cater for the following settings: 1. Full lighting (to allow cleaning etc.) 2. Normal lighting (for court sessions) 3. Dimmed (for the purpose of showing audio visual evidence, but allowing enough light for note taking). Exemplary level criteria The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve an innovation credit for daylighting: 15. Criteria 1 and 2 have been achieved. 16. Daylighting criteria have been met using either of the following options: a. Relevant building areas meet exemplary daylight factor(s) and the relevant criteria in Table OR b. Relevant building areas meet exemplary average and minimum point daylight illuminance criteria in Table Table - 14: Exemplary level values of average daylight factor required. Area type Credits Daylight factor required Minimum area (m 2 ) to comply Other requirements All building types The criteria outlined in Table - 15 concerning uniformity ratio (a), view of sky (b) or room depth criterion (c) are met where they are used to demonstrate compliance. All building types (excluding retail see below) Functions as identified in the standard criteria (multi storey buildings) 1 3% 80% Where used, a minimum point daylight factor of 1.2% OR 2.1% for spaces with glazed roofs, such as atria Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

82 Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Area type Credits Daylight factor required Minimum area (m 2 ) to comply Other requirements Functions as identified in the standard criteria (single storey buildings) 4% 80% Where used, a minimum point daylight factor of 1.6% OR 2.8% for spaces with glazed roofs, such as atria Prisons and court cells 2% 80% N/A Prison internal association/atrium area 5% 80% A uniformity ratio of at least 0.7 or a minimum point daylight factor of 3.5%. Retail Sales areas 1 N/A 50% Point daylight factor 2% Common areas and offices (multi storey buildings) 3% 80% Where used, a minimum point daylight factor of 1.2% OR 2.1% for spaces with glazed roofs, such as atria Common areas and offices (single storey buildings) 4% 80% Where used, a minimum point daylight factor of 1.6% OR 2.8% for spaces with glazed roofs, such as atria Table - 15: Exemplary level illuminance value requirements. Both criteria (average illuminance and minimum point illuminance) should be met. Area type Credits Minimum area to comply Average daylight illuminance (averaged over entire space) Minimum daylight illuminance at worst lit point All building types (excluding retail see below) Multistorey buildings Occupied spaces (unless indicated below) 1 80% At least 300 lux for 2650 hours per year or more At least 90 lux for 2650 hours per year or more 66 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

83 Hea 01 Visual comfort Health and Wellbeing Area type Credits Minimum area to comply Average daylight illuminance (averaged over entire space) Minimum daylight illuminance at worst lit point Single storey buildings Occupied spaces (unless indicated below) 80% At least 300 lux for 3000 hours per year or more At least 120 lux for 3000 hours per year or more; or in spaces with glazed roofs (such as atria), at least 210 lux for 3000 hours per year or more Prisons and courts buildings Cells and sustody sells 80% At least 100 lux for 3450 hours per year or more N/A Prison buildings Internal association or atrium areas 80% At least 300 lux for 3250 hours per year or more At least 210 lux for 3250 hours per year or more Retail Retail buildings Sales areas 1 50% At least 300 lux point daylight illuminances for 2000 hours per year or more Retail buildings Other occupied areas 80% Select relevant criteria above for occupied spaces dependant on whether you are assessing a Multi-storey or Single-storey building. Checklists and tables Reflectance for maximum room depths and window head heights The table below gives maximum room depths in metres for different room widths and window head heights of sidelit rooms. Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

84 Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Table - 16: Reflectance for maximum room depths and window head heights Reflectance (RB) Room width (m) Window head height (m) Compliance notes Ref Terms Description Shell and core CN1 Applicable assessment criteria Glare control criteria 1 to 2 Both options : All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. The design team must demonstrate how the glare control criteria will be met without a reliance on blinds when the building is occupied. Daylighting criteria 3 to 4 and 15 to 16 Both options : All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply View out criteria 5 to 7 Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Where it is not possible to confirm which areas of the building will contain workstations/benches or desks, then all areas of the building designed for and/or likely to be occupied by workstations/benches or desks must comply with the relevant criteria. Internal lighting criteria 8 to 10, 12 to 14 Both options : These assessment criteria are not applicable to a shell and core assessment. External lighting criteria 11, 14 Both options 1 and 2: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options. Simple buildings 68 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

85 Hea 01 Visual comfort Health and Wellbeing Ref Terms Description CN2 Applicable assessment criteria This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional guidance on how to apply the criteria. Country specific CN3 Country specific guidance No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. General Daylighting and glare control CN4 Percentage of assessed area See criterion 4. Where the criteria specify that a percentage of floor area must be adequately illuminated by daylight, this refers to the percentage of the total floor area of all the rooms that must be assessed, i.e. the compliant area. If for example, a development has six rooms that must be assessed, each 150m 2 (total area 900m 2 ) and 80% of this floor area must meet the criterion, then 720m 2 must comply with the criterion; this is equal to 4.8 rooms. The number of rooms that must comply must always be rounded up; therefore in this example, five rooms must have an average daylight factor of 2% or more (plus meet the other criteria) to achieve the credit. CN5 Compliant forms of glare control -curtains as glare control Compliant shading measures for meeting glare control criteria include: building integrated measures (e.g. low eaves) occupant controlled devices such as blinds (where transmittance value is < 0.1 (10%)) bio-climatic design external shading or brise soleil Glare control must provide shading from both high level summer and low level winter sun. Where using fixed systems, design studies can be used to demonstrate that sunlight is prevented from reaching building occupants during occupied hours. Curtains (where used without other forms of shading) do not meet the criteria for the glare control criteria, as they do not provide sufficient control to optimise daylight in to the space. Furthermore, the use of curtains to control glare is likely to cause occupants to rely more on artificial lighting. CN6 Borrowed light For areas where borrowed light is used to demonstrate compliance with daylighting criteria, calculations or results from appropriate lighting design software must be provided to demonstrate that such areas meet the BREEAM criteria (if the light from these sources is required in order for the room to comply). Examples of borrowed light include: light shelves, clerestory glazing, sun pipes or internal translucent/transparent partitions (such as those using frosted glass). CN7 Room depth criterion - rooms lit from two opposite sides For rooms lit by windows on two opposite sides, the maximum room depth that can be satisfactorily illuminated by daylight is twice the limiting room depth (d) (measured from window wall to window wall; CIBSE Lighting Guide LG10 5 The Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

86 Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Ref Terms Description reflectance of the imaginary internal wall should be taken as 1. CN8 Uniformity with rooflights The room depth criteria cannot be used where the lighting strategy relies on rooflights. In such areas either appropriate software has to be used to calculate the uniformity ratio or, in the case of a regular array of rooflights across the whole of the space, Figure 2.36 (p.37) within CIBSE Lighting Guide LG10 can be used to determine the uniformity ratio. CN9 Daylighting - uniformity ratio Calculation The uniformity ratio calculation, minimum point daylight factor and minimum daylight illuminance can exclude areas within 0.5m of walls. Areas within 0.5m are not regarded as part of the working plane for this purpose, although they are included in the average daylight factor and average daylight illuminance calculations. CN10 View of sky requirement See criterion 4. To comply with the view of sky criteria (ref (b)) in Table - 10, at least 80% of the room that complies with the average daylight factor requirement must receive direct light from the sky, i.e. it is permissible for up to 20% of the room not to meet the view of sky requirement and still achieve a compliant room. CN11 View of sky requirement - existing site features Where existing site features prevent a room from meeting the credit criterion. The credit can still be achieved where evidence demonstrates that 90% of the room is able to achieve the criteria. Internal and external lighting levels/zoning and control CN12 Relevant industry standard for lighting design Pre-schools, schools and sixth form colleges: Building Bulletin 90: Lighting Design for Schools 6 Please note that for care homes housing people with dementia the following standard can be used instead of the CIBSE Code for Lighting: Design Lighting for People with Dementia, University of Stirling, Stirling, Please note that the illuminance levels specified in the CIBSE Code for Lighting, 2009 align with BS EN CN13 Occupancy/workstation layout unknown Where occupancy or workstation layout is not known, lighting control can be zoned on the basis of 40m 2 grids, i.e. an assumption of 1 person/workspace per 10m 2. CN14 Small spaces Buildings consisting entirely of small rooms/spaces (less than 40m 2 ) which do not require any subdivision of lighting zones/control will meet the zoning criteria by default. CN15 Zones of four workspaces The limit of four workspaces is indicative of the required standard but is not a fixed requirement. Where there is justification for this to be increased to fit with the adopted lighting strategy, this may be accepted provided that the assessor is satisfied that the aim of this criterion is upheld, i.e. that there is suitable zoning/control of lighting to enable a reasonable degree of occupant control over lighting in their personable work area. The relevant design team member, 70 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

87 Hea 01 Visual comfort Health and Wellbeing Ref Terms Description e.g. lighting consultant, should set out how this is to be achieved in such an instance. CN16 Lighting zoning and control - auditoria spaces The controls specified will depend on the size and use of the space but a typical auditorium or lecture theatre with stepped seating and a formal lectern/demonstration/performance area would typically be expected to have lighting controls as follows: 1. Full normal lighting (to allow for entry/exit, cleaning etc.), 2. Demonstration area lighting off and audience area lighting reduced to a low level (for the purpose of line slide projection, but allowing enough light for the audience to take notes), 3. All lighting off (for the projection of tone slides, colour slides, and for the purposes of visual demonstrations/performances), 4. Separate localised lectern lighting. Building type specific CN17 Education - Education funding agency requirements For Education buildings, where the EFA daylighting requirements have been achieved, for all relevant rooms within the building, (in accordance with Priority School Building Programme (PSBP) Authority Draft, Facilities Output Specification: Generic Design Brief by the Education Funding Agency, June ) it can be assumed that the BREEAM daylighting requirements have also been met and therefore the two credits available for daylighting can be awarded by default. In this instance, evidence would need to be provided to demonstrate that the EFA requirements have been achieved. CN18 Education (pre-schools) and acute Special Educational Needs (SEN) controls for children Where child care and/or acute SEN spaces are included within the scope of the assessment, controls should be provided for the teacher/member of staff, i.e. it is not a necessity for the controls to be accessible to the children. Where nursery spaces are included within the scope of the assessment, controls should be provided for the member of staff, not the nursery school children. Methodology None. Evidence Criteria Interim design stage Final post-construction stage All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements 1 Priority School Building Programme PSBP Authority Draft, Facilities Output Specification: Generic Design Brief by the Education Funding Agency, June 2013 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

88 Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Criteria Interim design stage Final post-construction stage section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria. 3 and 4 Daylighting calculations As per interim design stage Additional information Relevant definitions Adequate view out BREEAM defines an adequate view out as a view of a landscape or buildings (rather than just the sky) at seated eye level ( m) within the relevant building areas and should ideally be through an external window. A view into an internal courtyard or atrium will comply provided the distance from the opening to the back wall of the courtyard/atrium is at least 10m (therefore allowing enough distance for the eyes to refocus). The view cannot be an internal view across the room, as this is likely to become obstructed by partitions, filing cabinets etc. Average daylight factor The average daylight factor is the average indoor illuminance (from daylight) on the working plane within a room, expressed as a percentage of the simultaneous outdoor illuminance on a horizontal plane under an unobstructed CIE Standard Overcast Sky. Clinical areas Areas of the building in which medical functions are carried out that require specific restricted environmental conditions such as humidity, daylighting, temperature, etc. (e.g. X-ray, operating department, delivery room, etc). Computer simulation Software tools that can be used to model more complex room geometries for daylighting. Construction zone For the purpose of this BREEAM issue the construction zone is defined as the site which is being developed for the BREEAM-assessed building, and the external site areas that fall within the scope of the new works. Illuminance The amount of light falling on a surface per unit area, measured in lux. Occupied space A room or space within the assessed building that is likely to be occupied for 30 minutes or more by a building user. Please note there is a specific, unrelated, definition of 'unoccupied' with reference to acoustic testing and measurement and this should not be confused with the definition used here. Patient areas Areas of the building used mainly by inpatients (e.g. wards, dayrooms, etc) Point daylight factor A point daylight factor is the ratio between the illuminance (from daylight) at a specific point on the working plane within a room, expressed as a percentage of the illuminance received on an outdoor unobstructed horizontal plane. This is based on an assumed overcast sky, approximated by the CIE (Commission Internationale de l Eclairage) overcast sky. The minimum point daylight factor is the lowest value of the daylight factor on the working plane at a point that is not within 0.5m of a wall. Similarly the minimum illuminance is calculated at the worst lit point on the working plane that is not within 0.5m of a wall. These points will usually be close to a rear corner of the room. Computer simulations are the most appropriate tools to allow for point daylight factors and illuminances to be calculated. 72 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

89 Hea 01 Visual comfort Health and Wellbeing Public areas Within a Healthcare building type, this includes areas of the building designed for public use where no medical functions are carried out (e.g. reception, retail unit, waiting areas). Relevant building areas: daylighting For the purpose of BREEAM this is defined as areas within the building where good daylighting is considered to be of benefit to the building users (typically those areas occupied continuously for 30 minutes or more). This includes the following (where occupied continuously for 30 minutes or more) specifically stated because they are often omitted; 1. Sports hall exercise spaces 2. Laboratory areas unless the type of research that will be carried out requires strictly controlled environmental conditions, such as the exclusion of natural light at all times. 3. Self contained flats 4. Kitchen and catering areas 5. General communal areas 6. Small offices (including those within multi-residential buildings) 7. Meeting rooms (including those within multi-residential buildings) 8. Leisure areas 9. Any area that may involve close up work. However, this excludes the following (where present): 1. Media, arts production, SEN sensory spaces, x-ray rooms and other areas requiring strictly controlled acoustic or lighting conditions 2. Clinical areas with controlled environmental conditions, e.g. operating theatres, delivery rooms or pathology. However, BREEAM strongly advise that the benefits from daylighting and view out are seriously considered when designing areas of critical and intensive care in healthcare buildings. 3. Holding areas and custody cells where security issues conflict with the BREEAM daylighting requirements. 4. Custody cells in courts, where privacy is a functional/operational requirement. Glare control For glare control include areas of the building where lighting and resultant glare could be problematic for users e.g.those areas that have been designed to contain/use workstations, projector screens etc. and sports halls. Spaces in the categories described above, for which daylight and view out are excluded should not be assessed against the glare control criteria. View out BREEAM defines relevant building areas requiring a view out to include areas of the building where: 1. There are or will be workstations/benches or desks for building users. 2. Close work will be undertaken or where visual aids will be used. 3. A view out is deemed to be of benefit to the building occupants e.g. in spaces where occupants are likely to spend a significant amount of time. Excluded areas for each of these might include: 1. Nurse bases where they are located centrally in a ward/patient area in order to enable patient observation. 2. Courtrooms and interview rooms where compliance is not possible due to security or privacy criteria. 3. Prison staff areas containing workstations that for security or observational purposes must be located centrally within the building. 4. Any clinical areas where the control of environmental/operational conditions prevents such spaces from providing a view out. 5. Conference rooms, lecture theatres, sports halls, acute SEN and also any spaces where the exclusion or limitation of natural light is a functional requirement e.g. laboratories, media spaces, etc. Internal and external lighting Where no external light fittings are specified (either separate from or mounted on the external building façade or roof), the criteria relating to external lighting do not apply and the credit can be awarded on the basis of compliance with the internal lighting criteria. The following internal areas are excluded from the lighting zone requirements: 1. Media and arts production spaces 2. Sports facilities (exercise spaces only, including hydrotherapy and physiotherapy areas). Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

90 Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Lighting zoning For rooms or spaces not listed within criterion 12, the assessor can exercise an element of judgement when determining whether the specification is appropriate for the space given its end use, and the aim and criteria of this BREEAM issue. Separate zoning control Light switches or controls for a particular area/zone of the building that can be accessed and operated by the individual(s) occupying that area or zone. Such controls will be located within, or within the vicinity of, the zone or area they control. Staff areas Areas of the building used mainly by staff (e.g. offices, meeting rooms, staff rooms) and medical areas where patients are admitted but that do not require restricted environmental conditions (e.g. consulting rooms, physiotherapy, etc). Surrounding wall area Surrounding wall area refers to the area (in m 2 ) of the internal wall on which the window/opening is located, including the area of the window/opening itself. Uniformity The uniformity is the ratio between the minimum illuminance (from daylight) on the working plane within a room (or minimum daylight factor) and the average illuminance (from daylight) on the same working plan (or average daylight factor). View of sky/no-sky line Areas of the working plane have a view of sky when they receive direct light from the sky, i.e. when the sky can be seen from working plane height. The no-sky line divides those areas of the working plane, which can receive direct skylight, from those that cannot. Working plane CIBSE LG10 defines the working plane as the horizontal, vertical or inclined plane in which a visual task lies. The working plane is normally taken as 0.7m above the floor for offices and 0.85m for industry. Other information None. 1 BS :2008 Lighting for buildings.code of Practice for daylighting 2 CIBSE Lighting Guide 7, BS :2013 Lighting of roads and public amenity areas, Code of Practice for the design of road lighting, BSI, SLL LIGHTING GUIDE 5: Lecture, teaching and conference rooms, CIBSE Lighting Guide LG10 Daylighting and window design, Building Bulletin 90: Lighting Design for Schools 7 Pollock R, McNair D, McGuire B and Cunningham C, Design Lighting for People with Dementia, Dementia Services Development Centre, University of Stirling, Stirling, BS EN :2002 Light and lighting. Lighting of work places. Indoor work places, Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

91 Hea 02 Indoor air quality Health and Wellbeing Hea 02 Indoor air quality Number of credits available Minimum standards Building type dependent No Aim To recognise and encourage a healthy internal environment through the specification and installation of appropriate ventilation, equipment and finishes. Assessment criteria This issue is split into two parts: Note: Minimising sources of air pollution (4 credits) Adaptability - potential for natural ventilation (1 credit) The potential for natural ventilation credit does not apply to buildings on a prison development. The following is required to demonstrate compliance: Minimising sources of air pollution One credit - Indoor air quality (IAQ) plan 1. An indoor air quality plan has been produced, with the objective of facilitating a process that leads to design, specification and installation decisions and actions that minimise indoor air pollution during occupation of the building. The indoor air quality plan must consider the following: a. Removal of contaminant sources b. Dilution and control of contaminant sources c. Procedures for pre-occupancy flush out d. Third party testing and analysis e. Maintaining indoor air quality in-use. One credit- Ventilation The building has been designed to minimise the concentration and recirculation of pollutants in the building as follows: 2. Provide fresh air in to the building in accordance with the criteria of the relevant standard for ventilation. 3. Design ventilation pathways to minimise the build-up of air pollutants in the building, as follows: a. In air-conditioned and mixed-mode buildings/spaces: i. The building s air intakes and exhausts are over 10m apart and intakes are over 20m from sources of external pollution. OR ii. The location of the building's air intakes and exhausts, in relation to each other and external sources of pollution, is designed in accordance with BS EN 13779: Annex A2. b. In naturally-ventilated buildings/spaces: openable windows/ventilators are over 10m from sources of external pollution. 1 BS EN 13779:2007 Ventilation for non-residential buildings - Performance requirements for ventilation and roomconditioning systems Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

92 Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual Where present, HVAC systems must incorporate suitable filtration to minimise external air pollution, as defined in BS EN 13779:2007 Annex A3. 5. Areas of the building subject to large and unpredictable or variable occupancy patterns have CO 2 or air quality sensors specified and: a. In mechanically ventilated buildings/spaces: sensor(s) are linked to the mechanical ventilation system and provide demand-controlled ventilation to the space. b. In naturally ventilated buildings/spaces: sensors either have the ability to alert the building owner or manager when CO 2 levels exceed the recommended set point, or are linked to controls with the ability to adjust the quantity of fresh air, i.e. automatic opening windows/roof vents. One credit - Volatile organic compound (VOC) emission levels (products) 6. Criterion 1 is achieved. 7. All decorative paints and varnishes specified meet the criteria in Table At least five of the eight remaining product categories listed in Table - 17 meet the testing requirements and emission levels criteria for Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) emissions (listed in the table). One credit - Volatile organic compound (VOC) emission levels (post construction) 9. Criterion 1 is achieved. 10. The formaldehyde concentration level is measured post construction (but pre-occupancy) and is found to be less than or equal to 100µg/averaged over 30 minutes (WHO guidelines, source BRE Digest 464 part 2 1 ). 11. The total volatile organic compound (TVOC) concentration level is measured post construction (but pre-occupancy) and found to be less than 300µg/over 8 hours, in line with the building regulation requirements. 12. Where VOC and formaldehyde levels are found to exceed the limits defined in criteria 10 and 11, the project team confirms the measures that have, or will be taken, in accordance with the IAQ plan, to reduce the levels to within these limits. 13. The testing and measurement of the above pollutants are in accordance with the following standards where relevant: a. BS EN ISO : 2004 Diffusive sampling of formaldehyde in air 1 b. EN ISO VOCs in air by active sampling 2 c. BS EN : 2003 VOCs - Indoor, ambient and workplace air by passive sampling 3 d. BS EN ISO : formaldehyde and other carbonyls in air by pumped sampling. 14. The measured concentration levels of formaldehyde (µg/m 3 ) and TVOC (µg/m 3 ) are reported, via the BREEAM scoring and reporting tool. Adaptability - Potential for natural ventilation One credit (credit not applicable to prison buildings) 15. The building ventilation strategy is designed to be flexible and adaptable to potential building occupant needs and climatic scenarios. This can be demonstrated as follows: a. Occupied spaces of the building are designed to be capable of providing fresh air entirely via a natural ventilation strategy. The following are methods deemed to satisfy this criterion dependent upon the complexity of the proposed system: i. Room depths are designed in accordance with CIBSE AM10 (section 2.4) to ensure effectiveness of any natural ventilation system. The openable window area in each occupied space is equivalent to 5% of the gross internal floor area of that room/floor plate. OR ii. The design demonstrates that the natural ventilation strategy provides adequate cross flow of air to maintain the required thermal comfort conditions and ventilation rates. This is demonstrated using ventilation design tool types recommended by CIBSE AM10 5 (or for education buildings by using the ClassVent tool). For a strategy which does not rely on openable windows, or which has occupied spaces with a plan depth greater than 15m, the design must demonstrate (in accordance with criterion 15a- i above) that the ventilation strategy can provide adequate cross flow of air to maintain the required thermal comfort conditions and ventilation rates. 1 BRE Digest 464, VOC emissions from building products: control, evaluation and labelling schemes, Yu, C. and Crump. D, Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

93 Hea 02 Indoor air quality Health and Wellbeing 16. The natural ventilation strategy is capable of providing at least two levels of user-control on the supply of fresh air to the occupied space (see CN7 for further details). Note: Any opening mechanisms must be easily accessible and provide adequate user-control over air flow rates to avoid draughts. Relevant industry standards for ventilation can be used to define adequate levels of fresh air sufficient for occupancy and internal air pollution loads relevant to the building type. Note: Multi-residential buildings with self contained flats and individual bedrooms must have a degree of openable window function. This does not need to provide two levels of user-control (as required above), but must be occupant controlled. Exemplary level criteria Minimising sources of air pollution - volatile organic compound (VOC) emission levels (products) The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve innovation credits for this BREEAM issue: One credit 17. Criteria 2-4 have been achieved. 18. The formaldehyde emission levels have been measured and found to be less than or equal to 0.06mg/m 3 air in accordance with the approved testing standards in Table - 17 Two credits 19. Criteria 2-4 have been achieved. 20. The formaldehyde emission levels have been measured and found to be less than or equal to 0.01mg/m 3 air in accordance with the approved testing standards in Table - 17 Checklists and tables Table - 17: VOC criteria by product type Ref Product Requirements A Paints and varnishes Performance requirements VOC content limit Compliant performance standard EN 13300:2001 and EU Directive 2004/42/CE21 Compliant testing standard ISO :2006 Paints and varnishes Determination of VOC content, Part 2 Gas Chromatographic method Manufacturer also to confirm Paint to be fungal and algal resistant in wet areas e.g. bathrooms, kitchens, utility rooms B Wood panels (including particle board, fibreboard including MDF, OSB, cement bonded particle board, plywood, solid wood panel and acoustic board) Option 1 - Performance requirements Formaldehyde E1 class in accordance with EN 13986:2004. Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

94 Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Ref Product Requirements Option 1 Compliant testing standard(s) EN 717-1:2004 Wood based panels Determination of formaldehyde release by chamber method. Option 2 Performance requirements Formaldehyde level of 0.1mg/m 3 Option 2 Compliant testing standard(s) 1. ISO Determination of the emission of VOC from building products and furnishing - Emission chamber method. OR 2. Emission testing method for California Specification (Californian Department for Public Health CDPH) Standard method for the testing and evaluation of VOC emissions from indoor sources using environmental chambers. Note: For either method the resultant emission/surface area obtained from the chamber test method must be extrapolated to predict what the emissions would be in a theoretical model room (as detailed in the standard) and this extrapolated emission rate compared with the required formaldehyde level of 0.1mg/m 3. Manufacturer also to confirm The absence of regulated wood preservatives. C Timber structures (e.g. glue laminated timber) Option 1 - Performance requirements Option 1 - Formaldehyde E1 Class in accordance with EN 14080:2005. Option 1 - Compliant testing standards EN 717-1:2004 Wood based panels Determination of formaldehyde release by chamber method. Option 2 - Performance requirements As category B above. Option 2 - Compliant testing standards As category B above. D Wood flooring e.g. parquet Option 1 - Performance requirements Option 1 - Formaldehyde E1 Class in accordance with EN 14342:2005. Option 1 - Compliant testing standards EN 717-1:2004 Wood based panels Determination of formaldehyde release by chamber method. Option 2 - Performance requirements As category B above. Option 2 - Compliant testing standards As category B above E Resilient textile and laminated floor coverings (e.g. vinyl, linoleum, cork, rubber, carpet, laminated wood flooring) 78 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

95 Hea 02 Indoor air quality Health and Wellbeing Ref Product Requirements Option 1 - Performance requirements Option 1 - Formaldehyde E1 Class in accordance with EN 14041:2006. Option 1 - Compliant testing standards EN 717-1:2004 Wood based panels Determination of formaldehyde release by chamber method. Option 2 - Performance requirements As category B above. Option 2 - Compliant testing standards As category B above. F Suspended ceiling tiles Option 1 - Performance requirements Option 1 - Formaldehyde E1 Class in accordance with EN 13964:2004. Option 1 - Compliant testing standards EN 717-1:2004 Wood based panels Determination of formaldehyde release by chamber method. Option 2 - Performance requirements As category B above. Option 2 - Compliant testing standards As category B above. G Flooring adhesives Performance requirements Absence of all carcinogenic and sensitising substances in accordance with the globally harmonised system (GHS) of classification and labelling of chemicals. Refer to: 1. Globally Harmonized System of Classification and Labelling of Chemicals (GHS) - Fourth revised edition, United Nations, OR 2. C1, C2 and C3 classifications identified in Annex A of BS EN :2007. Compliant testing standard BS EN 13999:2007 Adhesives. Short term method for measuring the emission properties of low-solvent or solvent-free adhesives after application. 1. Part 2 Determination of volatile organic compounds 2. Part 3 Determination of volatile aldehydes 3. Part 4 - Determination of volatile diisocyanates Manufacturer also to confirm None Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

96 Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Ref Product Requirements H Wall coverings Performance requirements Vinyl chloride monomer (VCM) content Formaldehyde level Migration of heavy metals Compliant performance standard 1. BS EN 233:1999, Section Finished wall papers 2. BS EN 233:1999, Section Wall vinyls and plastic wall covering 3. BS EN 234:1997, Section Wall papers for subsequent decoration 4. BS EN 259-1:2001, Section Heavy duty wall coverings Compliant testing standard BS EN 12149:1998 Wall coverings in roll form. Determination of migration of heavy metals and certain other elements, of vinyl chloride monomer and of formaldehyde release - Test A Heavy metals, Test B Vinyl chloride monomer, Test C Formaldehyde. Manufacturer also to confirm None Relevant standards - VOCs All standards outlined intable - 17 above are standards recognised across Europe and Internationally for VOCs content and testing. In instances where a product is not assessed against the listed European or International standard it is acceptable to use an alternative, nationally recognised standard provided the following is met as a minimum: 1. The performance level requirements required by the alternative standard are equivalent to or better than those specified in the ISO EN standard specified. For example, if a material containing formaldehyde has been added to the floor covering product as part of the production process, then the E1 emission measured for formaldehyde must be less than 0.124mg/m 3 (as required by EN 14041:2004). 2. Where an alternative standard omits evaluation of a particular material, it is only acceptable to use the alternative standard in instances where the product does not contain that particular material. BREEAM assessors should seek confirmation from BRE Global prior to awarding credits for compliance with standards not listed in Table - 1 or previously approved as alternative nationally recognised standards. Alternative to testing - paints and varnishes (category A) For decorative paints and varnishes, where the product manufacturer states that the method to determine the VOC content in a product is to use a calculation technique rather than testing in accordance with BS EN 13300:2001, this will be acceptable for the purposes of BREEAM compliance provided the manufacturer has confirmed the following: 1. The calculation method is acceptable for the purpose of compliance with the European Regulation on Classification, Labelling and Packaging of Substances and Mixtures (CLP), or where in transition to CLP, the UK Chemicals (Hazard Information and Packaging for Supply) Regulations 2009, and the product complies with the Decorative Paint Directive 2004/42/CE. 2. The manufacturing process, i.e the paint or varnish formulation and raw material mixing, is carried out in accordance with an ISO 9001 (or equivalent) certified quality management procedure. Products with no formaldehyde containing materials For some floor coverings and wood based panels, the requirement for formaldehyde testing (referred to in the above criteria) does not apply to floor coverings to which no formaldehyde-containing materials were added during production or post-production processing, or in the case of EN 13986:2004, wood-based panels. As such, if a product manufacturer confirms that they have made a declaration of formaldehyde class E1 without testing 80 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

97 Hea 02 Indoor air quality Health and Wellbeing Ref Product Requirements (in writing or via a company product fact sheet or literature) then the product in question meets the BREEAM requirement relevant to formaldehyde testing. A declaration of E1 without testing is effectively confirmation from the manufacturer that formaldehyde emissions comply with the emission level requirements of the relevant standard(s )and therefore, evidence confirming the actual emission level(s) via testing will not be required by the assessor to demonstrate compliance with that particular requirement. Compliance notes Ref Terms Description Shell and core CN1 Applicable assessment criteria Indoor air quality, criterion 1 Both options: This criterion and credit is not applicable for a shell and core assessment. Ventilation, criteria 2 to 5 Option 1 - Shell only:these criteria are not applicable to this shell and core assessment option Option 2 - Shell and core only: Criteria 2 and 3 are applicable to this shell and core assessment option. Criterion 4 and 5 do not apply. Where ventilation systems are not within the remit of the shell and core developer, compliance can be demonstrated through the building servicing strategy where this is predetermined by the built form or core services provision as appropriate to the shell and core option being followed. VOC's criteria,6 to14 and 17 to 20 Both options: These criteria and credits are not applicable to shell and core assessments. Adaptability - potential for natural ventilation, criteria 15to 16 Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options. Simple buildings CN2 Applicable assessment criteria Indoor air quality - N/A 1. Criterion 1 is not applicable. Ventilation (1 credit) 2. Criteria 2 to 3 are applicable, (criteria 4 and 5 are not applicable). Volatile organic compound (VOC) (1 credit) 3. Criteria 6 to 8 are applicable, (criteria 9 to 14 are not applicable). Adaptability - potential for natural ventilation (1 credit - not applicable to prison buildings) 4. Criteria 15 and 16 are applicable. Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

98 Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Ref Terms Description Country specific CN3 Country specific guidance No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. General CN4 Furnishings The scope of the VOC credits does not extend to furnishings, e.g. desks or shelving, it focuses on the key internal finishes and fittings integral to the building. CN5 Mechanically ventilated or cooled buildings See criteria 15 and 16. Buildings that employ a mechanically ventilated/cooled strategy are still able to achieve this credit provided it can be demonstrated that the features required by the criteria can be made easily available to the building user, e.g. windows fixed shut for an air conditioned strategy can be modified to be opening windows. The aim of the potential for natural ventilation criteria is to ensure that a building is capable of providing fresh air using a natural ventilation strategy. Where the building is predominantly naturally ventilated, but mechanical ventilation is necessary to boost ventilation during peak conditions, (i.e. maximum occupancy and/or peak temperature conditions) due to the function/specific usage patterns of the building, the potential for natural ventilation credit can still be awarded provided calculations/modelling demonstrate that the mechanical ventilation system will be required for 5% of the annual occupied hours in the occupied space(s) for the adopted building design/layout. CN6 VOC's - number of products required to comply See criterion 8. Where five or less products are specified within the building, the number of products that needs to be assessed for VOC criteria reduces proportionally as follows: Where five products are present, four must comply Where four products are present, three must comply Where three products are present, two must comply Where two or fewer products are present, all must comply. CN7 Levels of ventilation See criterion 15. The two levels of ventilation must be able to achieve the following: Higher level: higher rates of ventilation achievable to remove short-term odours and/or prevent summertime overheating Lower level: adequate levels of draught-free fresh air to meet the need for good indoor air quality throughout the year, sufficient for the occupancy load and the internal pollution loads of the space. CN8 Industrial areas: air pollution/ventilation rate requirements For industrial buildings the minimising sources of air pollution and adaptability (potential for natural ventilation) criteria and credits apply only to office areas and not to operational areas. If the building does not contain any office areas, these credits and their requirements do not require assessing. CN9 Measuring the distance. See criteria 3a&b. The distance requirement for air intakes and extracts does not necessarily mean the plan distance, but the three dimensional distance around and over objects; e.g. on plan the air intakes may be less than 20m from a source of external pollution, but the intake may be on the roof of a 10 storey building and therefore over 20m from the source of pollution. 82 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

99 Hea 02 Indoor air quality Health and Wellbeing Ref Terms Description Building type specific CN10 Healthcare Window openings See criteria 15 and 16. In healthcare buildings some openings in public and patient areas need to be provided with restricted opening distances of not more than 100mm (HTM 55, Windows 6 ). This is for health and safety reasons, especially where windows are within reach of the elderly, mentally ill or children. However, it is felt that good design can overcome these restrictions and provide compliant natural ventilation solutions, even in safety-sensitive areas. Methodology None. Evidence Criteria Interim design stage Final post-construction stage All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria. Additional information Relevant definitions Areas with a large and unpredictable occupancy The following are examples of these types of space: Auditoria Gyms Retail store or malls Cinemas Waiting Rooms. Where the assessed building does not have any areas deemed to be large with an unpredictable pattern of occupancy, the criterion does not apply. ClassVent ClassVent is a customised spreadsheet design tool that provides a means of sizing ventilation openings for a natural ventilation strategy for school classrooms. The tool was developed by the Department for Children, Families and Schools (formerly DfES). The tool can be downloaded from Clinical areas Hea 01 Visual comfort. Occupied spaces See relevant definition provided in issue Hea 01 Visual comfort. Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

100 Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 The following building areas, where relevant to the building type, can be excluded from the definition of occupied spaces for the potential for natural ventilation criteria: 1. Ancillary building areas, e.g. WCs corridors, stairwells, store rooms, plant rooms 2. Swimming/hydrotherapy pools 3. Catering and small staff kitchens 4. Washrooms or changing areas 5. Laboratory or other areas where strictly controlled environmental conditions are a functional requirement of the space. 6. Custody cells and holding areas in law courts 7. Operational, shop floors or ancillary areas in industrial buildings 8. Healthcare buildings: rooms or departments where control of ventilation is required for prevention of cross infection and/or controlled environmental conditions including: a. Operating theatres b. Laser surgery unit c. Operative imaging unit d. Intensive treatment unit e. Infectious diseases isolation unit f. Wards housing immuno-compromised patients g. Manufacturing pharmacy h. Specialised imaging, X-ray and scanning unit i. Pathology containment laboratories j. Mortuary and dissection suite k. Research laboratories and associated animal houses l. Sterilising and disinfecting unit (SDU) m. Emerging treatment technologies including gene therapy and stem cell units n. Areas immediately adjacent to the above are excluded if it can be demonstrated that reverse air flow would be likely with natural ventilation o. Any other areas which require mechanical ventilation to satisfy the requirements of Healthcare Technical Memorandums p. Any other areas that require mechanical ventilation due to specific operational related processes. Occupied spaces requiring local exhaust ventilation e.g. laboratories, workshops, food technology rooms must still demonstrate that they meet the criteria for potential for natural ventilation (unless listed as an exempted area under this compliance note). Openable window area The openable window area is defined as the geometric free ventilation area created when a ventilation opening, e.g. window, is open to its normal operational fully designed extent for ventilation purposes (i.e. this excludes open areas created when reversible windows are opened for cleaning etc). It is not the glazed area of a façade or the glazed area of the part of the window that is openable (unless it opens fully). Relevant standards (ventilation) Education buildings: Building Bulletin 101 Ventilation of School Buildings. Offices spaces: Top of the range recommended in the British Council for Offices Guide to Best Practice in the Specification of Offices 7 i.e. 12 litres per second per person. Clinical areas with controlled environmental conditions: HTM Specialised ventilation for healthcare premises 8 (England, Wales and Northern Ireland) SHTM Ventilation for Healthcare premises Part A: Design and Validation 1 (Scotland) Relevant standards are not listed for all areas/building types as the provision of fresh air is adequately covered in Approved Document Part F Ventilation (and the standards referenced there in). Sources of external pollution This includes but is not limited to the following: 1. Highways and the main access roads on the assessed site 2. Car parks and delivery/vehicle waiting bays 3. Other building exhausts, including from building services plant industrial/agricultural processes 1 SHTM03-01 ventilation for Healthcare Premises Part A: Design and Validation, Health Facilities Scotland, Feb Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

101 Hea 02 Indoor air quality Health and Wellbeing Service and access roads with restricted and infrequent access (for example roads used only for waste collection) are unlikely to represent a significant source of external pollution. These roads can therefore be excluded from the criteria of this issue. This does not include vehicle pick-up/drop-off or waiting bays. Volatile organic compound (VOC) Any organic liquid and/or solid that evaporates spontaneously at the prevailing temperature and pressure of the atmosphere with which it is in contact (Source: BS EN ISO 11890). Other information Indoor air quality and measurement The testing and measurement of pollutants must be in accordance with the relevant standards (as listed in the Hea 02 Indoor air qualitytable ). Sample measurements should normally be taken in representative habitable or occupiable rooms, so not every room in a building would need to be sampled (see below for examples of representative room types). For example, in an office, one sample in a cellular/single occupancy office should suffice to assess the VOC concentration of the air for that type of habitable space in the building (assuming the other cellular offices have the same specification). In larger rooms, such as open-plan office areas, further sampling locations should be used to understand the homogeneity of the atmosphere. Depending upon the performance of the measurement method in terms of repeatability and the required level of confidence in the value obtained, replicate samples may be taken at one or more sampling locations. Prior to measurements being taken, the ventilation and heating systems should be operating for a period of time to ensure the relevant spaces in the building reach equilibrium in terms of their internal environmental conditions. Typically this may take between hours. Examples of representative room types include: naturally ventilated carpeted office, mechanically ventilated vinyl floored meeting room, workshop, living room or bedroom. Rooms that are not habitable or occupiable may, for example, include toilets, store room, plant room, stairways or corridors. The definition of 'habitable or occupiable rooms' comes from Approved Document F, Means of Ventilation, HM Government, In accordance with the criteria, where levels are found to exceed the defined limits, the credit can only be claimed where the project team confirms the measures that have, or will be undertaken in accordance with the IAQ plan, to reduce the TVOC and formaldehyde levels to within the required limits. This information is provided to assist project teams and BREEAM assessors on the appropriate scope of IAQ testing; therefore it is guidance only and not a requirement of complying with BREEAM. The testing regime should be determined based on the advice of the appropriate person appointed to conduct the testing, in order to determine and report representative values of indoor air quality for the building. There are a number of publications available on the issue of measuring and improving the indoor air quality in buildings including BR 450, A protocol for the assessment of indoor air quality in homes and office buildings, Crump, Raw, Upton, Scivyer, Hunter, Hartless. BRE (2002). Volatile organic compounds VOCs are emitted by a wide array of products numbering in the thousands. Examples include: paints and lacquers, paint strippers, cleaning supplies, pesticides, building materials and furnishings, glues and adhesives, urea-formaldehyde foam insulation (UFFI), pressed wood products (hardwood plywood wall panelling, particleboard, fibreboard) and furniture made with these pressed wood products. No or low VOC paints are available from most standard mainstream paint manufacturers. The emissions of VOCs from paints and varnishes are regulated by the Directive 2004/42/CE, implemented in the UK by the Volatile Organic Compounds in Paints, Varnishes and Vehicle Refinishing Products Regulation Products containing high organic solvent content should also be avoided (EU VOC Solvent Directive 1999/13/EC). Exposure risk assessment of any possible release of chemicals from manufactured products and their possible impact on health and the environment generally, is an important requirement of European regulations. The possible impact of a building product on indoor air quality is included in the European Construction Products Directive, 89/106/EEC. The amended Directive, 93/68/EEC provided the criteria for CE Marking of products. Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

102 Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Products to be fitted in buildings should not contain any substances regulated by the Dangerous Substances Directive 2004/42/CE, which could cause harm to people by inhalation or contact. Materials containing heavy metals (e.g. antimony, barium, cadmium, lead and mercury) and other toxic elements (e.g. arsenic, chromium and selenium) or regulated biocides (e.g. pentachlorophenol) should be avoided. Various labelling schemes identify products that have been tested and shown to be low emitting and these have been summarised in BRE Digest 464. The standards outlined in Table - 17 however are the only standards recognised by BREEAM for the purposes of assessing this issue. Dangerous substances are defined in the Dangerous Substances Directive (67/548/EEC) BS EN and Fume cupboard discharge velocity: BS EN Part 2 states that the discharge velocity from fume cupboard extracts should be at least 7m/s but that a figure of 10m/s is preferable to ensure that the discharge will not be trapped in the aerodynamic wake of the stack. Higher discharge velocities may be required, especially in windy locations, but higher rates may cause noise problems. 1 BS EN ISO : 2004: Determination of formaldehyde -- Diffusive sampling method 2 EN ISO : Determination of volatile organic compounds in indoor and test chamber air by active sampling on Tenax TA sorbent, thermal desorption and gas chromatography using MS/FID 3 BS EN ISO :2003, Indoor, ambient and workplace air. Sampling and analysis of volatile organic compounds by sorbent tube/thermal desorption/capillary gas chromatography. Diffusive sampling 4 BS EN ISO : 2001: Determination of formaldehyde and other carbonyl compounds -- Active sampling method 5 CIBSE AM10, 2005, Natural Ventilation in Non-Domestic Buildings 6 Health Technical Memorandum 55 Building Components Windows, NHS Estates, BCO Guide 2009, Best Practice in the Specification of Offices, BCO, HTM Specialised ventilation for healthcare premises, Department of Health, Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

103 Hea 03 Safe containment in laboratories Health and Wellbeing Hea 03 Safe containment in laboratories Number of credits available Minimum standards Building type dependent No Aim To recognise and encourage a healthy internal environment through the safe containment and removal of pollutants. Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance for: One credit -laboratory containment devices and containment areas 1. An objective risk assessment of the proposed laboratory facilities has been carried out prior to completion of the Developed Design (RIBA Stage 3 or equivalent) to ensure potential risks are considered in the design of the laboratory. 2. Where containment devices such as fume cupboards are specified their manufacture and installation meet best practice safety and performance requirements and objectives, demonstrated through compliance with the following standards: a. General purpose fume cupboards: BS EN Parts 1-7 (as appropriate) 1 b. Recirculatory filtration fume cupboards: BS 7989: c. Microbiological safety cabinets: BS EN 12469: (for manufacture) and BS 5726: (for installation). d. Clean air hoods, glove boxes, isolators and mini-environments: BS EN ISO : e. Articulated extension arms: PD CEN/TR Or, for Schools, Sixth Form Colleges and Further Education with laboratories and fume cupboards for subjects up to and including A-level (or equivalent): f. Building Bulletin 88 4, Fume cupboards in schools. 3. Where laboratory containment devices that are ducted to discharge externally are specified, the guidance in the National Annex of BS EN must be followed to ensure an appropriate discharge velocity is achieved. One credit - buildings with containment level 2 and 3 laboratory facilities 4. Where containment level 2 and 3 laboratory facilities are specified they must meet best practice safety and performance criteria and objectives. This is demonstrated as follows: a. Criterion 1 has been achieved. b. Ventilation systems are designed in compliance with the best practice guidance set out in 'DRAFT HSE Biological Agents and Genetically Modified Organisms (Contained Use) Regulations 2010' 4. c. Filters for all areas designated as containment level 2 and 3 are located outside the main laboratory space for ease of cleaning/replacement and the filters are easily accessible by maintenance staff or technicians. 5. The design team demonstrate that the individual fume cupboard location and stack heights have been considered in accordance with HMIP Technical Guidance Note (Dispersion) D BS 5726:2005 Microbiological safety cabinets, Information to be supplied by the purchaser to the vendor and to the installer and siting and use of cabinets. Recommendations and guidance, BSi. 2 BS EN ISO :2004 Clean rooms and associated controlled environments. Separative devices (clean air hoods, gloveboxes, isolators and mini-environments), BSi. 3 PD CEN/TR Laboratory installations - Capture devices with articulated extract arm, BSi. 4 The Biological Agents and Genetically Modified Organisms (Contained Use) Regulations 2010, HSE. Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

104 Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Checklists and tables None. Compliance notes Ref Terms Description Shell and core CN1 Applicable assessment criteria This issue is not applicable to shell and core assessments. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options. Simple buildings CN2 Applicable assessment criteria This issue is not applicable to simple buildings. Country specific CN3 Country specific guidance No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. General CN4 Laboratory containment device requirement for schools, sixth form and further education See criterion 2f. For fume cupboards specified/installed for up to and including A-Level subjects, confirmation of the specification and installation in accordance with Building Bulletin 88 will be acceptable for BREEAM compliance. BS 7989 and parts of BS may be relevant to some installations; in such cases the person or organisation responsible for producing or installing the laboratory equipment should be able to confirm if they are relevant given the type of fume cupboard installation. Building type specific CN5 Building specific guidance No building specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Methodology None. 88 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

105 Hea 03 Safe containment in laboratories Health and Wellbeing Evidence Criteria Interim design stage Final post-construction stage All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria. Additional information Relevant definitions Fume cupboard/safety cabinet Scientific equipment designed to limit a person's exposure to hazardous fumes or biological material. Air is drawn through the enclosure of the cupboard conducting the contaminated air away from the experimental area and those using the equipment. Risk assessment For the purpose of the relevant laboratory criteria in this issue, a risk assessment is a systematic consideration of any activity in which there is a hazard, followed by decisions on the substances, equipment and procedures used and on the restrictions and precautions needed to make the risk acceptably low. Below is a list of useful resources: 1. Schools, Sixth Form Colleges and Further Education assessments can refer to CLEAPSS (www. cleapss.org.uk) for further advice. 2. Higher Education assessments should discuss the most appropriate risk assessment with the end user of the building. Other information BS EN and Fume cupboard discharge velocity: BS EN Part 2 states that the discharge velocity from fume cupboard extracts should be at least 7m/s but that a figure of 10m/s is preferable to ensure that the discharge will not be trapped in the aerodynamic wake of the stack. Higher discharge velocities may be required, especially in windy locations, but higher rates may cause noise problems. 1 BS EN :2003 Fume Cupboards, Vocabulary, BSi BS EN :2003 Fume Cupboards, Safety and performance requirements, BSi. BS EN :2003 Fume Cupboards, Type test methods, BSi. BS EN :2004 Fume Cupboards, onsitetest methods, BSi. DD CEN/TS :2006 Fume Cupboards, Recommendations for installation and maintenance, BSi. BS EN :2006 Fume Cupboards, Variable air volume fume cupboards, BSi. BS EN :2012 Fume Cupboards, Fume cupboards for high heat and acidic load, BSi. 2 BS 7989:2003 Specification for recirculatory filtration fume cupboards, BSi.I, BS EN 12469:2000 Biotechnology. Performance criteria for microbiological safety cabinets, BSi. 4 Building Bulletin 88: Fume Cupboards in Schools, 1988, Department for Education and Employment 5 Guidelines on Discharge Stack Heights for Polluting Emissions, HMIP Technical Guidance Note (Dispersion) D1, Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

106 Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Hea 04 Thermal comfort Number of credits available Minimum standards 3 No Aim To ensure that appropriate thermal comfort levels are achieved through design, and controls are selected to maintain a thermally comfortable environment for occupants within the building. Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance: One credit - Thermal modelling 1. Thermal modelling has been carried out using software in accordance with CIBSE AM11 1 Building Energy and Environmental Modelling. 2. The modelling demonstrates that the building design and services strategy can deliver thermal comfort levels in occupied spaces in accordance with the criteria set out in CIBSE Guide A Environmental Design 2 ; or other appropriate industry standard (where this sets a higher or more appropriate requirement/level for the building type) and CIBSE TM52 Avoiding overheating in European Buildings 1, for free-running buildings. 3. The software used to carry out the simulation at the detailed design stage provides full dynamic thermal analysis. For smaller and more basic building designs with less complex heating or cooling systems, an alternative less complex means of analysis may be appropriate (such methodologies must still be in accordance with CIBSE AM11). 4. Thermal modelling results demonstrate that thermal comfort levels in occupied spaces meet the category B requirements for both PMV (predicted mean vote) and PPD (predicted percentage of dissatisfied) indices as set out in Table A.1 of Annex A in ISO 7730:2005. When assessing free-running buildings, parameters for the hours of exceedance, daily weighted exceedance and upper limit temperature, as outlined in CIBSE TM52, should be used to establish the risk of overheating. 5. The PMV and PPD indices are reported via the BREEAM assessment scoring and reporting tool, based on the modelling undertaken above. One credit - Adaptability - for a projected climate change scenario 6. Criteria 1-5 are achieved. 7. Thermal modelling demonstrates that the building design and services strategy can deliver the same thermal comfort levels, PMV and PPD indices in occupied spaces achieved for the first credit under a projected climate change environment (see Relevant definitions) 8. Where thermal comfort criteria are not met for the projected climate change environment, the project team demonstrates how the building has been adapted, or will be adaptable in future using passive design solutions in order to subsequently meet the requirements under criterion The PMV and PPD indices are reported via the BREEAM assessment scoring and reporting tool, based on the modelling undertaken above. 1 CIBSE TM52 The limits of thermal comfort: Avoiding overheating in European buildings, Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

107 Hea 04 Thermal comfort Health and Wellbeing One credit - Thermal zoning and controls 10. Criteria 1 to 5 are achieved. 11. The thermal modelling analysis (undertaken for compliance with criteria 1-5) has informed the temperature control strategy for the building and its users. 12. The strategy for proposed heating/cooling system(s) demonstrates that it has addressed the following: a. Zones within the building and how the building services could efficiently and appropriately heat or cool these areas. For example consider the different requirements for the central core of a building compared with the external perimeter adjacent to the windows. b. The degree of occupant control required for these zones, based on discussions with the end user (or alternatively building type oruse specific design guidance, case studies, feedback) considers: i. User knowledge of building services ii. Occupancy type, patterns and room functions (and therefore appropriate level of control required) iii. How the user is likely to operate or interact with the system(s), e.g. are they likely to open windows, access thermostatic radiator valves (TRV) on radiators, change air conditioning settings etc., iv. The user expectations ( this may differ in the summer and winter)and degree of individual control (i.e. obtaining the balance between occupant preferences, for example some occupants like fresh air and others dislike drafts). c. How the proposed systems will interact with each other (where there is more than one system) and how this may affect the thermal comfort of the building occupants. d. The need or otherwise for an accessible building user actuated manual override for any automatic systems. Checklists and tables None. Compliance notes Ref Terms Description Shell and core CN1 Applicable assessment criteria Thermal modelling criteria 1-5 Option 1 - Shell only:all assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. However for the purpose of the thermal model a baseline servicing strategy will need to be assumed. This is to reduce the risk of an under-performing fabric being designed for the basic building envelope. Option 2 - Shell and core only: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. However, where assumptions are required for the purpose of the thermal model, these must be reasonable and represent typical use patterns and loads given the parameters and function of the building. Note that thermal modelling may need to be completed on the basis of a typical notional layout. Adaptability - for projected climate changes criteria 6-9 Option 1 - Shell only: These criteria are not applicable to this shell and core assessment option. Option 2 - Shell and core only: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. However where assumptions are required for the purpose of the thermal model, these must be reasonable and represent typical use patterns and loads given the parameters and function of the building. Note that thermal modelling may need to be completed on the basis of a typical notional layout. Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

108 Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Ref Terms Description Thermal zoning and controls criteria Both option 1 and 2: These criteria are not applicable to shell and core assessments. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options. Simple buildings CN2 Applicable assessment criteria This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional guidance on how to apply the criteria. CN3 Dynamic thermal modelling For simple building assessments, dynamic thermal modelling is not a requirement to achieve the credits but may be preferable as it can provide more accurate analysis results. Note that assessment criterion 3 already clarifies use of an alternative less complex means of modelling, which must be in accordance with CIBSE AM11. Country specific CN4 Country specific No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. General CN5 Appropriate industry standard See criterion 2. BREEAM has not attempted to list all appropriate industry standards. Any recognised collaborative industry or sector best practice standard or guidance that sets thermal performance levels, in terms of thermal comfort and design temperature can be considered an appropriate industry standard for the purposes of this BREEAM issue. CIBSE Guide A (table 1.5) includes recommended summer and winter comfort criteria (temperature ranges) for a number of specific building applications. See also the relevant Compliance Notes below for industry standards deemed appropriate by BREEAM for schools and healthcare buildings. CN6 Buildings with less complex heating/cooling systems See criterion 3. For buildings with less complex heating/cooling systems the thermal comfort strategy need only comply with criteria 12a and b. Compliance can be demonstrated where zoning allows separate occupant control (within the occupied space) of each perimeter area (i.e. within 7m of each external wall) and the central zone (i.e. over 7m from the external walls). For example, adequate TRVs (thermostatic radiator valves) placed in zones around the building perimeter, and the provision of local occupant controls to internal areas, such as fan coil units. Note: The distance requirement for smaller buildings is approximate; however, the assessor must use sound judgement considering fully the aims of this issue, before accepting solutions that do not strictly meet the above criteria. Examples of potentially compliant heating control measures can be found in Technology Guide CTG002 Heating control 3. Building type specific 92 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

109 Hea 04 Thermal comfort Health and Wellbeing Ref Terms Description CN7 Industrial Industrial unit with no office space Where an industrial unit contains no office space and only an operational or storage area, this BREEAM issue does not apply. CN8 Education (schools only) Appropriate industry standards and criteria for schools, See criterion 2. An appropriate industry standard for schools is Building Bulletin 101, Ventilation of school buildings. This standard includes the requirement that there should be no more than 120 hours when the air temperature in the classroom rises above 28 C. However, to comply with BREEAM (in relation to criterion 2) internal summer temperatures in the classroom must be significantly better than the recommendations of Building Bulletin 101, e.g. there are fewer than 60 hours a year where temperatures rise above 28 C. This additional criteria is set to ensure closer alignment with CIBSE Guide A, which recommends limiting the expected occurrence of operative temperatures above 28 ºC to 1% of the annual occupied period (e.g. around hours). For schools with a straightforward servicing strategy, ClassCool is considered a suitable alternative to an AM11 full dynamic model. CN9 Healthcare appropriate industry standards and criteria See criterion 2. The appropriate industry standard for healthcare is Health Technical Memorandum Specialised ventilation for healthcare premises. Thermal comfort levels in patient and clinical areas must be in accordance with the temperature ranges set out in HTM 03-01, Appendix 2. Furthermore, internal summer temperatures must not exceed 28 ºC dry bulb for more than 50 hours per year (as defined in HTM 03-01, paragraph 2.15). Other occupied spaces not covered in HTM03-01 Appendix 2 should be in accordance with CIBSE Guide A Environmental Design. CN10 Education and prisons occupant controls See criterion 8. In this issue, occupant controls are intended to be for staff-use only. Methodology None. Evidence Criteria Interim design stage Final post-construction stage All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria. 7, 8, 11, 12 Thermal comfort study As per interim design stage Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

110 Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Relevant definitions ClassCool A tool developed by the Department for Children, Schools and Families (DCSF, formerly DfES) which provides a simplified method of assessing the extent of classroom overheating. ClassCool may not be appropriate for other spaces, such as libraries and halls, and other means of assessing overheating will be requiredwww.teachernet.gov.uk/iaq.. Clinical areas Refer to BREEAM issue Hea 01 Visual comfort Occupied space Refer to Hea 01 Visual comfort, however for the purpose of BREEAM issue Hea 04 the definition excludes the following: 1. Atria or concourses 2. Entrance halls or reception areas 3. Ancillary space e.g. circulation areas, storerooms and plant rooms Passive design Passive design uses layout, fabric and form to reduce or remove mechanical cooling, heating, ventilation and lighting demand. Examples of passive design include optimising spatial planning and orientation to control solar gains and maximise daylighting, manipulating the building form and fabric to facilitate natural ventilation strategies and, making effective use of thermal mass to help reduce peak internal temperatures. Patient areas Refer to BREEAM issue Hea 01 Visual comfort. Predicted mean vote (PMV) The PMV is an index that predicts the mean votes of a large group of persons on the seven-point thermal sensation scale based on the heat balance of the human body. Thermal balance is obtained when the internal heat production in the body is equal to the loss of heat to the environment. See 'Other Information' for the seven point thermal sensation scale. Predicted percentage dissatisfied (PPD) The PPD is an index that establishes a quantitative prediction of the percentage of thermally dissatisfied people who feel too cool or too warm. For the purposes of ISO 7730, thermally dissatisfied people are those who will feel hot, warm, cool or cold. See the seven-point thermal sensation scale in 'Other Information'. Projected climate change environment Dynamic thermal simulation software packages currently provide the facility for building designs to be assessed under external climatic conditions specific to geographic location. Industry standard weather data for the UK is available in the form of Test Reference Years (TRYs) and Design Summer Years (DSYs) provided by CIBSE. This weather data enables thermal analysis of building designs under current climatic conditions, yet no account is taken of the projected variations in weather data that will occur during the building's life-cycle as a result of climate change. The following probabilistic TRY weather data files should be used to establish the projected climate change environment against which the design is evaluated: Free Running Buildings Time Period: 2050s Emissions Scenario: Medium (A1B) Mechanically Ventilated or Mixed Mode Buildings Time Period: 2030s Emissions Scenario: Medium (A1B) The above weather files represent the minimum requirements to perform thermal modelling under a climate change scenario and subsequently demonstrate compliance. Where design teams feel that added consideration of building occupant risk/sensitivity to overheating is necessary, weather files can be used that exceed the minimum 94 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

111 Hea 04 Thermal comfort Health and Wellbeing requirements outlined above. The time periods indicated above have been selected to represent the building services life cycle likely to be present in each building services strategy type. A shorter time period is chosen for mechanically ventilated/mixed mode building types due to consideration of mechanical servicing equipment life span (before major upgrade or replacement is required), and to avoid over-specification of plant which could lead to inefficient operation. Separate occupant control Responsive heating or cooling controls for a particular area/zone of the building that can be accessed and operated by the individual(s) occupying that area or zone. Such controls will be located within, or within the vicinity of, the zone or area they control. Thermal comfort In British Standard BS EN ISO 7730:2005: Ergonomics of the thermal environment. Analytical determination and interpretation of thermal comfort, thermal comfort is defined using the calculation of PMV and PPD indices and local thermal comfort criteria and is that condition of mind which expresses satisfaction with the thermal environment. The term thermal comfort describes a person s psychological state of mind and is usually referred to in terms of whether someone is feeling too hot or too cold. Thermal comfort is difficult to define because it needs to account for a range of environmental and personal factors in order to establish what makes people feel comfortable. HSE considers 80% of occupants as a reasonable limit for the minimum number of people who should be thermally comfortable in an environment. The purpose of this issue is to encourage appropriate and robust consideration of thermal comfort issues and specification of appropriate occupant controls to ensure both maximum flexibility of the space and thermal comfort for the majority of building occupants. Thermal dynamic analysis Thermal comfort analysis tools can be subdivided into a number of methods of increasing complexity. The most complex of these and the one that provides greatest confidence in results is the full dynamic model. This type of model enables annual heating or cooling loads, overheating risks and control strategies to be assessed. Other information Projected climate change weather data A range of alternative probabilistic weather files produced in accordance with the UK climate impacts programme (UKCIP) 2009 projections have been produced to be compatible with simulation software packages. These weather files provide the opportunity to evaluate the impact of varying climate change scenarios building design performance throughout its life-cycle. Projected climate change weather files are currently available in TRYs and DSYs and according to three projected time periods; 2030s, 2050s and 2080s, and for each period two 'emissions scenarios' are available; Medium Emissions (A1B) and High Emissions (A1F1). The PROMETHEUS project at Exeter University has produced a number of future weather files specific to different locations across the UK, created using the UKCP09 weather generator. Weather files produced under the PROMETHEUS project are available at the following location: 1 CIBSE Applications Manual AM11 Building energy and environmental modelling, CIBSE, CIBSE Guide A Environmental Design, 7th Edition, Issue 2, CIBSE, CTG002 Technology Guide, Heating control: maximising comfort, minimising energy consumption, The Carbon Trust, 2006 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

112 Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Hea 05 Acoustic performance Number of credits available Minimum standards Building type dependent No Aim To ensure the building's acoustic performance including sound insulation meet the appropriate standards for its purpose. Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance : Up to three credits for Education, Healthcare, Office and Law Courts building types 1. The building meets the appropriate acoustic performance standards and testing requirements defined in the checklists and tables section which defines criteria for the acoustic principles of: a. Sound insulation b. Indoor ambient noise level c. Reverberation times Up to three credits are available for Industrial, Retail, Prisons and Other building types Up to two credits 2. Where the building meets the acoustic performance standards and testing requirements detailed in Table - 22 (see additional information) for all relevant functional areas. OR Up to three credits 3. Where a suitably qualified acoustician (see relevant definitions) is appointed to define a bespoke set of performance requirements for all function areas in the building using the three acoustic principles defined in criterion 1, setting out the performance requirements for each and the testing regime required. Up to four credits are available for Multi-residential and 'other residential institutions' building types 4. One, three orf four credits are available for multi-residential and other residential institution buildings where the relevant criteria in the checklists and table section has been applied. Please also see CN7. Checklists and tables Table - 18: BREEAM acoustic criteria for Education buildings Education buildings (Three credits) First credit - Sound insulation 96 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

113 Hea 05 Acoustic performance Health and Wellbeing Education buildings (Three credits) Criteria Achieve the performance standards set out in Section 2 of the Acoustic Performance Standard for the Priority Schools Building Programme (APS), June relating to airborne and impact sound insulation of walls and floors. Testing requirement A programme of pre-completion acoustic testing is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with the APS requirements and the ANC Good Practice Guide, Acoustic testing of Schools 2. Second credit - Internal indoor ambient noise levels Criteria Achieve the indoor ambient noise level standards set out within Section 2 of APS for all room types. For roofs with a mass per unit area less than 150kg/m 2 (lightweight roofs) or any roofs with glazing or rooflights, calculations using laboratory data with heavy rain noise excitation as defined in BS EN ISO are required (in accordance with the guidance in APS) for teaching/learning spaces to demonstrate that the reverberant sound pressure level in these rooms are not more than 25 db above the appropriate limits presented within Section 2 of APS, table 1. Testing requirement Indoor ambient noise levels (excluding rain noise): A programme of acoustic measurements is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with the ANC Good Practice Guide, Acoustic testing of Schools. Rain noise: installation of a specification compliant with the APS criteria demonstrates compliance, reference is also made to the notes below. Notes For heavy weight roofs, or parts of the roof that are heavyweight, with a mass per unit area greater than 150kg/m 2 (including those with sedum planting) that do not have any glazing or rooflights, calculations are not required, as such the credit can be awarded on a default basis of compliance. Third credit - Reverberation Criteria Acoustic environment (Control of reverberation, sound absorption and speech transmission index (STI): Teaching and study spaces: achieve the requirements relating to reverberation time for teaching and study spaces set out within table 5 in Section 2 of APS. Open plan teaching spaces: achieve the performance requirements relating to speech transmission index (STI) set out within Section 2.8 of APS. Corridor and stairwells: for those that give direct access to teaching and study spaces, achieve the performance requirements relating to sound absorption. Testing requirement Teaching and study spaces: A programme of acoustic measurements is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with the ANC Good Practice Guide, Acoustic testing of Schools. Open Plan teaching spaces: STI Measurements of the STI should be taken in at least one in ten typical student listening positions in the open-plan spaces in accordance with the ANC Good Practice Guide, Acoustic testing of Schools. Corridors and stairwells: 1 Acoustic Performance Standards for the Priority Schools Building Programme, Department of Health, June ANC Good Practice Guide, Acoustic Testing of Schools, version 1.2, July BS EN ISO :2006 Acoustics. Measurement of sound insulation in buildings and of building elements Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

114 Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Education buildings (Three credits) Installation of a specification compliant with the APS criteria demonstrates compliance. Where this refers to the use of building regulations, the country specific building regulations or standards can be applied (see relevant definitions). Table - 19: BREEAM acoustic criteria for Healthcare buildings Healthcare buildings (three credits) First credit - Sound insulation Criteria Achieve the airborne sound insulation performance standards set out in Section 2 of HTM 08-01:Acoustics determined according to the privacy requirements using both Table 3 and Table 4 from HTM 08-01:Acoustics. Impact noise is controlled at source and the weighted standardised impact sound pressure level (L nt,w) does not exceed 65dB in noise sensitive rooms, following the guidance in HTM 08-01:Acoustics. Testing requirement A programme of pre-completion acoustic testing is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with the requirements of Section 7 of HTM 08-01: Acoustics. Second credits - Internal indoor ambient noise levels Criteria The indoor ambient noise requirements for noise intrusion from external sources in Table 1 of HTM Acoustics, 2013 are not exceeded. The values for internal noise from mechanical and electrical services in Table 2 of HTM Acoustics are not exceeded. Testing requirement A programme of acoustic measurements is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with the Section 7 of HTM 08-01:Acoustics. Rain noise: Installation of a specification compliant with the HTM criteria demonstrates compliance. Third credit - Reverberation Criteria Acoustic environment (Control of reverberation, sound absorption and speech transmission index (STI)): Achieve the requirements relating to sound absorption set out in Section 2 of HTM 08-01:Acoustics. Testing Requirement A programme of acoustic measurements is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with the Section 7 of HTM 08-01: Acoustics. Table - 20: BREEAM acoustic criteria for Office buildings Office buildings (Three credits) First credit - Sound insulation 1 HTM 08-01, Acoustics, Health Technical Memorandum, Department of Health, Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

115 Hea 05 Acoustic performance Health and Wellbeing Office buildings (Three credits) Criteria The sound insulation between acoustically sensitive rooms and other occupied areas complies with the performance criteria given in Section 7 of BS 8233: Testing requirement A programme of pre-completion acoustic testing is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with the acoustic testing and measurement procedures outlined in the Additional information section of this BREEAM issue. Second credits - Internal indoor ambient noise levels Criteria Achieve indoor ambient noise levels that comply with the 'good practice' criteria levels given in Section 7 of BS 8233:1999. Testing requirement A programme of acoustic measurements is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with the acoustic testing and measurement procedures outlines in the Additional information section of this BREEAM issue. Notes Unless calculations from the suitably qualified acoustician or mechanical services engineer confirm otherwise; the contribution to the indoor ambient noise level from mechanical services for the privacy index should be assumed to be less than 35 db, L Aeq,T, regardless of the upper limit during the design stage of the project. To increase the ambient noise level, where privacy is required or the ambient targets include a minimum as well as maximum limit, an artificial sound source or sound masking system may be required. Any artificial sound source or sound masking system should be installed and in operation at the time of the acoustic testing to demonstrate compliance. Third credit - Reverberation Criteria Acoustic environment (control of reverberation, sound absorption and speech transmission index): Achieve the requirements relating to sound absorption and reverberation times, where applicable, set out in Section 7 of BS 8233:1999. Testing Requirement A programme of acoustic measurements is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with the acoustic testing and measurement procedures outlined in the Additional information section of this BREEAM issue. Table - 21: BREEAM acoustic criteria for Law Courts buildings Law Courts buildings (three credits) First Credit - Sound insulation Criteria The sound insulation between acoustically sensitive rooms and other occupied areas complies with the performance targets given in Section 28 of Court Service Design Guide (CSDG), HMCS, Testing requirement A programme of pre-completion acoustic testing is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with the requirements of Section 28 of the CSDG and Calculation Procedures where 1 BS 8233: Sound Insulation and noise reduction for buildings - Code of practice, Court Service Design Guide (CSDG), Her Majesty's Court Service (HMCS), 2010 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

116 Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Law Courts buildings (three credits) applicable. Second credits - Internal indoor ambient noise levels Criteria Achieve indoor ambient noise levels that comply with the requirements of Section 28 of the CSDG. Testing requirement A programme of acoustic measurements is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with Section 28 of the CSDG. Third credit - Reverberation Criteria Acoustic environment (Control of reverberation, sound absorption and speech transmission index): Achieve the requirements relating to sound absorption and reverberation times, where applicable, set out in Section 28 of the CSDG. Testing requirement A programme of acoustic measurements is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with Section 28 of the CSDG and Calculation Procedures where applicable. Table - 22: BREEAM acoustic criteria for Industrial, Retail, Prisons and 'Other' building types Industrial, Retail, Prisons and other building types (Two credits) First credit Sound insulation and internal indoor ambient noise levels Room function All room functions Criteria Internal indoor ambient noise levels: Indoor ambient noise levels comply with the 'good practice' criteria levels of BS 8233:1999, Tables 5 and 6 (see additional information section) unless otherwise stated below. Where the room types below are present, the appropriate criteria for ambient noise levels, sound insulation and acoustic privacy must also be achieved. Testing requirement Internal indoor ambient noise levels: A programme of pre-completion acoustic testing is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with the acoustic testing and measurement procedures outlined in the Additional information section of this BREEAM issue. Room function Educational space (teaching and lecture spaces) Criteria Internal indoor ambient noise levels: Achieve the indoor ambient noise level standards set out within Section 2 of APS for all teaching and lecture theatre room types. See also the criteria below for acoustically sensitive rooms and apply if relevant. Testing requirement Internal indoor ambient noise levels: A programme of acoustic measurements is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with 100 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

117 Hea 05 Acoustic performance Health and Wellbeing Industrial, Retail, Prisons and other building types (Two credits) the ANC Good Practice Guide, Acoustic testing of Schools. Rain noise: Installation of a specification compliant with the APS criteria demonstrates compliance, reference is also made to the notes below. Notes For heavy weight roofs, or parts of the roof that are heavyweight, with a mass per unit area greater than 150kg/m 2 (including those with sedum planting) that do not have any glazing/rooflights, calculations are not required, as such the credit can be awarded on a default basis of compliance. Room function Medical treatment rooms Criteria Sound insulation: Achieve the airborne and impact sound insulation criteria in Health Technical Memorandum HTM Testing requirement Sound insulation: A programme of pre-completion acoustic testing is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with the requirements of Section 7 of HTM 08-01: Acoustics or SHTM 08-0: Specialist Services Acoustics, for assessments in Scotland. Room function Acoustically sensitive rooms Criteria Sound insulation: The sound insulation between acoustically sensitive rooms and other occupied areas complies with the following, where relevant: General office type areas: section of BS 8233, as follows, Dw + L Aeq,T > 75.Where privacy is viewed to be critical by the client and/or design team, or where the room is adjacent to a noisy space such as a music room, the area should comply with an enhanced privacy index: Dw + L Aeq,T > 85. Examples of rooms where these criteria may be applicable include a judges chamber that is next to another judges chamber or waiting room, a Human Resources meeting room next to an adjacent office (cellular or open plan). Bedrooms in hotels or other residential institutions not assessed under BREEAM Multi-residential: section of BS 8233 as follows: sound insulation (DnT,w) of not less than 50 db for partitions and floors between rooms and between rooms and corridors. Testing requirement Sound insulation: A programme of pre-completion acoustic testing is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with the acoustic testing and measurement procedures in the Methodology section. Notes See Relevant definitions. To increase the ambient noise level, where privacy is required or the ambient targets include a minimum as well as maximum limit, an artificial sound source or sound masking system may be required. Any artificial sound source or sound masking system should be installed and in operation at the time of the acoustic testing to demonstrate compliance. Second credit Reverberation Room function Rooms/areas used for speech or performance, including public speaking Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

118 Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Industrial, Retail, Prisons and other building types (Two credits) Criteria Achieve reverberation times compliant with Section 2 of APS. In addition, or alternatively, if relevant to the assessed building; classrooms, seminar rooms and lecture theatres achieve reverberation times compliant with section 2 of APS. Testing requirement Reverberation times within teaching and study spaces: A programme of acoustic measurements is carried out by a compliant test body achieve the required performance standards set out in table 5 in section 2 of APS. Measurements should be carried out in accordance with the ANC Good Practice Guide, Acoustic testing of Schools. Open Plan teaching spaces: STI Measurements of the STI should be taken in at least one in ten typical student listening positions in the open-plan spaces in accordance with the ANC Good Practice Guide, Acoustic testing of Schools. Corridors and stairwells: installation of a specification compliant with the APS criteria demonstrates compliance. Reference is also made to the 'notes' below. Notes Where the reverberation time required by the relevant standard is not appropriate for the type of space/building assessed, the acoustician must confirm why this is the case. In addition the acoustician must set alternative appropriate reverberation times and provide these to demonstrate compliance. Table - 23: BREEAM acoustic criteria for Multi-residential buildings and 'Other residential' institutions Multi-residential and 'Other residential' buildings (four credits) Room function Individual bedrooms and self- contained dwellings Criteria One credit Airborne sound insulation values are at least 3dB higher and impact sound insulation values are at least 3dB lower than the performance standards in the Building Regulations or Standards. Three credits Airborne sound insulation values are at least 5dB higher and impact sound insulation values are at least 5dB lower than the performance standards in the Building Regulations or Standards. Four credits Airborne sound insulation values are at least 8dB higher and impact sound insulation values are at least 8dB lower than the performance standards in the Building Regulations or Standards. Testing requirement A programme of pre-completion testing is carried out by a compliant test body based on the normal programme of testing described in the relevant Building Regulations or Standards for every group or sub-group of dwelling (houses, flats or rooms for residential purposes) this must demonstrate that the performance standards detailed within this table are achieved. OR Use of constructions for all relevant building elements have been registered with and assessed and approved by Robust Details Limited (RDL) and found to achieve the performance standards required for the number of credits sought (see additional information section for further information on Robust Details). Notes Testing should be between habitable rooms on the ground floor and at higher storey levels if applicable. Where there are insufficient suitable separating walls or floors in a development to carry out the number of tests specified in the appropriate Building Regulations or Standards, all of the available suitable separating walls or floors must be tested. See also CN7 102 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

119 Hea 05 Acoustic performance Health and Wellbeing Compliance notes Ref Terms Description Shell and core CN1 Applicable assessment criteria Indoor ambient noise criteria: Both options The basic built form has a large impact on the acoustic performance of the building, and in the case of a shell and core development, this aspect of the build would be outside the control of the tenant. A suitably qualified acoustician (SQA) must carry out a quantifiable assessment of the specification of the build form and any external factors that are likely to affect the indoor ambient noise levels. From this assessment, the SQA must confirm that given a typical arrangement and fit out specification for the building type, the development is likely to meet the levels required to demonstrate compliance with the BREEAM criteria. Where the specific room functions and areas within the building are yet to be defined, the acoustician must base their assessment on the most sensitive room type likely to be present in the building, as a worst case. For example in a retail assessment, where there are likely to be offices the acoustician should make an assessment based on this scenario. One credit can be awarded where this has been achieved. Sound insulation and reverberation criteria: Both options Criteria not applicable. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options. Simple buildings CN2 Applicable assessment criteria This issue is not applicable. Country specific CN3 Acoustic regulations/standards relevant The following Standards or Building Regulations etc. are relevant for the assessment of the issue: England For Multi-residential assessments, where the criteria refer to the performance standards in building regulations, in England, this is referring to Approved Document E 2003 edition, with amendments 2004 and 2010 Resistance to the passage of sound, Northern Ireland For Multi-residential assessments, where the criteria refer to the performance standards in building regulations, in Northern Ireland, this is referring to - DOE Technical Booklet G - Sound 2012 Scotland For Healthcare buildings, where the criteria refer to the use of HTM08-01, Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

120 Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Ref Terms Description assessments in Scotland should use SHTM For Law Courts buildings, where the criteria refer to the use of Section 28 of Court Service Design Guide (CSDG), HMCS, 2010-assessments in Scotland should refer to ETS-01 Courtroom technology and spatial requirements design guide and ETS-03 Estates technical standard environmental performance, design guide For Multi-residential assessments, where the criteria refer to the performance standards in building regulations, in Scotland, this is referring to - Technical Handbook Section 5 - Noise, 2013 Wales For Multi-residential assessments, where the criteria refer to the performance standards in building regulations, in Wales, this is referring to Approved Document E 2003 edition, with amendments 2004 and 2010 Resistance to the passage of sound. General CN4 Building types without areas 'used for speech' Where a building type does not have areas 'used for speech', it does not need to comply with the relevant 'reverberation times' criteria. In these instances, the credit available for reverberation can be awarded by default where the building complies with the indoor ambient noise level and sound insulation criteria. CN5 Remedial works Where a programme of pre-completion testing identifies that spaces do not meet the standards, remedial works must be carried out prior to handover and occupation and the spaces re-tested to ensure compliance. Remedial works must be carried out to all affected and potentially affected areas, including rooms or spaces previously untested of a similar construction and performance requirement. The test report, or covering correspondence, should include a clear statement that the testing is in accordance with the required standard (where specified) or the BREEAM criteria (see Checklists and tables and Methodology section), and include the relevant pass/fail criteria. CN6 Programme of testing It is not acceptable to undertake a shorter test programme due to site readiness on the day of testing. If this issue arises additional testing should be scheduled. It may be that testing at less than the typical regime identified would be acceptable in some instances, for example in small healthcare facilities. Where this is the case, clear reasoning must be provided by the compliant test body prior to awarding the credit(s). Building type specific CN7 Multi-residential or 'other residential institutions' Rooms not covered by residential criteria Multi-residential and other residential institutions often contain a mixture of nonresidential areas such as offices, small retail outlets, meeting rooms etc. and residential areas e.g. self contained dwellings or rooms for residential purposes. Where less than 5% of the floor area of the assessed building includes nonresidential areas, these areas do not need to be assessed, hence only the 1 ETS-01 Courtroom technology and spatial requirements, design guide, Scottish Court Service, ETS-03 Estates technical standard environmental performance, design guide, Scottish Court Service, Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

121 Hea 05 Acoustic performance Health and Wellbeing Ref Terms Description residential spaces need to be assessed against the residential criteria to demonstrate compliance with Table Where more than 5% of the floor area of the assessed building includes areas other than self-contained dwellings or rooms for residential purposes: If awarding 1 credit, only the self-contained dwellings and/or rooms for residential purposes need to be assessed to demonstrate compliance. If awarding 3 or 4 credits the non-residential areas must meet the relevant criteria for their function, as set out in Table - 22 for other buildings and the self-contained dwellings or rooms for residential purposes need to be assessed to demonstrate compliance. The calculation for the percentage of floor area that is non- residential should only include occupied spaces (as defined in BREEAM issue Hea 01 Visual comfort) covered by the 'other buildings' criteria. Methodology Testing, measurement and calculation procedures Where specific guidance on testing, measurement and calculation is not stated in the criteria tables above for the relevant building type, or within the relevant standard/guidance referenced, the following procedures can be followed by the acoustician when measuring or calculating the levels required to demonstrate compliance with this BREEAM issue. Measurements of sound insulation (airborne and impact) should be made in accordance with the relevant part of BS EN ISO 140 series, or the successor to these standards. For measurements of reverberation time, the relevant principles of BS EN ISO 354:2003 should be used and the guidance provided in BS EN ISO 140-7:1998 should be followed in respect of the number of source and microphone positions, and decay measurements. For measurements of ambient noise, when no specific guidance is available, the following procedures should be used: 1. Noise from both internal sources (e.g. mechanical ventilation systems, plant noise, noise making systems) and external sources (e.g. traffic noise transmitted via the building façade) should be included, and, where windows are openable as part of the ventilation strategy, these should be assumed to be open for the purposes of calculations and open for measurements. If openable windows are not part of the background/permanent ventilation strategy, then these should be assumed to be closed for the purposes of calculation and closed for measurements. 2. Noise from occupants and office equipment (e.g. computers) should not be included in the measurements. 3. Unless otherwise stated in the referenced document, a rate of testing of at least one in ten rooms/spaces of each performance level shall be subject to on-site performance testing. 4. Measurements should be made in at least four rooms in which noise levels can be expected to be greatest either because they are on the noisiest façade or because they are on a naturally ventilated façade. 5. Where different ventilation strategies are used, measurements should be conducted in rooms utilising each strategy. Otherwise, measurements should be made in rooms on the noisiest façade. 6. T in L Aeq,T is taken as the duration of the normal working day (typically 8 hours between and 17.00). 7. Measurements need not be made over a period of 8 hours if a shorter measurement period can be used. In this case, measurements should be made when external noise levels are representative of normal conditions throughout the day. 8. Measurement periods less than 30 minutes may give representative values for indoor ambient noise levels and may be utilized where this is the case. However measurement periods shorter than 5 minutes should not be used. 9. Measurements should be taken in a minimum of three locations in rooms at a height of 1.2m above the floor level and at least 1m away from any surface. 10. Where relevant, measurement of airborne sound insulation between teaching spaces should be conducted between one in four pairs of adjacent rooms (or teaching spaces) of each room type or performance requirement category and construction type. Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

122 Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual Where relevant, measurement of impact sound pressure level should be conducted in one in four teaching spaces (separated from rooms above) of each room type or performance requirement category and construction type. 12. The measured level of ambient noise should be used to determine compliance with the criteria for acoustically sensitive rooms. If at the time of acoustic commissioning it is not possible to measure ambient noise levels in the absence of construction or other extraneous noise sources that will not be present when the building is complete, then, for mechanical services the lower level of 35 db, L Aeq or the lowest design limit for the acoustically sensitive space should be used. The above is intended as guidance for undertaking acoustic testing or measurement to demonstrate compliance with the performance requirements in BREEAM. If the acoustician has felt it necessary to deviate from the above procedures, they should provide a reason for doing so and confirm that the alternative procedures are adequate for demonstrating that the building meets the acoustic performance requirements. Evidence Criteria Interim design stage Final post-construction stage All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria. 4 Multi-residential specific - Where Robust Details are to be used the following must be provided: 1. Design team confirmation that Robust Details chosen will achieve the required performance standards for sound insulation. 2. Purchase Statement from RDL which confirms that the relevant plots are registered with RDL. As per interim design stage Additional information Relevant definitions Acoustically sensitive rooms Where the term acoustically sensitive rooms is referenced in this BREEAM issue, it refers to any room/space the design team or client deems to be acoustically sensitive for the purposes of privacy which may include the following types of space/rooms (where specified); 1. Cellular offices 2. Meeting or interview or consulting or treatment rooms. In addition; 1. Court buildings: Witness/consultation rooms and judgesor magistrates chambers and jury retiring rooms 2. Prison buildings: Care or listener suites, Official visit rooms, Closed visits rooms 3. Educational buildings/spaces: rooms for teaching and learning i.e. classrooms, lecture theatres 4. Rooms used for public speaking or seminars 5. Any other room orspace the design team or client deems to be acoustically sensitive for the purposes of privacy. 106 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

123 Hea 05 Acoustic performance Health and Wellbeing Compliant test body A Compliant Test Body is defined as : 1. Organisations having United Kingdom Accreditation Scheme (UKAS)accreditation to the appropriate scope, or who are accredited by a member of the International Accreditation Forum (IAF - to the appropriate scope OR 2. Organisations or individuals registered with the Association of Noise Consultants (ANC) Registration Scheme OR 3. Organisations who can provide evidence that they follow the relevant principles of BS EN ISO/IEC (Conformity assessment - General requirements for bodies operating certification of persons) 1 in relation to BREEAM requirements. Groups and sub-groups As defined in the Building Regulations for England and Wales Approved Document E: Resistance to the Passage of sound, section 1 (paragraphs ). For example, flats and study bedrooms are usually considered as two separate groups, and if there are significant differences in construction type then the groups will need to be broken down into sub groups. In addition to this, where there are steps or staggers greater than 300mm between dwellings, dwellings without steps/staggers should be treated as a different sub-group to those with step/staggers. This is because the presence of steps/staggers is likely to improve performance. Habitable rooms For the purpose of this issue, habitable rooms include any room where individuals will sit or lie down and require a reasonably quiet environmental to concentrate or rest. Such rooms are bedrooms, living rooms, dining rooms, studies as well as kitchen-dining and kitchen-living rooms. Material change of use This is where there is a change in the purpose for which or the circumstance in which a building is used e.g. where a building has been converted from a non-dwelling (office, school, church etc.) to a dwelling. Multiple occupancy offices Office space that is not cellular in nature, i.e. it is open-plan, and designed to accommodate more than two desk spaces/workstations. Non-habitable rooms For the purpose of this issue, non-habitable rooms include any room that is not considered a habitable room (as defined above), it includes rooms such as kitchens, bathrooms, toilets, hallways, garages and laundry rooms. Occupied spaces Refer to BREEAM issue Hea 01 and note that for BREEAM issue Hea 05 there is a specific, unrelated, definition of 'unoccupied' with reference to acoustic testing and measurement, see Compliance notes for details. Robust details Robust Details (RDs) are construction solutions that provide an alternative to pre-completion sound insulation testing as a method of complying with Requirements E1 of Approved Document E (2003 edition) of the Building Regulations (England and Wales), DOE Technical Booklet G - Sound 2012 (Northern Ireland) and Technical Handbook Section 5 - Noise, 2013 (Scotland). The relevant plots on a development must be registered with RDL and built in accordance with the RD specification. To give a reasonable level of assurance that these details will achieve the required minimum standards, RDL carry out random inspections during construction and random sound insulation tests after construction. A Robust Detail is deemed to be approved for BREEAM (Multi-residential building) credits only when it achieves a specified performance level as assessed by RDL. Robust Details can only be used in relation to assessment for new build dwellings and cannot be used to assess the performance of construction details in rooms for residential purposes or material change of use. Room for residential purposes This is defined within the Building Regulations for England and Wales Approved Document E as a room, or a suite of rooms which is not a dwelling (house or a flat) and which is used by one or more persons to live and sleep. It includes a room in a hostel, hotel, a boarding house, a hall of residence or a residential home, whether or not the room is Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

124 Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 separated from or arranged in a cluster group with other rooms, but does not include a room in hospital, or other similar establishment, used for patient accommodation. Specified performance level Robust Details are approved for credits under the Code for Sustainable Homes (CSH), where the specified performance levels set out below are met. Construction types that meet these levels are listed on the Robust Details website on the CSH page. Where assessing self-contained dwellings in multi-residential buildings that are not defined as material change of use or rooms for residential purposes, Robust Details that meet the specified performance level as set out below can also comply with the credit criteria for self-contained units in multi-residential buildings and reference must be made to the CSH page on the Robust Details website: 1. Mature Robust Details (published for over 12 months and at least 100 test results) regular assessment based on the 90th percentile of results from the last 100 site tests 2. Low use Robust Detail (published for over 12 months but fewer than 100 test results) initial assessment based on the first 30 tests needed to qualify for the Robust Details scheme and the site tests available, and reviewed regularly as new test results become available, until it becomes a mature Robust Detail or is rejected. 3. New Robust Detail (published for less than 12 months and fewer than 100 test results) initial assessment based on the first 30 tests needed to qualify for the Robust Details scheme, and reviewed regularly as new test results become available, until it becomes a mature Robust Detail or is rejected. It should be noted that not all RDs will necessarily achieve the performance levels required to achieve multi-residential credits. If in doubt, please check the list of currently approved details with RDL directly at Suitably qualified acoustician (SQA) An individual who holds a recognised acoustic qualification and membership of an appropriate professional body. The primary professional body for acoustics in the UK is the Institute of Acoustics. An individual achieving all the following items can be considered to be 'suitably qualified' for the purposes of a BREEAM assessment: 1. Holds a degree, PhD or equivalent qualification in acoustics/sound testing. 2. Has a minimum of three years relevant experience (within the last five years). Such experience must clearly demonstrate a practical understanding of factors affecting acoustics in relation to construction and the built environment; including, acting in an advisory capacity to provide recommendations for suitable acoustic performance levels and mitigation measures. Where a suitably qualified acoustician is verifying the acoustic measurements/calculations carried out by another acoustician who does not meet the SQA requirements, they must, as a minimum, have read and reviewed the report and confirm in writing that they have found it to: 1. Represent sound industry practice 2. Be appropriate given the building being assessed and scope of works proposed 3. Avoid invalid, biased and exaggerated recommendations. Additionally, written confirmation from the third party verifier that they comply with the definition of a Suitably Qualified Acoustician is required. Single occupancy offices Cellular office space designed to accommodate one or two desk spaces/workstations (typically no greater than 10m 2 ). Unoccupied spaces Where the term unoccupied space is referenced in this BREEAM issue it refers to the nature of the space for the purpose of carrying acoustic calculations or measurements i.e. such measurements must be carried out when the space is unoccupied and therefore devoid of sources of noise. Weighted standardized level differences (D nt,w ) HTM defines this as the unit for rating airborne sound insulation on site. Weighted standardised impact sound pressure level (L' nt,w ) HTM defines this as the unit for rating impact airborne sound insulation on site. 108 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

125 Hea 05 Acoustic performance Health and Wellbeing Other information Noise rating (NR) curves Noise assessments based on NR curves are often used by building services consultants to predict internal noise levels due to mechanical ventilation systems. However, the BREEAM requirement uses the indoor ambient noise level, L Aeq,T which includes external noise transmitted via the façade as well as internal noise such as that from mechanical ventilation systems. In the absence of strong low frequency noise, L Aeq,T can be estimated from the NR value using the following formula: L Aeq,T NR + 6 db. Therefore, if the NR value is known, but not the sound pressure levels in the individual frequency bands, an estimate for the indoor ambient noise level L Aeq,T can still be determined from the NR value for the building services noise. The L Aeq,T for the external noise transmitted via the façade must then be combined with the L Aeq,T for the building services. 1 ISO/IEC 17024:2003 Conformity assessment - General requirements for bodies operating certification of persons Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

126 Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Hea 06 Safety and security Number of credits available Minimum standards 2 No Aim To recognise and encourage effective measures that promote safe and secure use and access to and from the building. Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance for: One credit - Safe access Where external site areas form part of the assessed development the following apply: 1. Dedicated cycle paths provide direct access from the site entrance(s) to any cycle storage provided, without the need to deviate from the cycle path and, if relevant, connect to offsite cycle paths (or other appropriate safe route) where these run adjacent to the development s site boundary. 2. Footpaths on site provide direct access from the site entrance(s) to the building entrance(s) and connect to public footpaths off-site (where existing), providing practical and convenient access to local transport nodes and other off-site amenities (where existing). 3. Where provided, drop-off areas are designed off/adjoining to the access road and provide direct access to pedestrian footpaths, therefore avoiding the need for the pedestrian to cross vehicle access routes. 4. Dedicated pedestrian crossings must be provided where pedestrian routes cross vehicle access routes, and appropriate traffic calming measures must be in place to slow traffic down at these crossing points. 5. For large developments with a high number of public users or visitors, pedestrian footpaths must be signposted to other local amenities and public transport nodes off-site (where existing). 6. The lighting for access roads, pedestrian routes and cycle lanes is compliant with the external lighting criteria defined in Hea 01 Visual comfort, i.e. in accordance with BS : Lighting of roads and public amenity areas. Where vehicle delivery access and drop-off areas form part of the assessed development, the following apply: 7. Delivery areas are not directly accessed through general parking areas and do not cross or share pedestrian and cyclist routes and other outside amenity areas accessible to building users and general public. 8. There is a dedicated parking/waiting area for goods vehicles with appropriate separation from the manoeuvring area and staff and visitor car parking. 9. Parking and turning areas are designed for simple manoeuvring according to the type of delivery vehicle likely to access the site, thus avoiding the need for repeated shunting. 10. There is a dedicated space for the storage of refuse skips and pallets away from the delivery vehicle manoeuvring area and staff/visitor car parking (if appropriate given the building type/function). 1 BS :2013 Part 1: lighting of roads and public amenity areas, Code of Practice for the design of road lighting, BSI, Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

127 Hea 06 Safety and security Health and Wellbeing One credit - Security of site and building 11. A suitably qualified security consultant conducts an evidence-based Crime Impact Assessment (CIA) during or prior to Concept Design (RIBA Stage 2 or equivalent). The CIA must include: a. A visual audit of the site and surroundings, identifying environmental cues and features pertinent to the security of the proposed development, b. A summary of crime and disorder issues in the immediate vicinity of the proposed development, making reference to relevant crime statistics, c. Threats specific to the proposed, likely or potential use of the building(s), d. Threats specific to the proposed, likely or potential user groups of the building(s), e. Any detrimental effects the development may have on surrounding development or public space relevant to crime and the fear of crime. 12. The suitably qualified security consultant provides recommendations or solutions to the project team, during or prior to Concept Design(RIBA Stage 2 or equivalent). These recommendations or solutions shall aim to ensure that the design of buildings, public and private car parks and public or amenity space: a. Are designed and specified to minimise the risk of crime and fear of crime,. b. Address the threats and issues identified in the preceding Crime Impact Assessment, c. Are designed in accordance with a relevant approved security standard/scheme. 13. The suitably qualified security consultant completes a site inspection at the post-construction stage to confirm the development embodies the recommendations/solutions resulting from a compliant Crime Impact Assessment (as outlined above). Any deviation from those recommendations or solutions will need to be justified, documented and agreed in advance with the suitably qualified security consultant performing the site inspection. Checklists and tables None. Compliance notes Ref Terms Description Shell and core CN1 Applicable assessment criteria Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options. Simple buildings CN2 Applicable assessment criteria This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional guidance on how to apply the criteria. Country specific CN3 Country specific guidance No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

128 Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Ref Terms Description General CN4 Development does not have any external site areas. See criteria 11, 12 and 13. The safe access criteria apply only to developments that have areas external to the assessed building and within the boundary of the assessed development (regardless or not of whether that external area is or will be the responsibility of the future building occupant). This includes external parking areas. If the assessed building does not have any external areas and access to the building is direct from the public highway/footpath i.e. there is no onsite vehicle access and parking areas, then the criteria concerning safe access are not applicable. In such instances the two available credits must be assessed and awarded based on compliance with the security criteria. CN5 Covered parking area, see criteria 1 to 10 Where the assessed building has no external areas but does have a covered parking facility, and cyclists/pedestrians/delivery vehicles access the building via this area, then the relevant safe access criteria apply and this area must be assessed against those criteria. CN6 Delivery access through parking areas (smaller sites/deliveries) S See criteria 1 to 10 apart from 7 Criterion 7 (delivery access through general parking areas) can be relaxed for smaller sites if it can be confirmed that the building is of an operational type and size which is likely to mean all deliveries to the building will be made by small vans and not heavy goods vehicles. CN7 No vehicle delivery and manoeuvring areas See criteria 1 to 6 The criteria concerning vehicle delivery access is not applicable where dedicated delivery access and drop-off areas do not form part of the assessed development. Building type specific CN8 Prisons Scope of security criteria for buildings on prison sites In the case of an assessment of a prison building/development the security criteria apply only to publicly accessible buildings and car parking areas outside of the secure perimeter zone (but still on the wider prison site). This could include visitor reception/waiting buildings, facilities/estates offices and storage and visitor/staff parking. Security relating to secure prison buildings and their related site layout falls outside of the scope of BREEAM. Methodology None. 112 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

129 Hea 06 Safety and security Health and Wellbeing Evidence Criteria Interim design stage Final post-construction stage All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria. Additional information Relevant definitions Approved security standards/schemes Current BREEAM-approved standards and schemes are: Secured by Design Secured by Design: Safer Parking Scheme Secured by Design: Car parks: Project teams and suitably qualified security consultants seeking to use alternative standards or schemes must contact BRE Global Ltd with the relevant information and await confirmation that the standard or scheme is suitably equivalent to those listed above. Architectural Liaison Officer (ALO) An ALO is the same as the Crime Prevention Design Advisor (see below) and is the title given to the same role in some police forces. Crime Prevention Design Advisor (CPDA) A Crime Prevention Design Advisor is a specialist crime prevention officer, trained at the Home Office Crime Reduction College, who deals with crime risk and designing out crime advice for the built environment. In addition to physical security measures the officer will consider defensible space, access, crime and movement generators all of which can contribute to a reduction in crime and disorder. Crime Impact Assessment (CIA) A study to identify the threats of crime within the vicinity of the development, assessing the likely impacts of the crime risks identified. Dedicated cycle lanes Marked-out and clearly signed routes to accommodate building users arriving on and travelling through the assessed site on a bicycle. Cycle lanes should be fit for purpose and the following publications offer guidance on how to appropriately size, design and construct cycle lanes: 1. Local Transport Note 2/08 Cycle Infrastructure Design, Department of Transport, The National Cycle Network Guidelines and Practical Details issue 2, Sustrans and the relevant parts of Appendix VI NCN Design and Construction Checklist Dedicated pedestrian crossing Dedicated infrastructure/road markings and signage/instructions that enables a pedestrian to safely cross a vehicle carriageway on the assessed site and continue their journey to/from the building. Such a crossing must be fit for purpose, in that it will be appropriate for the width of the road, level of traffic and pedestrian use specific to the site. It will also act to alert drivers of vehicles using the carriageway to the potential presence of pedestrians in the carriageway, by ensuring they can be clearly seen and requiring the driver of the vehicle to give way to the pedestrian. External site areas Areas external to the assessed building, but within the development s site boundary, which contain vehicle and/or pedestrian access roads/pathways to the building, parking, unloading and drop-off areas. Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

130 Health and Wellbeing BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Peer review A process employed by a professional body to demonstrate that potential or current full members maintain a standard of knowledge and experience required to ensure compliance with a code of conduct and professional ethics. Secured by Design (SBD) A police initiative that seeks to encourage the construction industry to adopt crime prevention measures in the design of developments, to assist in reducing the opportunity for and fear of crime. Secured by Design is owned by the Association of Chief Police Officers (ACPO) and has the support of the Home Office Crime Reduction and Community Safety Group and other Government Departments. The Association of Chief Police Officers for England Wales and Northern Ireland (ACPO) and the Association of Chief Police Officers for Scotland (ACPOS) endorse and support the Secured by Design programme. The safer parking scheme An initiative of the Association of Chief Police Officers aimed at reducing crime and the fear of crime in parking facilities. Safer parking status, Park Mark, is awarded to parking facilities that have met the criteria of a risk assessment conducted by the Police. The scheme is managed by the British Parking Association (BPA) and supported by the Home Office and Scottish Executive. Suitably Qualified Security Consultant (SQSC) The following are, at present, deemed to meet this definition: 1. Crime Prevention Design Advisors (CPDA) or Architectural Liaison Officers (ALO); or 2. A practising security consultant that meets the following requirements: a. Minimum of three years relevant experience within the last five years. This experience must clearly demonstrate a practical understanding of factors affecting security in relation to construction and the built environment, including, acting in an advisory capacity to provide recommendations for security and crime prevention. b. Hold a recognised qualification in design and crime prevention. This qualification must incorporate recognised crime prevention theories and methodologies. These can include situational crime prevention and CPTED (Crime Prevention through Environmental Design). c. Maintains (full) membership to a relevant professional body or accreditation scheme that meets the following: i. Has a professional code of conduct, to which members must adhere to; and ii. Ongoing membership is subject to peer review or the consultants Crime Impact Assessments and security recommendations/solutions are subject to regular audits by the scheme operator. Organisations, associations or scheme operators who wish to have their membership recognised as suitably qualified, should review their current status (and therefore their members) against the requirements above and, where they feel they are compliant, contact BRE Global Ltd with the relevant information/evidence. Other information The Metric Handbook 1 contains details of typical delivery/freight vehicle sizes and turning circles. In addition to the SbD Schools guidance, Managing School Facilities, Guide 4 Improving Security in Schools, published by the Department for Education and Employment (1996) 2, offers guidance on how to improve the security of school premises. 1 Metric handbook Planning and design data, Adler, Architectural Press 4th Ed Managing School Facilities, Guide 4 Improving Security in Schools, published by the Department for Education and Employment (1996) 114 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

131 Energy Energy Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

132 Energy BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions Number of credits available Minimum standards 12 Yes Aim To recognise and encourage buildings designed to minimise operational energy demand, primary energy consumption and CO 2 emissions. Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance: Up to twelve credits - Energy performance 1. Calculate an Energy Performance Ratio for New Constructions (EPR NC ). Compare the EPR NC achieved with the benchmarks in Table - 24 and award the corresponding number of BREEAM credits. Table - 24: Ene 01 EPR NC benchmark scale BREEAM credits EPR NC Minimum standards Requires a performance improvement progressively better than the relevant national building regulations compliant standard (See Other information) Excellent Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

133 Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions Energy BREEAM credits EPR NC Minimum standards Outstanding Zero net regulated CO 2 emissions. A description of how the EPR NC is calculated from a building's modelled operational energy performance, primary energy consumption and CO 2 emissions is provided in the Methodology section. Note:The four countries of the UK have their own building regulations for energy and whilst they use the same methodology and approved calculation software, each have different definitions of the notional building and, set different requirements for regulatory compliance i.e. baseline performance. This is accounted forin the BREEAM NC 2014 Ene01 methodology through the translator curves defined for each country. Therefore, the EPR NC and BREEAM credits are determined by comparing the assessed buildings modelled operational energy performance relative to the regulatory baseline for the country in which the building is located. Exemplary level criteria The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve up to five innovation credits for this BREEAM issue: Up to four credits - zero regulated carbon 2. The building achieves an EPR NC 0.9 and zero net regulated CO 2 emissions (see Relevant definitions). 3. An equivalent percentage of the buildings modelled regulated operational energy consumption, as stipulated intable - 25, is generated by carbon neutral onsite or near-site sources and used to meet energy demand from unregulated building systems or processes. Five credits - carbon negative 4. The building is carbon negative in terms of its total modelled operational energy consumption, including regulated and unregulated energy (see Relevant definitions in the Additional information section of this issue). Table - 25: Innovation credits Innovation credits Equivalent % criteria 1 10% 2 20% 3 50% 4 80% 5 > 100% Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

134 Energy BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Checklists and tables None. Compliance notes Ref Terms Description Shell and core CN1 Applicable assessment criteria Energy performance, criterion 1 Option 1 - Shell only: Calculate an Energy Performance Ratio just for the building s heating and cooling energy demand only (EPR ED ). Compare the EPR ED achieved with the EPR NC in Table 1 'Ene 01 EPR NC benchmark scale' with the EPR ED substituted for the EPR NC. Award the corresponding number of BREEAM credits. The exemplary credits for this issue are not applicable for shell only. Option 2 - Shell and core only: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Services complying with the minimum requirements set out in relevant national building regulations should be assumed where these services are not within the remit of the shell and core developer (i.e. where services will be provided as part of the fit-out works). Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options. Simple buildings CN2 Applicable assessment criteria This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional guidance on how to apply the criteria. Country specific CN3 Building regulations for energy The following lists the building regulations that are used to define each country s BREEAM translator curve for the purpose of benchmarking building energy performance relative to a regulatory baseline and awarding credits for this issue. Scotland Technical Handbook 2013 Non Domestic, Section 6 Energy Northern Ireland Technical Booklet F Conservation of fuel and power in buildings other than dwellings England Approved Document Part L2A 2010 Conservation of fuel and power in new buildings other than dwellings, 2013 edition - for use in England Wales At the time of writing, the building regulations for Wales are under development. The intention is to finalise the Part L Approved Documents and make the regulatory 118 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

135 Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions Energy Ref Terms Description changes, to be implemented in June General CN4 Extensions to existing buildings See criterion 1. Where an existing building is being extended (and only the new extension is being assessed) and that extension uses existing building services plant, the energy modelling must be based on the building fabric of the new extension and any existing, common, building services plant and new building services plant installed that will service the new extension. The energy modelling does not have to consider the existing building fabric where this will not form part of the scope of the BREEAM assessment. Nor does it have to consider existing building services where they are not supplying services (heating, cooling and/or ventilation) to the new extension being BREEAM assessed. CN5 Renewable and low carbon Installations See criterion 2c. Where included as part of the project and therefore assessed under this BREEAM issue, the installation of low or zero carbon technologies can be used to off-set CO 2 emissions arising from regulated and, in the case of exemplary credits, unregulated energy consumption. The LZC technology can be installed onsite,or near-site where a private wire arrangement is in place (see Relevant definitions). CN6 Zero carbon sources of energy - double counting See criteria 6 and 7. The project team must avoid double counting the energy from the zero carbon source. This may be particularly relevant where that source of energy generation is being accounted for in terms of the assessed building s regulated CO 2 emissions and/or it will contribute to off-setting other buildings' CO 2 emissions, which are not part of this assessment. CN7 Mixed use buildings assessed using SAP or SAP and SBEM See criterion 1. In some instances, BREEAM assessed buildings with residential areas may have been classified under the domestic building regulations and will therefore have had their energy use modelled using the domestic assessment method, SAP, as well as or instead of SBEM. Further guidance on assessing a building's Ene 01 performance where SAP is used is provided in the Other information section for this assessment issue. CN8 Building assessed part of a larger development Where the building under assessment forms part of a larger development and either a new or existing LZC installation is provided for the whole site, then the amount of LZC energy generation counted for in this issue, and subsequent CO 2 emissions saved, should be proportional to the building s energy demand compared to the total energy demand for the site. CN9 Estimating energy demand from unregulated building systems/ processes At present there is no standard or national calculation methodology for modelling unregulated energy demands in a building. To demonstrate compliance with the exemplary level criteria the building s modelled operational regulated energy consumption is therefore used as a proxy for a building s unregulated energy demand, i.e. unregulated energy equals 100% of regulated energy. Whilst not accurate, this approach enables BREEAM to assess and award credits for buildings that meet a proportion of its unregulated energy demand via onsite or near-site renewable energy sources. Where unregulated energy demand for the building can be accurately predicted, then this data can be used to determine the percentage of unregulated energy demand met via renewable energy sources. Unregulated Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

136 Energy BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Ref Terms Description energy demand could be estimated on the basis of metered data from a similar or the same building type with the same unregulated system/process loads or by using the methodology described in CIBSE TM54: 2013, 'Evaluating operational energy performance of buildings at the design stage' 1. Methodology The methodology for the EPR NC calculation considers three metrics of modelled building performance when determining the number of credits achieved for this issue. The three metrics are: 1. The building s heating and cooling energy demand 2. The building's primary energy consumption 3. The total resulting CO 2 emissions. These three metrics for the actual modelled building performance are compared against the relevant national building regulations compliant standard (i.e. a baseline) and each is expressed as a percentage improvement. The percentage improvements are then compared against modelled building stock and 'translated' into a ratio of performance for each metric. These ratios are then weighted for each metric and added together to determine the overall Energy Performance Ratio (EPR NC ). The calculation is determined using the following performance data from annual energy modelling of the building s specified/designed regulated fixed building services and fabric, as undertaken by an accredited energy assessor using approved building energy calculation software: 1. Building floor area (m 2 ) 2. Notional building heating and cooling energy demand (mj/m 2 ) 3. Actual building heating and cooling energy demand (mj/m 2 ) 4. Notional building primary energy consumption (kwh/m 2 ) 5. Actual building primary energy consumption (kwh/m 2 ) 6. Target Emission Rate (TER) (kgco 2 /m 2 ) 7. Building Emission Rate (BER) (kgco 2 /m 2 ) The necessary energy modelling data required to determine building performance is sourced from National Calculation Method compliant energy modelling software, used by the design team to demonstrate building regulation compliance. This data is then entered into the BREEAM Ene 01 calculator to determine the EPR NC and number of credits achieved. The Ene 01 calculator is within the BREEAM assessment scoring and reporting tool, in the Assessment issue scoring tab, Energy section. The methodology summarised above is described in greater detail in a guidance note to be provided on the BREEAM website. Evidence Criteria Interim design stage Final post construction stage 3-5 One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria. 1-2 A copy of the Building Regulations Output Document from the approved As per interim design stage, but with the output documents from the approved software reflecting 120 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

137 Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions Energy Criteria Interim design stage Final post construction stage software. The output documents must be based on the design stage of analysis. A copy of the Building Regulations Output Document from the design stage SAP calculations (where relevant for multi-residential buildings) performance at the as built stage of analysis. This must account for any changes to the specification during construction and the measured air leakage rate, ductwork leakage and fan performances (as required by building regulations). 3-5 As above, plus: Evidence confirming : 1. The total carbon neutral energy generation (kwh/yr) 2. The source of the carbon neutral energy 3. Calculated estimate of energy consumption from unregulated systems/process (kwh/yr) (required only if confirming carbon negative status). 4. Calculated estimate of exported energy surplus (required only if confirming carbon negative status). As required above and as per interim design stage. Additional information Relevant definitions Accredited energy assessor A person registered with an accredited energy assessment scheme provider. The scheme provider will be licensed by the relevant government department to accredit competent persons in the energy assessment of non-domestic/ domestic buildings for the purposes of demonstrating compliance with the building regulations in the country of origin. For a full list of approved accreditation schemes/organisations for energy assessors and links to registers of accredited energy assessor s visit: 1. Wales: (non-domestic), (domestic) 2. Scotland: 3. Northern Ireland: (non-domestic), (domestic) 4. England: (non-domestic), (domestic) Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

138 Energy BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Approved building energy calculation software Software approved for the purpose of demonstrating compliance with the energy efficiency and carbon emission requirements of the building regulations (and in turn compliance with the Energy Performance of Buildings Directive (EPBD) recast The definition includes the Simplified Building Energy Model (SBEM) and its interface isbem, as well as third party software approved by the relevant government department.a list of approved software for nondomestic buildings is available as follows: 1. Wales: 2. Scotland: 3. Wales, Northern Ireland and England: 4. England: Approved building energy calculation software will provide the data required for calculating the EPR NC and BREEAM Ene 01 credits. Please note that for dwellings (where relevant to the assessment of multi-residential buildings), the government s Standard Assessment Procedure for the Energy Rating of Dwellings (SAP) may be used. The current version is SAP 2012 version 9.92 (October 2013).See also compliance note regarding the use of SAP outputs in multi-residential building assessments. Building Emission Rate (BER) The building CO 2 emission rate expressed as kgco 2 /m 2 /year. The BER is calculated in accordance with the National Calculation Methodology (NCM) and the Simplified Buildings Energy Model (SBEM). Building regulations Building regulations set standards for the design and construction of buildings to ensure the safety and health for people in or about those buildings. They also include requirements to ensure that fuel and power is conserved and facilities are provided for people, including those with disabilities, to access and move around inside buildings. In Scotland, they also aim to secure the welfare and convenience of persons in or about buildings and to further the achievement of sustainable development. See CN3 for details of the relevant documents for each country. Carbon negative building A building/site that generates, surplus to its own energy demand, an excess of renewable or carbon neutral energy and exports that surplus via the national grid to meet other, off-site energy demands, i.e. the building is a net exporter of zero carbon energy. Surplus in this respect means the building/site generates more energy via renewable/carbon neutral sources that it needs to meet its own regulated and unregulated energy needs. Any surplus must be exported through the national grid as additional capacity to that required by the Renewables Obligation i.e. Renewable Obligation Certificates are not claimed/sold for the renewable energy generation (see definition of Renewables Obligation Certificate). This definition of carbon negative focuses only on energy and carbon dioxide emissions resulting from the operational stage of the building life cycle (as this is the stated aim of this assessment issue). It does not take in to account the embodied carbon, in terms of carbon fixing or emissions resulting from the manufacture or disposal of building materials and components (these impacts/benefits are dealt with in BREEAM issue Mat 01 Life Cycle Impacts). Carbon neutral Carbon neutral means that, through a transparent process of calculating building operational emissions, reducing those emissions and offsetting residual emissions, net carbon emissions equal zero. This includes carbon emissions from both regulated and unregulated energy consuming plan and systems. See the 'zero net regulatedco 2 emissions' definition also. Controlled service or fitting The building regulations 2 define this as a service or fitting in relation to which the building regulations imposes a requirement. Dwelling Emission Rate (DER) The DER is the estimated carbon dioxide emissions per m 2 per year (kgco 2 /m 2 yr) for the dwelling as designed. It accounts for energy used in heating, fixed cooling, hot water and lighting. It is the equivalent of the BER for dwellings. 122 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

139 Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions Energy Dynamic simulation model (DSM) A software tool that models energy inputs and outputs for different types of buildings over time. In certain situations, SBEM will not be sophisticated enough to provide an accurate assessment of a building s energy efficiency. In these cases government-approved proprietary dynamic simulation models may be used. Energy demand The building energy provided for end uses in the building such as space heating, hot water, space cooling, lighting, fan power and pump power. Energy demands are the same as room loads. One of the outputs from the Building Regulations Output Document is for heating and cooling energy demand only, not for any other building energy uses. Heating and cooling energy demands are influenced by factors including building fabric heat loss, air permeability, glazing and shading. Energy Performance Ratio for New Constructions (EPR NC ) A metric that is unique to BREEAM and calculated by the BREEAM Ene 01 Calculator within the BREEAM Assessment Scoring and Reporting tool, using modelled outputs from the approved building energy calculation software. It is a ratio that defines the performance of a BREEAM assessed building in terms of its regulated operational heating and cooling energy demand, primary energy consumption andco 2 emissions. This measure of performance is used to determine the number of Ene 01 credits a building achieves in the BREEAM assessment. A description of how the EPR NC is defined and calculated is summarised in the Methodology section and outlined in greater detail in a Guidance Note Fixed building service The building regulations for energy performance of buildings define this as any part of, or any controls associated with: 1. Fixed internal or external lighting systems but does not include emergency escape lighting or specialist process lighting; or 2. Fixed systems for heating, hot water service, air-conditioning or mechanical ventilation. Low or zero carbon (LZC) technologies A low or zero carbon technology provides a source of energy generation from renewable energy sources or from a low carbon source such as combined heat and power (CHP) or ground source heat pumps (GSHP). National Calculation Method (NCM) The National Calculation Method (NCM) enables quantification of building operational energy consumption and CO 2 emissions resulting from regulated building services/systems and fabric performance. The NCM is the methodology used for demonstrating compliance with the European Union Energy Performance of Buildings Directive (EPBD) 2012 (recast). Building energy modelling compliant with the NCM can be carried out using approved software (see Relevant definition of Approved building energy calculation software). The full details are described in the NCM Modelling Guide for the relevant country. 1. Wales:2013 Wales NCM Modelling Guide, 2. Scotland: National Calculation Methodology (NCM) Modelling Guide for Scotland (2010), 3. Northern Ireland: NCM Modelling Guide (2010) 3, 4. England: NCM Modelling Guide (2013), Notional building A hypothetical building of the same size, shape, orientation and shading as the actual building, with the same activities, zoning and system types and exposed to the same weather data, but with pre-defined specified properties for the building fabric, fittings and services. The notional building is concurrent with the national building regulations for Wales 2014, Northern Ireland 2012 and England For Scotland 2013, the notional building is generated based upon a building designed to meet the 2002 standards and a percentage improvement is applied to define the compliant building target carbon dioxide emission rate (TER). Near-site LZC A low or zero carbon source of energy generation located near to the site of the assessed building. The source is most likely to be providing energy for all or part of a local community of buildings, including the assessed building e.g. Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

140 Energy BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 decentralised energy generation linked to a community heat network or renewable electricity sources connected via private wire. Onsite LZC A low or zero carbon source of energy generation which is located on the same site as the assessed building. Primary energy consumption This refers to the direct use at the source, or supply to users without transformation, of crude energy, that is, energy that has not been subjected to any conversion or transformation process. Private wire arrangement In the context of BREEAM for low or zero carbon technology installations, a private wire arrangement is where any electricity generated on or in the vicinity of the site is fed directly to the building being assessed, by dedicated power supplies. If electricity is generated which is surplus to the instantaneous demand of the building, this electricity may be fed back to the national grid. The carbon benefit associated with any electricity fed into the grid in this manner can only be allocated against an individual installation or building. In cases where a building is supplied by a communal installation, no carbon benefit can be allocated to buildings which are not connected to the communal installation. Regulated energy Building energy consumption resulting from the specification of a controlled, fixed building services and fittings, including space heating and cooling, hot water, ventilation and lighting. Renewables Obligation Certificate (ROC) This is a green certificate issued to an accredited generator for eligible renewable electricity generated within the United Kingdom and supplied to customers within the United Kingdom by a licensed electricity supplier. One ROC is issued for each megawatt hour (MWh) of eligible renewable output generated 4. Standard Assessment Procedure (SAP) for Energy Rating of Dwellings The government s approved methodology for assessing the energy performance of new dwellings. The current version is SAP 2012 version The procedure accounts for energy used in: Space heating and cooling Hot water Fixed lighting Mechanical ventilation. The Simplified Building Energy Model (SBEM) SBEM is software developed for DCLG by BRE. SBEM is a computer program that provides an analysis of a building s energy consumption. It calculates monthly energy use and carbon dioxide emissions of a building (excluding dwellings) based on a description of the building geometry, construction, use and HVAC and lighting equipment. SBEM is accompanied by a basic user interface, isbem. There also exists alternative approved software front-end interfaces for SBEM (see definition of approved software above). Target Emission Rate (TER) The target emission rate is the minimum energy performance requirement (required by building regulations) for a new non-domestic building (kgco 2 /m 2 yr). The TER is calculated in accordance with the National Calculation Methodology (NCM) and the Simplified Buildings Energy Model (SBEM). For dwellings, the TER is calculated using the SAP methodology according to the requirements defined in the building regulations for dwellings. The TER is expressed in terms of the mass of CO 2 emitted per year per square metre of total useful floor area of the building (kgco 2 /m 2 yr). Unregulated energy Building energy consumption resulting from a system or process that is not controlled, i.e. energy consumption from systems in the building on which the Building Regulations do not impose a requirement. For example, this may include energy consumption from systems integral to the building and its operation, e.g. lifts, escalators, refrigeration systems and ducted fume cupboards; or energy consumption from operational related equipment e.g. computers, servers, printers, photocopiers, laptops, mobile fume cupboards, cooking, audio-visual equipment and other appliances etc. 124 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

141 Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions Energy Zero net regulated carbon (CO 2 ) emissions The annual building net regulated CO 2 emissions (kgco 2 /m 2 yr) arising as a result of annual energy consumption from fixed building services, i.e. space heating and cooling, domestic hot water, ventilation and lighting, also referred to as controlled services and fittings, as a result of requirements imposed on such systems by the building regulations. In aiming to achieve a zero regulated carbon status, the building energy modelling can take account of contributions of energy generated from onsite and near-site renewable and low carbon installations. Energy generated and supplied from off-site renewable and low carbon installations cannot be used to meet this definition. Other information Allowable solutions The term Allowable Solutions forms part of the proposed zero carbon definition. A consultation on allowable solutions is ongoing (at the time of writing). Once an official definition of allowable solutions is confirmed by the Government for nondomestic buildings, BRE will advise accordingly on the contribution of allowable solutions toward achieving BREEAM credits. Building regulations classifications for multi-residential buildings Multi-residential buildings that can be assessed under BREEAM New Construction 2014 will be classified under either the nondwelling version of the relevant building regulations or a combination of the non-dwelling and dwelling of the building regulations, as outlined in CN7. For England and Wales, and Northern Ireland, areas classified under their relevant building regulations documents, Approved Documents (AD) Part L2A and the NI Technical Handbook F2, are classed as buildings other than dwellings. However this does also include rooms for residential purposes (see below). Areas classified as Part L1A or Technical Handbook F1 are self-contained dwellings. The Part L/Technical Handbook F classification impacts this BREEAM issue in that areas classified as Part L2A/F2 must be assessed using SBEM and areas classified as Part L1A/F1 must be assessed using SAP. For Scotland, see the General section and Appendix A of the Technical Handbook Non-Domestic for definitions of domestic and non-domestic buildings. Room for residential purposes The building regulations for Wales, Northern Ireland and England give the following definition: Room for residential purposes means a room, or suite of rooms, which is not a dwelling-house or a flat and which is used by one or more persons to live and sleep and includes a room in a hostel, a hotel, a boarding house, a hall of residence or a residential home but does not include a room in a hospital, or other similar establishment, used for patient accommodation. Guidance for assessing Ene 01 performance in buildings that contain residential areas Guidance for assessing performance where the building has been modelled using SAP only The relevant data must be sourced from the SAP Data sheet from the approved software (provided by the Accredited energy assessor). This data must first be entered in to the 'Ene 01 Supplementary Calculator for Multi-Residential Buildings Using SAP'. The calculator converts the data into the outputs outlined in the Methodology section. Once converted by the Ene 01 Supplementary Calculator, the outputs should be entered into BREEAM s Ene 01 Calculator. This calculator will then confirm the Energy Performance Ratio (EPR) and number of BREEAM credits achieved. The Ene 01 Supplementary Calculator for Multi-Residential Buildings Using SAP describes in detail what data to source from the SAP data sheet(s). Guidance for assessing performance where the building has been modelled usingsap and SBEM Where the building has been classified under both the non-dwelling and the dwelling regulations, because it contains both residential and non-residential areas, two sets of energy performance data will be required: one set from SBEM for the nondomestic areas; and one from SAP for the self-contained dwellings. Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

142 Energy BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 The relevant SAP data must first be entered into the 'Ene 01 Supplementary Calculator for Multi-Residential Buildings Using SAP'. This calculator converts the data into the outputs outlined in the Methodology section. This converted SAP data along with the relevant outputs from SBEM must then be added to BREEAM s Ene 01 Calculator in the BREEAM Assessment Scoring and Reporting Tool. This calculator will then confirm the Energy Performance Ratio (EPR) and number of BREEAM credits achieved. Where both SBEM and SAP outputs are used, the total credits achieved are determined by area weighting the credits achieved for the domestic and non-domestic parts of the building. The area weighted totals are then added together and rounded down to the nearest whole credit. The same method of area weighting is applied to the percentage improvement on the building's Target Emission Rate. The area weighted credits and percentage improvement are the totals used to determine compliance with BREEAM s Ene 01 minimum standards. 1 CIBSE TM54: 2013, Evaluating operational energy performance of buildings at the design stage 2 The Building Regulations 2000, Approved Document Part L2A: The conservation of fuel and power in new buildings other than dwellings, 2013 edition, HM Government. 3 National Calculation Methodology (NCM) Modelling Guide (for buildings other than dwellings) in England and Wales, 2010 edition (revision January 2013) Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

143 Ene 02 Energy monitoring Energy Ene 02 Energy monitoring Number of credits available Minimum standards Building type dependent Yes Aim To recognise and encourage the installation of energy sub-metering that facilitates the monitoring of operational energy consumption. Assessment criteria Please note: The first credit is applicable to all building types. The second credit is not applicable to Pre-schools, Primary schools, Law courts, Prisons, Multi-residential and Other Residential institutions. The following is required to demonstrate compliance. One credit - Sub-metering of major energy consuming systems (see definitions) 1. The energy consuming systems accounting for 90% of the estimated total annual energy consumption of the building are metered using an appropriate energy monitoring and management system or separate accessible energy submeters with pulsed outputs to enable future connection to an energy monitoring and management system (see Relevant definitions ). 2. The end energy consuming use is identifiable to the building user, for example through labelling or data outputs. One credit - Sub-metering of high energy load and tenancy areas 3. An accessible energy monitoring and management system or separate accessible energy sub-meters with pulsed outputs to enable future connection to an energy monitoring and management system are provided, covering the energy supply to all tenanted areas or, in the case of single occupancy buildings, relevant function areas or departments within the building/unit. Checklists and tables None Compliance notes Ref Terms Description Shell and core Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

144 Energy BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Ref Terms Description CN1 Applicable assessment criteria Sub-metering of major energy consuming systems, criteria 1-2 Option 1 - Shell only: These criteria are not applicable to this shell and core assessment option. Option 2 - Shell and core only: Criteria 1 and 2 apply to this shell and core assessment option. Sub-metering of high energy load and tenancy areas, criterion 3 Both options: This criterion applies to both the shell and core assessment options. Meters must be installed on the energy supply to each separate tenanted unit or floor plate within the assessed development. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options. Simple buildings CN2 Applicable assessment criteria This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional guidance on how to apply the criteria. CN3 Scope of submetering for simple building assessments Dependent upon the building type, the assessor should use their discretion to identify which other major energy consuming systems (where present) should be sub-metered. Country specific CN4 Country specific criteria No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. General CN5 Extensions to existing buildings Where an existing building is being extended and it has existing building services plant and systems that will be common to both the new extension and existing building, the criteria only apply to the extension. In this case, energy services supplying energy consuming systems from the existing building shall, as a minimum, be metered at the entry points to the extension, e.g. hot water, chilled water, gas and electricity. However the best practice approach would usually be to ensure that the energy metering covers the entire building. CN6 Lighting and small power Due to traditional distribution methods, it can be difficult to cost-effectively separate lighting and small power. It is acceptable, within a single floor, for lighting and small power to be combined for metering purposes, provided that submetering is provided for each floor plate. CN7 Modular boiler systems See criterion 1, Modular boiler systems can be monitored as a whole. See definition of modular boiler systems in Relevant definitions. Building specific 128 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

145 Ene 02 Energy monitoring Energy Ref Terms Description CN8 Buildings situated on campus developments See criterion 3. The systems for buildings situated on campus developments must be monitored using either an appropriate energy monitoring and management system or another automated control system, e.g. outstations linked to a central computer, for monitoring energy consumption. The criteria only apply to the assessed building. Where energy services are supplied from an existing building on the campus, they shall be metered at the entry points to the assessed building, e.g. hot water, chilled water, gas and electricity. Provision of a pulsed output is not sufficient to award the credit for these building types. CN9 Small office, industrial or retail units See criterion 3. For a development consisting of a number of small units a single meter per unit is sufficient to achieve this credit. Individual areas within each unit do not need to be sub-metered. For the purpose of this BREEAM issue, a small unit is defined as < 200m 2. CN10 Large office, industrial or retail units See criterion 3 For a development consisting of one or more larger units (i.e. > 200m 2 ), sufficient sub metering to allow for monitoring of the relevant function areas or departments within the unit must be specified, in addition to metering of the unit as a whole. CN11 Healthcare buildings: medicalbased systems See criterion 3 Large-scale medical equipment/systems can be ignored when assessing compliance with this issue (although it is recommended that sub-metering is considered in such instances). CN12 Single occupant buildings: relevant function areas/departments See criterion 3. The lists below summarise the commonly found functions by building types. These lists are not exhaustive and where other areas/departments exist, these should also be separately metered. CN13 Office buildings 1. Office areas (metering by floor plate) 2. Catering CN14 Retail buildings 1. Sales area 2. Storage and warehouse 3. Cold storage 4. Offices 5. Catering 6. Tenant units CN15 Industrial units 1. Office areas 2. Operational area 3. Ancillary areas (e.g. canteen etc) CN16 Education buildings 1. Kitchens (excluding small staff kitchens and food technology rooms) 2. Computer suites 3. Workshops 4. Lecture halls 5. Conference rooms 6. Drama studio Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

146 Energy BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Ref Terms Description 7. Swimming pool 8. Sports hall 9. Process areas 10. Laboratories 11. High containment suites within laboratories 12. Controlled environment chambers 13. Animal accommodation areas 14. Data centres 15. IT work and study rooms, including IT equipped library space and any space with provision of more than one computer terminal per 5m 2. Individual sub-metering of standard classrooms/seminar rooms is not required. CN17 Hospitals and other healthcare facilities 1. Operating department 2. Imaging department 3. Radiotherapy department 4. Pathology department 5. Dialysis department 6. Medical physics 7. Mortuary and post-mortem department 8. Rehabilitation, when including hydrotherapy pools 9. Central sterile supplies department (or equivalent) 10. Process areas, e.g. commercial-scale kitchens and laundries 11. IT rooms 12. Pharmacy department 13. Laboratories 14. Tenancy areas (e.g. catering, retail, laundry) In small healthcare buildings (<999m 2 ) with no high-energy load areas (as defined above), a single meter per floor plate is sufficient to achieve this credit. Individual areas within each floor plate do not need to be sub-metered. CN18 Other buildings See criterion 3. Other types of single occupant buildings should use the above lists of function areas as a guide to the level of provision required to comply, bearing in mind the aim of the credit is to encourage the installation of energy sub-metering that facilitates the monitoring of in-use energy consumption (in this case by area). Methodology None Evidence Criteria Interim design stage Final post-construction stage All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria. 130 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

147 Ene 02 Energy monitoring Energy Additional information Relevant definitions Accessible meters Energy meters located in an area of the building that allows for easy access to facilitate regular monitoring and readings by the building occupant/facilities manager. Typically this will be the plant room, main distribution room or control room (where a BEMS is installed). Common areas Developments that have several tenant units, particularly large retail developments, may also share common facilities and access that is not owned or controlled by any one individual tenant, but used by all. Common areas are typically managed and maintained by the development s owner, i.e. landlord or their managing agent. Examples of common areas include an atrium, stairwells, main entrance foyers/reception and external areas e.g. parking. Energy consuming systems Systems that consume energy to perform the following functions within a building:: a. Space heating b. Domestic hot water heating c. Humidification* d. Cooling* e. Air movement i.e. fans (major)* f. Lighting g. Small power supply h. Other major energy-consuming systems/plant, where appropriate. Depending on the building type, this might include for example, plant used for swimming or hydrotherapy pools, kitchen plant, cold storage plant, laboratory plant, sterile services equipment, transportation systems (e.g. lifts and escalators) drama studios and theatres with large lighting rigs. See also CIBSE TM39: Building Energy Metering 1 for further information. Note: The systems succeeded by * should not be present where a BREEAM NC Simple Buildings assessment is being carried out. Energy monitoring and management system Examples include automatic meter reading systems (AMR) and building energy management systems (BEMS). Automatic monitoring and targeting (am&t) is an example of a management tool that includs automatic meter reading and data management. Energy supply All types of energy supplied to a building area (department/tenancy/unit) within the boundary of the assessed development; including electricity, gas, heat or other form of energy/fuel which is consumed as a result of the use of, and operations within, each relevant area. Energy meters Energy meters measure the amount of energy used on a circuit where energy is flowing. Primary meters measure the main incoming energy and are used for billing by the utility supplier. They include the principal smart and advanced utility meters to a site for electricity and gas. Sub-meters are the second tier including heat and steam meters and secondary meters installed to measure consumption by specific items of plant or equipment or to discrete physical areas, e.g. individual buildings; floors in a multi-storey building, tenanted areas, function areas. Modular boiler systems A modular boiler system consists of a series of boilers that are linked together to meet a variety of heating demands. They are generally composed of several identical boiler units, sometimes stacked, although a mix of condensing and conventional boilers could be used. They operate in increments of capacity, each at around their full capacity and their peak efficiency, so that the overall part load efficiency is greater than it would be for a single boiler. Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

148 Energy BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Other information Detailed guidance on how to develop an appropriate metering strategy for the energy criteria of a new building is available in CIBSE TM39 Building Energy Metering. 1 TM39 Building Energy Metering, CIBSE, Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

149 Ene 03 External lighting Energy Ene 03 External lighting Number of credits available Minimum standards 1 No Aim To recognise and encourage the specification of energy-efficient light fittings for external areas of the development. Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance for: One credit 1. The building has been designed to operate without the need for external lighting (which includes on the building, signs and at entrances). OR alternatively, where the building does have external lighting, one credit can be awarded as follows: 2. The average initial luminous efficacy of the external light fittings within the construction zone is not less than 60 luminaire lumens per circuit Watt. 3. All external light fittings are automatically controlled for prevention of operation during daylight hours and presence detection in areas of intermittent pedestrian traffic. Checklists and tables None. Compliance notes Ref Terms Description Shell and core CN1 Applicable assessment criteria Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Typically external lighting will be specified and installed by the developer. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options. Simple buildings CN2 Applicable This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

150 Energy BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Ref Terms Description assessment criteria guidance on how to apply the criteria. Country specific CN3 Country specific criteria No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. General CN4 Single building assessments on larger developmentsor campuses and extensions to existing buildings Where the building being assessed forms part of a larger development (or is an extension to an existing building) containing common areas and other buildings, the scope of the external lighting criteria apply only to external new and existing lighting within the construction zone of the assessed building. CN5 Temporary lighting, decorative lighting and floodlighting Temporary lighting such as theatrical, stage or local display installations, where specified, can be excluded from assessment under this issue. Decorative lighting and floodlighting must however not be exempt from the assessment criteria. Building type specific CN6 Prisons and other secured buildings security lighting The criteria are concerned only with general external lighting e.g. way-finding, car parking, decorative, signage, landscape, storage areas etc. Lighting specified for specific security purposes within secured buildings, such as prisons, can be excluded from assessment under this issue. Methodology Average initial luminous efficacy of the external light fittings The individual luminous fluxes of all luminaires within the construction zone are summed (in lumens), then divided by the total circuit Watts for all the luminaires. For lamps other than LED lamps, the luminous flux of a luminaire using those lamps can be determined by multiplying the sum of the luminous fluxes produced by all the lamps in the luminaire by the light output ratio of the luminaire (as confirmed by the luminaire manufacturer). Note: LED lamps are typically integral to the luminaire (LED luminaires). As such, the manufacturers' literature will encompass both lamp and luminaire as a whole. 134 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

151 Ene 03 External lighting Energy Evidence Criteria Interim design stage Interim post construction stage All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria. Additional information Relevant definitions Automatic control An automatic external lighting control system that prevents operation during daylight hours through either time switch or daylight sensor (a manually switched lighting circuit with daylight sensor or time switch override is also acceptable) in addition to providing presence detection in areas of intermittent traffic. Note: for external lighting not fitted with presence detectors, time switches must provide automatic switch-off of lighting after a specified curfew hour - except in cases where there is a specific requirement for lighting to be left on all night. Construction zone For the purpose of this issue the construction zone is defined as the site which is being developed for the BREEAMassessed building and its external site areas, i.e. the scope of the new works. Daylight sensor A type of sensor that detects daylight and switches lighting on at dusk and off at dawn. Luminous efficacy in luminaire lumens per circuit Watt The ratio between the luminous flux produced by an entire luminaire (light fitting) (in lumens) and the total power consumed by the lamps and the control gear contained within the luminaire (Watts). Presence detector A sensor that can turn lighting on when a presence is detected in the scanned area, and off after a pre-set time when no presence is detected. Presence detectors must be compatible with the lamp type used as very frequent switching can reduce the life of some lamp types. Time switch A switch with an in-built clock which will allow lighting to be switched on and off at programmed times. Other information None. Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

152 Energy BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Ene 04 Low carbon design Number of credits available Minimum standards 3 No Aim To encourage the adoption of design measures, which reduce building energy consumption and associated carbon emissions and minimise reliance on active building services systems. Assessment criteria This issue is split into two parts: Passive design (2 credits) Low or zero carbon technologies (1 credit). The following is required to demonstrate compliance. Passive design One credit - Passive design analysis 1. The first credit within issue Hea 04 Thermal comfort has been achieved to demonstrate the building design can deliver appropriate thermal comfort levels in occupied spaces. 2. The project team carries out an analysis of the proposed building design/development by Concept Design stage (RIBA Stage 2 or equivalent) to identify opportunities for the implementation of passive design solutions that reduce demands for energy consuming building services (see Compliance note 2). 3. The building uses passive design measures to reduce the total heating, cooling, mechanical ventilation and lighting demand in line with the findings of the passive design analysis and the analysis demonstrates a reduction in the total energy demand as a result. One credit - Free cooling 4. The passive design analysis carried out under criterion 2 above includes an analysis of free cooling and identifies opportunities for the implementation of free cooling solutions. 5. The building uses ANY of the free cooling strategies listed in Compliance note CN3 to reduce the cooling energy demand, i.e. it does not use active mechanical cooling. Low and zero carbon technologies One credit - Low zero carbon (LZC) feasibility study 6. A feasibility study has been carried out by the completion of the Concept Design stage (RIBA Stage 2 or equivalent) by an energy specialist (see Compliance notes) to establish the most appropriate recognised local (onsite or near-site) low or zero carbon (LZC) energy source(s) for the building/development (see Compliance note CN6). 7. A ocal LZC energy technology/technologies has/have been specified for the building/development in line with the recommendations of this feasibility study. 136 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

153 Ene 04 Low carbon design Energy Checklists and tables None. Compliance notes Ref Terms Description Shell and core CN1 Applicable assessment criteria Passive design analysis, criteria 1 to 3 Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Free cooling, criteria 4 to 5 Option 1 - Shell only: These free cooling criteria apply, subject to the following condition: Only free cooling options 1 to 3 listed in Compliance note CN5 are applicable. Option 2 - Shell and core: These free cooling criteria apply. All free cooling options listed in Compliance note CN5 are applicable. LZC feasibility study, criteria 6 to 7 Option 1 - Shell only: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply, subject to the following conditions: Criteria 6: The LZC feasibility study must be completed as part of the shell only design, based on the expected building use and loads specified in the design brief or, where these are not specified, for likely scenarios. Criteria 7: The built form should allow for the future installation of the most cost effective LZC options. Option 2 - Shell and core: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options. Simple buildings CN2 Applicable assessment criteria This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional guidance on how to apply the criteria. However, note that onsite LZC technologies are only eligible to contribute to meeting the criteriaof this issue where the proposed solution can be classified as a microgeneration technology. The requirements for classification as a microgeneration technology must be met as described in Compliance note CN8 Country specific CN3 Country specific guidance No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

154 Energy BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Ref Terms Description General CN4 Passive design analysis See criterion 2. As a minimum, the passive design analysis should cover: 1. Site location 2. Site weather 3. Microclimate 4. Building layout 5. Building orientation 6. Building form 7. Building fabric 8. Thermal mass or other fabric thermal storage 9. Building occupancy type 10. Daylighting strategy 11. Ventilation strategy 12. Adaptation to climate change. CN5 Free cooling analysis See criterion 5. The free cooling analysis should demonstrate consideration of appropriate technologies from the following : 1. Night-time cooling (requires fabric to have a high exposed thermal mass) 2. Ground coupled air cooling 3. Displacement ventilation (not linked to any active cooling system) 4. Ground water cooling 5. Surface water cooling 6. Evaporative cooling, direct or indirect 7. Desiccant dehumidification and evaporative cooling, using waste heat 8. Absorption cooling, using waste heat. CN6 LZC feasibility study See criterion 6. The LZC study should cover as a minimum: 1. Energy generated from LZC energy source per year 2. Life cycle cost of the potential specification, accounting for payback 3. Local planning criteria, including land use and noise 4. Feasibility of exporting heat/electricity from the system 5. Any available grants 6. All technologies appropriate to the site and energy demand of the development. 7. Reasons for excluding other technologies 8. Where appropriate to the building type, connecting the proposed building to an existing local community CHP system or source of waste heat or power OR specifying a building/site CHP system or source of waste heat or power with the potential to export excess heat or power via a local community energy scheme. CN7 LZC feasibility study timing. See criteria 6. When undertaking a feasibility study at a stage later than concept design (RIBA stage 2 or equivalent), an additional element would need to be included in the report to highlight the local LZC energy sources which had been discounted due to the constraints placed on the project by the late consideration, and the reason for their omission. If the feasibility study discounted all local LZC as unfeasible due to the late stage in the project that the study was commissioned, then the credit for the feasibility study must be withheld. If the feasibility study were commissioned at the concept design stage or earlier and in the unlikely event the study concluded that the specification of any local LZC technology were unfeasible, the LZC credit could still be awarded. 138 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

155 Ene 04 Low carbon design Energy Ref Terms Description CN8 Recognised local LZC technologies See criterion 6. Technologies eligible to contribute to achieving the requirements of this issue must produce energy from renewable sources and meet all other ancillary requirements as defined by Directive 2009/28/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 23 April 2009 on the promotion of the use of energy from renewable sources and amending and subsequently repealing Directives 2001/77/EC and 2003/30/EC ( The following requirements must also be met: 1. There must be a direct supply of energy produced to the building under assessment. 2. Where covered by the Microgeneration Certification Scheme (MCS), technologies under 50kWe or 45kWth must be MCS (or equivalent) certified products installed by MCS (or equivalent) certified installers. 3. Combined heat and power (CHP) schemes above 50kWe must be certified under the CHPQA standard. CHP schemes fuelled by mains gas are eligible to contribute to performance against this issue. 4. Air source heat pumps can only be considered as a renewable technology when used in heating mode. Refer to Annex VI of Directive 2009/28/EC for more detail on accounting for energy from heat pumps. 5. Where MCS or CHPQA certification is not available, the design team must investigate the availability of alternative accreditation schemes in line with the Directives listed above, or an equivalent country/regional directive or standard. Where an accreditation scheme exists it should be used for the purpose of verifying compliance of the specified LZC technology. If no accreditation scheme exists in the country the design team must demonstrate they have investigated the competence of the installer selected to install the LZC technology and are confident that they have the skill and competence to install the technology appropriately. CN9 LZC technologies recognised by approved software The carbon emissions savings from these LZC technologies must also be demonstrated using the approved building energy modelling software. This currently includes solar thermal energy systems, photovoltaic systems, wind turbines, biomass boilers, CHP and heat pumps. It does not currently include grey water heat recovery or earth ducts (see ). CN10 Novel LZC technology not listed See criterion 6. Other systems may be acceptable as part of a LZC strategy under this issue but are not currently included as LZC technologies in any of the approved building energy calculation software packages. Acceptability will be dependent on the nature of the system proposed and the carbon benefits achieved. The BREEAM Assessor must confirm acceptability with BRE before an assessment is submitted. The calculation procedure for the new LZC technology should be submitted for consideration as a 'novel technology' to be included in the 'SBEM-Q' innovation process (see Other information). The novel technology would only be acceptable for the LZC credit if either: a. It is already demonstrably modelled in one of the approved dynamic simulation compliance tools; b. The calculation procedure has been accepted by the SBEM-Q process and integrated into the SBEM tool; or c. It has been applied for and is in the process of being accepted for SBEM-Q. For one-off LZC technology designs, where it is not viable to obtain SBEM-Q Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

156 Energy BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Ref Terms Description approval, a BREEAM innovation credit can be applied for and subject to approval, obtained instead. CN11 Waste heat from a building- related operational process See criterion 6. Waste heat from an operational process that takes place within the assessed building (or on the assessed site) can be considered as low carbon for the purpose of this BREEAM issue. This is on the condition that the generation of the heat from the process is integral to the assessed building. Examples of operational processes and functions include manufacturing processes, high temperature oven/kiln, compressors serving process plant, micro-brewery, crematorium, testing and commissioning boilers for training or manufacture and data centres. It does not include waste heat from IT or server rooms, which could be used as part of conventional heat recovery measures. CN12 Community and near-site schemes See criterion 6. Local does not have to mean onsite; community schemes (near-site) can be used as a means of demonstrating compliance, as this BREEAM issue seeks to encourage the installation of onsite and near-site LZC technologies. CN13 Waste incineration See criterion 6. Waste heat from an incineration plant can only be considered as low carbon for the purpose of this BREEAM issue under the following circumstances: 1. All other LZC technologies have been considered and discounted in the feasibility study and; EITHER 2. The local authority or region in which the incineration plant is located is demonstrably meeting its annual waste reuse/recycling targets and waste management policies; OR 3. A near or onsite facility connected to the building, via a private wire arrangement, which is demonstrably removing re-usable and recyclable waste material prior to incineration. CN14 First generation biofuels See criterion 6. Given the current uncertainty over their impact on biodiversity, global food production and greenhouse gas savings, plus the ease of inter-changeability between fossil fuels, BREEAM does not recognise or reward building systems fuelled by first generation biofuels manufactured from feedstocks, e.g. biofuels manufactured from sugars, seeds, grain, animal fats etc. where these are grown or farmed for the purposes of biofuel production. Subject to review against the criteria set out in the Compliance notesbelow, BREEAM may recognise systems using second generation biofuels (see Relevant definitions) or biofuels manufactured from biodegradable waste materials e.g. biogas, waste vegetable oil or locally and sustainably-sourced solid biofuels e.g. woodchip, wood pellets, where these are not interchangeable with fossil fuels or first generation biofuels. CN15 Second generation biofuels and biofuels from waste streams See criterion 6. BREEAM recognises that biofuels produced from biomass which is a by-product of other processes may provide a more sustainable alternative to fossil fuels. Typically, these use waste feedstock consisting of residual non-food parts of current food crops, industry waste such as woodchips, other waste vegetable matter and waste fish oil from sustainable fish stocks to produce biofuel. Such biofuels will, in principle be recognised by BREEAM for the purposes of defining low/zero carbon technologies. However due to the emerging nature of such technologies, full details would be required for review by BRE Global prior to confirmation of acceptability. Matters which would be required for consideration include the following: 1. Type, provenance and sustainability of the biomass feedstock 140 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

157 Ene 04 Low carbon design Energy Ref Terms Description 2. Avoidance/minimisation of fossil fuel use in extracting the biofuel 3. Minimising fossil fuel use in transporting the biomass/biofuel 4. Presence of a supply agreement and a robust supply chain 5. Compatibility of the biofuel with the specified boiler/plant and manufacturer s warranty issues The use of other recycled or waste-derived biofuels such as waste oil from catering may also be recognised by BREEAM subject to the above criteria. For smaller scale applications, the assessor will, in addition, be required to demonstrate that the biofuel is locally sourced. BREEAM does not qualify the term locally sourced or specify a minimum supply contract, however the assessor must determine and demonstrate that these are reasonable for the particular application. Building specific CN16 Schools: information communication technology (ICT) classrooms With respect to the free cooling credit, it is possible for ICT classrooms to be designed to avoid the use of mechanical cooling. Hence, they are not exempt from the requirements of this issue i.e. if mechanical cooling were used to treat these spaces; it would not be possible to achieve the free cooling credit within this BREEAM issue. Methodology None. Evidence Criteria Interim design stage Final post-construction stage All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria. 4-7 Results from a dynamic simulation model demonstrating the feasibility of the free cooling strategy and meeting the first credit of Hea 03. As per interim design stage Additional information Relevant definitions Approved building energy modelling software Refer to Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions. Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

158 Energy BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Energy specialist An individual who has acquired substantial expertise or a recognised qualification for undertaking assessments, designs and installations of low or zero carbon solutions in the commercial buildings sector and is not professionally connected to a single low or zero carbon technology or manufacturer. First and second generation biofuels First generation biofuels are fuels made from sugar, starch, vegetable oil, or animal fats using conventional technology. Second generation biofuels are fuels from lignocellulosic biomass feedstock using advanced technical processes 1 Common first generation biofuels include vegetable oil, biodiesel and bioalcohols. Free cooling The ability of the building to provide cooling to the internal occupied areas without the need to rely on energyconsuming mechanical cooling. Free cooling is an enhanced passive design method that requires engineering design and modelling to demonstrate its effectiveness. Other similar methods include enhanced passive ventilation and enhanced daylighting. Microgeneration Certification Scheme (MCS) The Microgeneration Certification Scheme (MCS) is an independent scheme that certifies microgeneration products and installers in accordance with consistent standards. It is designed to evaluate microgeneration products and installers against robust criteria, and provides consumers with an independent indication of the reliability of products, assurance that the installation will be carried out to the appropriate standard and a route for complaints should there be any issues. The MCS is a United Kingdom Accreditation Service (UKAS) accredited certification scheme covering all microgeneration products and services. It has support from the Department of Energy and Climate Change (DECC), industry and non-governmental groups as a prime method for making a substantial contribution to cutting the UK s dependency on fossil fuels and carbon dioxide emissions. Near-site LZC Refer to BREEAM issueene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions. Onsite LZC Refer to BREEAM issue Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions. Payback period The period of time needed for a financial return on an investment to equal the sum of the original investment. Other information Free cooling aim Free cooling has been highlighted in this issue as it relates particularly to contributing to reducing overheating for adaptation to climate change. It can also make the building much simpler to operate and maintain than one with mechanical cooling. Novel low and zero carbon (LZC) technologies - SBEM-Q In order to deal with the integration of new technologies into SBEM, a new procedure has been established which mirrors the SAP Appendix Q approach to some extent. Appendix Q provides a means whereby validated individual branded product performance information can be accessed and used as an adjunct to the SAP calculation. A product s performance information is determined by testing against a specification that has been agreed by DECC s NCM contractor, the relevant manufacturer(s) and industry sector representatives. Product data is listed in the SAP Appendix Q database (at By following the Innovation' path from that website, manufacturers can apply for novel LZC technologies to be validated under the so-called SBEM-Q procedure and then integrated as part of an amendment to the SBEM calculation. LZC feasibility study in building regulations The European Union Energy Performance of Buildings Directive (EPBD) (recast) 2012 (Directive 2010/31/EU), requires that all member states have a methodology for calculating the energy performance of buildings and that the feasibility of high-efficiency alternative systems is considered before construction starts, including energy from 142 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

159 Ene 04 Low carbon design Energy renewable sources, cogeneration, district heating and cooling and heat pumps (Article 6). This requirement has been included in the building regulations for England (amendment Regulation 25A, 2013) and Scotland (October 2013) and it has been proposed for the forthcoming regulations in Wales, expected in July The LZC feasibility study in BREEAM is intended to encourage the study to be done early in the project, not just before construction starts, so that the most appropriate solutions can be adopted. Also, this credit does not permit technologies that are not best practice/sustainable or cannot be modelled with a robust method. 1 Sustainable Bioenergy: a framework for decision makers, United Nations Energy, Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

160 Energy BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Ene 05 Energy efficient cold storage Number of credits available Minimum standards 2 No Aim To recognise and encourage the installation of energy efficient refrigeration systems, therefore reducing operational greenhouse gas emissions resulting from the system's energy use. Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance for: One credit - Refrigeration energy consumption 1. The refrigeration system, its controls and components have been designed, installed and commissioned as follows: a. In accordance with the Code of Conduct for carbon reduction in the refrigeration retail sector 1 (see Other information) and BS EN Refrigeration systems and heat pumps - Safety and environmental requirements. b. Use robust and tested refrigeration systems/components, normally defined as those included on the Enhanced Capital Allowance (ECA) Energy Technology Product List (ETPL) 2 or an equivalent list (see CN6 for a list of components). 2. The refrigeration plant has been commissioned to comply with the criteria for commissioning outlined in BREEAM issue Man 04 Commissioning and handover. One credit - Indirect greenhouse gas emissions 3. Criteria 1 and 2 are achieved. 4. The installed refrigeration system demonstrates a saving in indirect greenhouse gas emissions (CO 2 eq.) over the course of its operational life. With reference to The Carbon Trust Refrigeration Road Map 3, this can be demonstrated through specification of technologies described in CO 2 emissions saving options available when designing a new store/retail concept that deliver savings in comparison with the 'baseline' building. Refer to the Methodology section for further information. Note: For non-retail building types with cold storage refrigeration systems, refer to compliance note CN5. Checklists and tables None. 144 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

161 Ene 05 Energy efficient cold storage Energy Compliance notes Ref Terms Description Shell and core CN1 Applicable assessment criteria Option 1 - Shell only: This issue is not applicable to this shell and core assessment option. Option 2 Shell and core only: Where cold storage systems are specified/installed, all assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options. Simple buildings CN2 Applicable assessment criteria This issue is not applicable. Country specific CN3 Country specific guidance No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. General CN4 Scope of this BREEAM issue This issue is applicable only in instances where commercial/industrial sized refrigeration and storage systems are specified, for example: 1. Storage and refrigeration of food in supermarkets 2. Cold storage facilities in industrial, laboratory, healthcare and other buildings. The criteria do not apply where only domestic-scale refrigeration is to be installed; this type of installation is covered within BREEAM issue Ene 08 Energy efficient equipment. If the building does not contain commercial/industrial sized refrigeration system(s), this issue is not applicable to the assessment. CN5 Non retail buildings and the Carbon Trust Refrigeration Road Map Action Plan See criteria 3 and 4. The Carbon Trust s Refrigeration Road Map introduces the main energy saving opportunities for refrigeration use in the retail sector and defines a baseline supermarket. However, many of the technologies outlined in the Road Map are appropriate to non-food applications and therefore non-retail building types that specify or install cold storage systems. If the baseline supermarket does not provide an appropriate benchmark for achieving the second and third credit, the design team can still comply with the criteria by demonstrating a reduction in indirect greenhouse gas emissions (CO 2 eq.) against an alternative baseline. The design team must confirm details of the alternative baseline system used, and that it is based on a typical installation/technology for that building type. The systems being compared must have the same duty and service conditions and include the relevant consumption from the refrigeration systems ancillary equipment. Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

162 Energy BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Ref Terms Description CN6 Components on the ECA Energy Technology Product List See criterion 1b. Where specified as part of the refrigeration system, products used for the following components must be listed on the ECA Energy Technology Product List (or equivalent list): 1. Air cooled condensing units 2. Automatic air purgers 3. Cellar cooling equipment 4. Commercial service cabinets (cold food storage) 5. Curtains, blinds, sliding doors and covers for refrigerated display cabinets 6. Evaporative condensers 7. Forced air pre-coolers 8. Refrigerated display cabinets 9. Refrigeration compressors 10. Refrigeration system controls. CN7 Extensions to existing buildings If the assessed building is an extension to an existing building and there is cold storage plant in the existing building that will serve the new extension, then this plant must meet the criteria in order to achieve any available credits. Methodology Calculating indirect greenhouse gas emissions (CO 2 eq.) The indirect emissions must be calculated in accordance with the procedures in BS EN , Refrigerating system and heat pumps safety and environmental requirements, Annex B (total equivalent warming impact (TEWI)). Further detail on applying this method to calculate the indirect emissions is available in the Guideline methods of calculating TEWI 5 (total equivalent warming impact) published by the British Refrigeration Association (BRA). Calculations must be carried out by an appropriately qualified professional (e.g. a building services engineer), including justifications for assumptions and methodologies for savings in indirect greenhouse emissions. Evidence Criteria Interim design stage Final post-construction stage All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria. 1 and 3 A letter from the manufacturer/supplier or copies of their technical literature AND/OR A printout of the Enhanced Capital Allowance (ECA) Energy Technology Product List (ETPL) listing the specific products As per interim design stage 2 and 3 Written confirmation that the refrigeration plant will be commissioned and who is responsible Refrigeration plant commissioning record 146 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

163 Ene 05 Energy efficient cold storage Energy Criteria Interim design stage Final post-construction stage 4 Documentary evidence confirming the type of technology specified and estimated savings in indirect greenhouse emissions, including a description of how this saving is achieved. As per interim design stage plus confirmation of installed technology. Additional information Relevant definitions ECA Energy Technology Product List (ETPL) The ETPL list is part of the government's Enhanced Capital Allowance Scheme, a key part of the government s programme to manage climate change. The scheme provides a tax incentive to encourage investment in low carbon energy-saving equipment that meets published energy-efficiency criteria. The Energy Technology List (ETL) details the criteria for each type of technology, and lists those products in each category that meet them: Indirect operational greenhouse gas emissions These are the indirect greenhouse gas emissions that result from the production of energy used to power the refrigeration systems cooling plant. This includes the emissions from the production of grid electricity or an onsite source of energy generation, e.g. gas CHP. In the case of refrigeration systems the term direct greenhouse gas emissions is also used, this refers to the emissions that occur as a direct result of leakage of refrigerant from the system. The impacts of direct greenhouse gas emissions from refrigeration systems are dealt with in the BREEAM issue Pol 01 Impact of refrigerants. Therefore, only indirect emissions resulting from the energy consumption of the system are covered in this issue. Other information Code of Conduct for carbon reduction in the retail refrigeration sector The Code of Conduct has been developed by the Carbon Trust, in partnership with the Institute of Refrigeration (IoR) and the British Refrigeration Association (BRA). The Code is intended to compliment the Carbon Trust Refrigeration Road Map. 1 Code of Conduct for carbon reduction in the retail refrigeration sector, Carbon Trust, British Refrigeration Association, Institute of Refrigeration (June 2011). 2 Energy Technology List 3 Refrigeration Road Map An action plan for the retail sector, Carbon Trust, CTG021,2012 ( 4 BS EN 378:2008 Refrigerating systems and heat pumps. Safety and environmental requirements, BSI. 5 Guideline methods of calculating TEWI Issue 2, (2006), BRA Specification, British Refrigeration Association. Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

164 Energy BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Ene 06 Energy efficient transportation systems Number of credits available Minimum standards 3 No Aim To recognise and encourage the specification of energy-efficient transportation systems. Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance for: One credit - Energy consumption 1. Where either lifts, escalators or moving walks (transportation types) are specified: a. An analysis of the transportation demand and usage patterns for the building has been carried out to determine the optimum number and size of lifts (including counter-balancing ratio), escalators and/or moving walks. b. The energy consumption has been estimated in accordance with ISO BS EN Part 2 - Lifts and/or Part 3 - Escalators and Travelling Walkways for one of the following: i. At least two types of system (for each transportation type required); OR ii. An arrangement of systems (e.g. for lifts, hydraulic, traction, machine room-less lift (MRL)); OR iii. A system strategy which is fit for purpose. c. The transportation system with the lowest energy consumption is specified. One credit - Energy efficient features 2. Criterion 1 is achieved. 3. For lifts, the following three energy-efficient features are specified: a. The lifts operate in a stand-by condition during off-peak periods. For example the power side of the lift controller and other operating equipment such as lift car lighting, user displays and ventilation fans switch off when the lift has been idle for a prescribed length of time. b. The lift car lighting and display lighting provides an average lamp efficacy, (across all fittings in the car) of > 55 lamp lumens/circuit Watt and lighting switches off after the lift has been idle for a prescribed length of time. c. The lift uses a drive controller capable of variable-speed, variable-voltage, and variable-frequency (VVVF) control of the drive motor. 4. For escalators and/or moving walks, each escalator and/or moving walk complies with at least one of the following: a. It is fitted with a load sensing device that synchronises motor output to passenger demand through a variable speed drive; OR b. It is fitted with a passenger sensing device for automated operation (auto walk), so the escalator operates in standby mode when there is no passenger demand. One Credit - Regenerative drives 5. Criterion 1 is achieved. 6. The lift system has a regenerative drive unit so that any energy generated by a traction lift (due to running up loaded to less than the counterbalancing ratio or running down loaded to more than the counter balancing ratio) or by a hydraulic lift (due to running down) is returned back to the electricity utility supplier or used elsewhere in the building. 148 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

165 Ene 06 Energy efficient transportation systems Energy Checklists and tables None. Compliance notes Ref Terms Description Shell and core CN1 Applicable assessment criteria Option 1 - Shell only: This issue is not applicable. Option 2 - Shell and core only: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options. Simple buildings CN2 Applicable assessment criteria Energy Consumption (1 credit) 1. Criterion 1 Energy efficient features (1 credit) 2. Criteria 2 and 3 only. 3. Criteria 4 to 6 are not applicable. Country specific CN3 Country specific guidance No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. General CN4 Scope of this issue The criteria relating to lifts do not apply to lifting platforms, wheelchair stairlift/platform(s) or other similar facilities to aid persons with impaired mobility. However, any lifting device with a rated speed greater than 0.15m/s must be assessed inclusive of goods and vehicle, passenger lifts. A demonstration of compliance to the BREEAM criteria relating to the excluded transportation types would be considered best practice for an energy efficient system (despite not being required for the purpose of awarding the available credits). CN5 Transport analysis The transport analysis can be in the form of a written statement justifying the lift selection for the following conditions: where a single lift is provided in a low rise building for the purpose of DDA compliance/disabled access only; or where a goods lift is selected based on the size of the goods it is intended to carry. CN6 Building has no lifts, escalators or moving walks This issue will not be assessed where a building contains no lifts, escalators or moving walks. Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

166 Energy BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Ref Terms Description CN7 Regenerative drives See criterion 6. This credit can only be awarded where the regenerative drive produces an energy saving greater than the additional stand-by energy used by regenerative drives. Regenerative drives will typically be appropriate for high travel and high intensity usage lifts. Methodology None. Evidence Criteria Interim design stage Final post construction stage All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria. 1 Calculations for estimated energy consumption. As per interim design stage Additional Information Relevant definitions Counterbalancing ratio Traction lifts use a counterweight to balance the weight of the car plus a proportion of the rated load. This results in the drive motor being sized only to raise or lower approximately half the rated load. Lowering the counterbalancing ratio means a smaller motor and controlling drive unit are required, thus saving energy. Hydraulic lifts may use a balance weight to balance out a proportion of the weight of the car; this reduces the size of the drive motor required for the lift. Lift car lighting The level of lift car lighting is determined by the relevant standards. For example, BS EN81-1/2: 1998+A3: 2009 requires 50 lux on the car floor and any control surfaces MRL: Machine room-less lift All equipment is contained in the lift well, not in a separate machine room. Standby condition A condition when a lift is stationary at a floor and has reduced the power consumption to the minimum level set for that particular lift and terminates at the next traffic demand (from BS EN ISO : 2012). The period between when the lift was last used and when standby condition is entered is defined in BS EN ISO as 5 minutes Idle condition A condition when a lift is stationary at a floor following a run before the standby mode is entered (from BS EN ISO : 2012). 150 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

167 Ene 06 Energy efficient transportation systems Energy Other information BS EN ISO Energy performance of lifts, escalators and moving walks ISO is planned to consist of three parts, under the general title Energy performance of lifts, escalators and moving walks: Part 1: Energy measurement and verification Part 2: Energy calculation and classification for lifts (Elevators) Part 3: Energy calculation and classification for escalators and moving walks. Part 1 was published in October A draft of Part 2, ISO/DIS : , was published for review in July The review end date was in October Part 3 is under development. Parts 2 and 3 are expected to be published in It has been estimated that approximately 5% of a building s total energy consumption can be attributed to the operation of lifts and a large proportion of this can be attributable to standby mode in many situations. ISO Parts 2 and 3 are being prepared in response to the rapidly increasing need to ensure and to support the efficient and effective use of energy, providing: 1. A method to estimate energy consumption on a daily and an annual basis for lifts. 2. A method for energy classification of new, existing or modernised lifts. 3. Guidelines for reducing energy consumption that can be used to support building environmental and energy classification systems. Counterbalancing Lifts have a specified rated load and as such the counterbalancing ratio will be set accordingly (see Relevant definitions). Provided the type, number of lifts and the rated lift load specified is based on an appropriate analysis of the transportation/lift passenger demand and traction required for the building, then the counterbalancing ratio can be considered optimised for the purposes of compliance with BREEAM. Counterbalancing ratios are normally provided in the range of 40-50% for safety reasons. Any other values should be carefully considered. Reduced load balancing increases the maximum power and torque required to be delivered by the hoisting motor and so may increase the size of motor selected; although the average hoisting power and energy consumption will be reduced. A detailed engineering analysis of the rope traction, hoisting motor and its drive performance and electromechanical braking capacity under rated and reduced load conditions should be carried out, to ensure safe traction and braking capacity. Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

168 Energy BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Ene 07 Energy efficient laboratory systems Number of credits available Minimum standards Building type dependent No Aim To recognise and encourage laboratory areas that are designed to be energy efficient and minimise the CO 2 emissions associated with their operational energy consumption. Assessment criteria This issue is split into three parts: Pre-requisite Design specification (1 credit) Best practice energy efficient measures (upto 4 credits) - building type dependent. The following is required to demonstrate compliance: Pre-Requisite 1. Criterion 1 within issue Hea 03 Safe containment in laboratories (Risk Assessment) has been achieved. One Credit - Design specification 2. Client engagement is sought through consultation during the preparation of the initial project brief (RIBA Stage 1 or equivalent) to determine occupant requirements and define laboratory performance criteria. Performance criteria should include, but not be limited to the following aspects: a. Description of purpose b. Occupant/process activities c. Containment requirements and standards d. Air change rate requirements e. Ventilation system performance and efficiencies f. Heating and cooling requirements g. Interaction between systems h. Flexibility/adaptability of laboratory facilities. 3. The design team demonstrates that the energy demand of the laboratory facilities has been minimised as a result of achieving the defined design performance criteria. This has informed the right-sizing (see Relevant definitions) of the services system equipment (including ventilation supply and extract). Laboratory containment devices and containment areas (criteria only applicable to buildings containing these facilities) 4. Specification of fume cupboards and other containment devices has been carried out in compliance with criteria 2 and 3 of issue Hea 03 Indoor air quality - laboratories, as appropriate to the containment device specification. 5. Where ducted fume cupboards are specified: a. Compliance with item A) in Table b. The measurement of volume flow rate should be taken in the exhaust duct (at the boundary of the laboratory) to take account of reductions in (inward) volume flow rate from fume cupboard leakage. c. A reduction in air flow does not compromise the defined performance criteria and therefore does not increase the health and safety risk to future building occupants. 152 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

169 Ene 07 Energy efficient laboratory systems Energy Up to four credits - Best practice energy efficient measures The following criteria are applicable where the laboratory area accounts for at least 10% of the total building floor area (see Relevant definitions). 6. Criteria 1-5 are achieved (or criteria 1-4 where ducted fume cupboards are not specified). 7. Laboratory plant and systems are designed, specified and installed to promote energy efficiency, demonstrated through compliance with items B to L in Table - 26 (see (a) and (b) below for how credits are awarded). a. Up to 2 credits: The laboratory area (see Relevant definitions) accounts for at least 10% (but less than 25%) of the total building floor area; OR b. Up to 4 credits: The laboratory area accounts for 25% or more of the total building floor area. 8. To achieve credits for energy efficient measures, the chosen measure(s) must have a reasonably significant effect on the total energy consumption of the laboratory, i.e. 2% reduction or greater. This must be demonstrated by calculations or modelling. 9. The energy efficient measures specified do not compromise the defined performance criteria, and therefore do not increase the health and safety risk to future building occupants. Checklists and tables Table - 26: Best Practice Energy Efficient Measures in Laboratories Item Category Item Description Credits 1 A Fume cupboard reduced volume flow rates An average design air flow rate in the fume cupboards specified no greater than 0.16m 3 /s per linear metre (internal width) of fume cupboard workspace. 1 Additional Items B Fan power Specification and achievement of best practice fan power figures (as shown below) for all air handling units, laboratory extract systems, local extract ventilation, containment area extracts (where applicable) and fume cupboard extracts (where applicable). 1 Laboratory System Best practice specific fan power (W/L/s) General laboratory supply air handling unit (AHU's) with heating and cooling 1.5 General laboratory extract systems 1.2 Laboratory local extract ventilation ducted 1.0 Containment area extract, without HEPA filtration 1.5 Containment area extract, with HEPA filtration 2.5 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

170 Energy BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Item Category Item Description Credits 1 Fume cupboard extract 1.5 C Fume cupboard volume flow rates (further reduction) An average design air flow rate of < 0.12m 3 /s per linear metre (internal width) of fume cupboard workspace 0.5 D Grouping and/or isolation of high filtration/ventilation activities Minimisation of room air change rates and overall facility ventilation flows by grouping together or isolating activities and equipment with high filtration or ventilation requirements. 0.5 E Energy recovery - heat Heat recovery from exhaust air (where there is no risk of cross-contamination) or via refrigerant or water cooling systems. 0.5 F Energy recovery cooling Cooling recovery via exhaust air heat exchangers (where there is no risk of crosscontamination) or via refrigerant or water cooling systems. 0.5 G Grouping of cooling loads Grouping of cooling loads to enable supply efficiencies and thermal transfer. 0.5 H Free cooling Specification of free cooling coils in chillers or dry air coolers related to laboratory-specific activities. 0.5 I Load responsiveness Effective matching of supply with demand through modularity, variable speed drives and pumps, and other mechanisms. 0.5 J Clean rooms Specification of particle monitoring systems, linked to airflow controls. 0.5 K Diversity Achievement of high levels of diversity in central plant sizing and laboratory duct sizing, where compatible with safety. 0.5 L Room air changes rates Reducing air change rates by matching ventilation airflows to environmental needs and demands of containment devices Only whole credits can be awarded in BREEAM. Therefore to achieve a credit for items C to L (above) the laboratory must comply with at least two of the items. In an instance where, for example, three and half credits are achieved this would need to be rounded down to three credits. 154 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

171 Ene 07 Energy efficient laboratory systems Energy Compliance Notes Ref Terms Description Shell and core CN1 Applicable assessment criteria This issue is not applicable. Simple buildings CN2 Applicable assessment criteria This issue is not applicable. Country specific CN3 Country specific guidance No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. General CN4 Scope of this BREEAM issue This issue is applicable only to Further Education, Higher Education and Other Research and Development facilities that contain laboratory space and containment devices and/or areas. This issue is not applicable for School buildings (primary and secondary level). The laboratory criteria within issue Hea 03 Safe containment in laboratories and guidance within Building Bulletin 88 should be followed for assessing laboratories and containment devices in these building types. Where there are a large number of containment devices (such as fume cupboards) present in a School or Sixth Form assessment, BRE should be contacted for further guidance. Methodology None. Evidence Criteria Interim design stage Final post construction stage All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria. Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

172 Energy BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Additional Information Relevant definitions Laboratory Areas Laboratory areas are defined as highly serviced (temperature/ventilation/humidity/containment controlled) spaces where physical/biological or chemical processing and/or testing is carried out. Such areas will have an inherently high energy demands. In order to maintain controlled conditions to enable experiments and comply with health and safety standards, typically laboratories: 1. Contain various exhaust and containment devices (such as fume cupboards and microbiological safety cabinets) 2. Are heavily serviced to circulate air and to supply heating, cooling, humidity, and clean air 3. Often require 24-hour access and fail-safe redundant backup systems and uninterrupted power supply or emergency power to enable irreplaceable experiments. Therefore, for the purpose of assessing this BREEAM issue, the definition of laboratory areas excludes any laboratory support areas such as: 1. Write up/offices 2. Meeting rooms 3. Storage 4. Ancillary and other support areas with lower servicing requirements. Teaching and other laboratories/workshops with a limited amount of fume cupboards or other containment devices and/or no energy intensive process equipment specified are excluded, unless the design team can provide evidence that their consumption is at least 50% higher than a typical office due to the laboratory process related activities. Benchmarks for general offices can be found in Table 1 in CIBSE TM46 1 Energy Benchmarks.Typically, in buildings where 40% of the floor area is laboratory related, only 10% will actually constitute laboratory areas as per the BREEAM definition. Different types of laboratories have different requirements for HVAC, plug load equipment and access. This can lead to enormous variations in energy and water requirements.the main types of laboratories include: 1. Wet laboratories - where chemicals, drugs or other material or biological matter are tested and analysed requiring water, direct ventilation and specialised piped utilities. Typically includes chemical science laboratories. These laboratories require specially designed facilities. 2. Dry laboratories - contain dry stored materials, electronics, and/or large instruments with few piped services. Typically includes engineering or analytical laboratories that may require accurate temperature and humidity control, dust control, and clean power. 3. Microbiological/clinical laboratories - often involve working with infectious agents. Typically require higher levels of primary containment and multiple secondary barriers including specialized ventilation systems to ensure directional air flow, air treatment systems to decontaminate or remove agents from exhaust air, controlled access zones, airlocks as laboratory entrances, or separate buildings or modules to isolate the laboratory. 4. In vivo laboratories - these require highly controlled environments for the care and maintenance of flora and fauna. The facilities are complex, and expensive to build and to operate. Tight environmental control over the facility is required to avoid the introduction of contaminants or pathogens, and prevent the possibility of infectious outbreaks, and avoid the transmission of odours. 5. Teaching laboratories - unique to academic institutes, they require space for teaching equipment, storage space for student belongings and less instrumentation than research labs. 6. Clean rooms - refers to a controlled environment (air quality, temperature and humidity) which prevent contamination and the regulating of environmental conditions, to facilitate accurate research and production needs. Typically used in UK universities for Nanotechnology, medical and pharmaceutical research/studies and microelectronics applications. Right-Sizing Right-sizing principles encourage the use of better estimates in equipment loads from which services equipment is sized in comparison to traditional methods of estimates based on rated data obtained from manufacturers literature or design assumptions from previous projects. This can result in construction cost savings in addition to life cycle cost benefits, whilst taking account for the need for appropriate contingency. 156 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

173 Ene 07 Energy efficient laboratory systems Energy Other information Synergy with BREEAM issue Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions This BREEAM issue has been developed to recognise improvements made to new laboratory areas/buildings that are not currently fully recognised in the National Calculation Methodology, used to assess and award credits in Ene01 Reduction of CO 2 Emissions. 1 TM46 Energy Benchmarks. CIBSE, Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

174 Energy BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Ene 08 Energy efficient equipment Number of credits available Minimum standards 2 No Aim To recognise and encourage procurement of energy-efficient equipment to ensure optimum performance and energy savings in operation. Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance. Two credits 1. Identify the building's unregulated energy consuming loads and, for each estimate or model, its contribution to the total unregulated energy consumption of the building, assuming a typical/standard specification. 2. Identify the systems and/or processes that have a major impact on the total unregulated energy demand of the development and its operation and demonstrate, through either good practice design or specification, a meaningful reduction in the total unregulated energy demand of the building. Table - 27 contains solutions deemed to satisfy compliance for common examples of significant contributors to unregulated energy demand for a number of different building types/functions. Checklists and tables Table - 27: Examples of solutions deemed to comply with the criteria for the reduction of unregulated energy load from significantly contributing systems. Ref Function/equipment Criteria A Small power, plug in equipment The following equipment has been awarded an Energy Star 1 rating OR has been procured in accordance with the Government Buying Standards 2 1. Office equipment 2. Other small powered equipment 3. Supplementary electric heating. For domestic scale white goods, the criteria in Ref F Residential areas apply. B Swimming pool 1. Where automatic or semi-automatic pool covers, or liquid pool covers with an automatic dosing system, are fitted to ALL pools, including spa pools and Jacuzzis (if relevant). 2. The covers envelop the entire pool surface when fully extended. 3. Where the air temperature in the pool hall can be controlled so that it is 1 C above the water temperature. 158 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

175 Ene 08 Energy efficient equipment Energy Ref Function/equipment Criteria C Communal laundry facilities with commercial sized appliances At least one of the following can be demonstrated for commercial sized appliances: 1. Specification of heat recovery from waste water 2. Use of water sourced from a rain water collection tank(s). D Data centres 1. Design is in accordance with the Best practices for the EU Code of Conduct on Data Centres 3 principles with the data centre achieving at least the Expected minimum practice level (as defined in the Code of Conduct). 2. Temperature set points are not less than 24 C, as measured at the inlet of the equipment in the rack. E IT-intensive operating areas 1. Uses a natural ventilation and cooling strategy as standard, with forced ventilation only to be used when the internal temperature exceeds 20 o C and active cooling only when the internal temperature exceeds 22 o C. 2. There is a mechanism to achieve automatic power-down of equipment when not in use, including overnight. F Residential areas with domestic scale appliances (individual and communal facilities) Domestic scale appliances have the following ratings (or better) under the EU Energy Efficiency Labelling Scheme, where provided: 1. Fridges, fridge freezers: A+ rating 2. Washing machines: A++ rating 3. Dishwashers: A+ rating 4. Washer-dryers and tumble dryers: A rating. OR 5. If any of the appliances will be purchased during occupation by the tenant/owner, information on the EU Energy Efficiency Labelling Scheme of efficient white goods must be provided to the residential areas of the building. Note: 1. Any white goods available to purchase from the developer must be compliant with criteria F1 to F4 above. 2. If criterion F5 were chosen to demonstrate compliance, only one of the two available credits could be awarded. G Healthcare The procurement of large scale equipment (where present, see compliance note CN3) and sets of electrical equipment (where numbering more than 50) has been informed and selected by life cycle costing analysis for at least two options in accordance with HTM07-02, Chapter H Kitchen and catering facilities The project has incorporated all of the energy efficiency measures (except as specified) outlined in each of the following sections of CIBSE Guide TM50 5 : 1. Section 8 (Drainage and kitchen waste removal) 2. Section 9 (Energy controls - specifically controls relevant to appliances) 3. Section 11 (Appliance specification - not fabrication or utensil specifications) 4. Section 12 (Refrigeration) 5. Section 13 (Warewashing: dishwashers and glasswashers) 6. Section 14 (Cooking appliance selection) 7. Section 15 (Water temperatures, taps, faucets and water saving controls). Refrigeration for kitchen and catering facilities should be assessed here, not in Ene 05 Energy efficient cold storage. Energy efficient white goods scheme and equivalent rating scheme (Category reference F) Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

176 Energy BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Ref Function/equipment Criteria Energy rating certifications other than the EU labelling scheme will be accepted, providing the energy efficiency performance is equivalent to the EU labelling scheme. This can be any internationally recognised energy efficiency labelling scheme for white goods or a national scheme developed for use in the country of assessment, for example Energy Label (in EU), Energy Star (in USA), The Appliance Energy Rating Scheme (in Australia), etc. A statement confirming that the scheme is nationally recognised and can be regarded as equivalent to the EU labelling scheme is required for use. Large-scale equipment in healthcare (Category reference G) This includes commercial-scale catering and laundry equipment, and all other equipment with connected electrical loads in excess of 10kW rated input power. All medical equipment can be exempted from complying with the criteria. Compliance notes Ref Terms Description Shell and core CN1 Applicable assessment criteria This issue is not applicable. Simple buildings CN2 Applicable assessment criteria 1. Criteria 1 and 2 apply excluding Ref B Swimming pool from Table - 27 which is not applicable. Country specific CN3 Country specific guidance No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. General CN4 Refrigeration equipment The criteria in Ref A Small power, plug in equipment inchecklists and tables apply to the following refrigeration equipment (where present): 1. Air cooled condensing units 2. Cellar cooling 3. Commercial service cabinets 4. Curtains/blinds for refrigerated display cabinets 5. Refrigeration compressors 6. Refrigeration system controls 7. Refrigerated display cabinets. CN5 A meaningful reduction in unregulated energy demand BREEAM does not specify a level or percentage that defines a meaningful reduction in unregulated energy demand. The project team must justify how they have determined or judged a meaningful reduction from the unregulated energy demand and the assessor must be satisfied that this is an appropriate justification. 160 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

177 Ene 08 Energy efficient equipment Energy Ref Terms Description CN6 Cold storage The criteria do apply to commercial kitchen refrigeration but not to other commercial or industrial sized refrigeration and storage systems. These systems are covered within the scope of Ene 05 Energy efficient cold storagebreeam Ene 05 and should be removed from the list of unregulated loads with respect to this issue. CN7 Lifts, escalators and moving walks This issue does not apply to lifts, escalators and moving walkways. These systems are covered within the scope of Ene 06 Energy efficient transportation systems and should be removed from the list of unregulated loads with respect to this issue. CN8 Laboratory systems This issue does not apply to laboratory ducted fume cupboards. These systems are covered within the scope of Ene 07 Energy efficient laboratory systems and should be removed from the list of unregulated loads with respect to this issue. CN9 Reuse of equipment Reuse of electrical equipment does not comply by default, as it may not be the most energy efficient option. However, the credit could be awarded if either of the following criteria are demonstrated: 1. The existing electrical appliances meet the criteria for inclusion on the Enhanced Capital Allowance Scheme Energy Technology Product List Reusing the old equipment would, over the course of its life, be a more energy-efficient option than specifying new equipment. Building specific CN10 Large-scale equipment in Healthcare See criterion 1 and Ref G This includes commercial-scale catering and laundry equipment and all other equipment with connected electrical loads in excess of 10kW rated input power, including equipment used for medical purposes. Methodology None Evidence Criteria Interim design stage Final post-construction stage All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria. 1 Enhanced Capital Allowance scheme, Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

178 Energy BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Additional information Relevant definitions Data centre For the purpose of this BREEAM issue, the term data centres includes all buildings, facilities and rooms which contain enterprise servers, server communication equipment, cooling equipment and power equipment, and may provide some form of data service (e.g. large scale mission critical facilities all the way down to small server rooms located in office buildings). Government s Buying Standards A website listing minimum and best practice standards for equipment being procured forprojects. IT-intensive areas These include computer areas where more than 1 PC per 5m 2 is provided, e.g. training suites, design studios, libraries IT areas and other areas with a high density of computing devices. Office equipment Computer monitors, desktop computers, scanners, photocopiers, printers, workstations etc. Regulated energy Refer to BREEAM issue Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions. Unregulated energy Building energy consumption resulting from a system or process that is not controlled, i.e. energy consumption from systems in the building on which the Building Regulations do not impose a requirement. This may include energy consumption from operational related equipment, e.g. computers, servers, printers, laptops, mobile fume cupboards, cooking, audio-visual equipment and other appliances etc. Unlike the definition for Ene 01 Reduction of emissions, for this issue, it does not include energy consumption from systems integral to the building and its operation, e.g. commercial/industrial refrigeration systems; lifts, escalators and other transportation systems; and ducted fume cupboards; because they are already assessed separately in issues Ene 05, Ene 06 and Ene 07 respectively. White goods and small power equipment Domestic appliances for example washing machines, fridges,freezers, fridge-freezers, tumble dryers, washer dryers, air-movement fans/heaters, etc. Other information None 1 Energy Star labelling scheme, or 2 Government Buying Standards, 3 EU Code of Conduct on Data Centres: practices_v4_0_5-r1.pdf 4 HTM 07-02: EnCO2 de, Making energy work in Healthcare, Department of Health, CIBSE TM50: Energy Efficiency in Commercial Kitchens, CIBSE 162 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

179 Ene 09 Drying space Energy Ene 09 Drying space Number of credits available Minimum standards 1 No Aim To provide a reduced energy means of drying clothes. Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance for: One credit 1. For self-contained dwellings: An adequate internal or external space with posts and footings, or fixings capable of holding: a. One to two bedrooms: 4m+ of drying line b. Three or more bedrooms: 6m+ of drying line. AND/OR 2. Individual bedrooms: An adequate internal or external space with posts and footings, or fixings capable of holding: a. Two metres or more of drying line per bedroom for developments with up to 30 individual bedrooms; plus b. One metre of additional drying line for each bedroom over the 30 individual bedroom threshold. AND 3. The space (internal or external) is secure. Checklists and tables None. Compliance notes Ref Terms Description Shell and core CN1 Applicable assessment criteria This issue is not applicable. Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

180 Energy BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Ref Terms Description Simple buildings CN2 Applicable assessment criteria This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional guidance on how to apply the criteria. Country specific CN3 Country specific guidance No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. General CN4 Multi-residential developments with CSH assessed dwellings See criterion 1. For buildings with self-contained dwellings also being assessed under the Code for Sustainable Homes (CSH), the following applies: Where CSH issue Ene 4 has been achieved for all dwellings assessed under the CSH, the requirements for self-contained dwellings under this issue are also met. If this is the case, the credit under this issue can be achieved provided any self contained dwellings not assessed under the CSH orr individual bedrooms in the building meet the compliance requirements for this issue. CN5 Adequate internal space See criteria 1 and 2. This is either: A heated space with adequate, controlled ventilation, complying with the national building regulations relevant to the location of the building (rooms that commonly meet these requirements are a bathroom or utility room); or An unheated outbuilding, where calculations by an appropriate Chartered Institute of Building Services Engineer (CIBSE or equivalent professional) demonstrate that ventilation in the space is adequate to allow drying in normal climatic conditions and to prevent condensation/mould growth. The fixing or fitting needs to be a permanent feature of the room. Internal drying spaces in the following rooms do not comply: 1. Living rooms 2. Kitchens 3. Dining rooms 4. Main halls 5. Bedrooms CN6 Building has no residential areas. Please note that where a building contains no residential function this issue is not applicable and will not require assessment. CN7 Supported living facilities This issue does not apply to multi-residential assessments of supported living facilities (for safety reasons, to minimise ligature risk to particular residents). Methodology None 164 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

181 Ene 09 Drying space Energy Evidence Criteria Interim design stage Final post-construction stage All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria. Additional information Relevant definitions Secure space For self-contained dwellings this can be defined as an enclosed space only accessible to the residents of the dwelling. For buildings with a communal drying space it is an enclosed space with a secure entrance, accessible to the residents of the building only. Other information Ventilation - Building regulations The following lists the building regulations relevant for the assessment of this issue specific to the country of the UK. Wales - Approved Document F Ventilation 2010 (England and Wales) Scotland - Technical Handbook Domestic Section 3 Environment Northern Ireland - Technical Booklet K: Ventilation England - Approved Document F Ventilation 2010 (incorporating further amendments in 2013) (England and Wales) Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

182 Transport BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Transport 166 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

183 Tra 01 Public transport accessibility Transport Tra 01 Public transport accessibility Number of credits available Minimum standards Building type dependent No Aim To recognise and encourage development in proximity of good public transport networks, thereby helping to reduce transport-related pollution and congestion. Assessment criteria This issue is split into two parts: Accessibility Index (up to 5 credits - building type dependent) Dedicated bus service (1 credit) The following is required to demonstrate compliance: Up to five credits - Accessibility Index 1. The public transport Accessibility Index (AI) for the assessed building is calculated and BREEAM credits awarded in accordance with the table of building types, AI benchmarks and BREEAM credits seetable - 28 in the checklists and tables section. 2. The Accessibility Index is determined by entering the following information in to the BREEAM Tra 01 calculator: a. The distance (m) from the main building entrance to each compliant public transport node b. The public transport type(s) serving the compliant node e.g. bus or rail c. The average number of services stopping per hour at each compliant node during the operating hours of the building for a typical day (see compliance notes and in the Additional Information section). OR One credit - Dedicated bus service 3. For buildings with a fixed shift pattern, i.e. where building users will predominantly arrive/depart at set times, one credit can be awarded where the building occupier provides, or commits to providing a dedicated bus service to and from the building at the beginning and end of each shift/day. This credit is only available in cases where a development is unable to achieve any of the available credits using the Accessibility Index criteria (i.e. its location has a low public transport Accessibility Index). Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

184 Transport BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Checklists and tables Table - 28: Credits available for each building type relating to the public transport Accessibility Index (AI) score. Accessibility Index Building type BREEAM credits available Offices, Industrial, Multi-residential, Other building type Pre-school, School, Sixth Form Retail, Law Court, Further Education College, Higher Education type 1, Other building type Higher Education type Healthcare - Hospitals (Acute, Specialist, Teaching, Mental health) Healthcare - GP surgery, Health centre, Community hospital Rural location sensitive buildings. Other building type Prison site, MOD site Transport hub Compliance notes Ref Terms Description Shell and core CN1 Applicable assessment criteria Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply Simple buildings CN2 Applicable assessment criteria This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional guidance on how to apply the criteria. 168 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

185 Tra 01 Public transport accessibility Transport Ref Terms Description Country specific Country specific guidance No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. General CN3 Campus developments, see criterion 1 Where 80% or more of the buildings on a campus-style development, e.g. further or higher education sites, are within 1000m of the campus' main entrance, then the campuses main entrance can be used as the reference point for the assessment of distance to compliant public transport nodes for this issue. The campus main entrance is that which is accessed by the majority of the assessed building s staff/students/visitors. A site may have more than one main entrance which between them account for the majority of staff, students and visitors that access the site. In such a case either entrance can be used as the basis for the calculation. Where less than 80% of the buildings on the campus development are within 1000m of the campus main entrance, the assessed building s main entrance must be used as the reference point for the assessment of distance to compliant public transport node for this issue. This rule implies that for large campus developments, when distances are too great to be comfortably covered by walking, the needs of the building users would be served better by locating the public transport nodes inside or on the periphery of the campus. Where the building is not part of a centralised campus then its main entrance must be used as the reference point for the assessment of this issue. CN4 Dedicated bus services, see criterion 3 The credit for the provision of a dedicated bus service is available for any building type with a fixed shift pattern; examples could include schools, offices, retail, factories, prisons etc. The bus must provide transfer to the local population centre, public transport interchange or be a door-to-door service. The credit is provided as an alternative, where the AI of the building is too low to achieve any BREEAM credits, but where the building users will have the option of a dedicated bus service. However, a dedicated bus service can be included in the public transport Accessibility Index calculation as a means of contributing towards achieving credits via this method (regardless of the shift pattern). Where this is the case, the distance from the main building entrance to the drop-off/pick-up point (the transport node) of the service should be used. CN5 Phased developments, see criterion 3 In the case of a large phased development where new transport facilities will be provided, but at a later stage than the building being assessed, the assessment can consider such facilities provided that: A commitment has been made to provide transport facilities within the shortest of the following periods, this is demonstrated either within the General Contract Specification or in the form of a Section 106 Agreement: Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

186 Transport BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Ref Terms Description 1. The transport facilities will be available for use by the time 25% of all phases have been completed and are ready for occupation. OR 2. The transport facilities will be available for use within 25% of the total build time for the phase in which the assessed building forms a part, measured from the completion date of that phase. The most appropriate rule for the development in question must be used, ensuring that the time building users have to wait before having use of the transport facilities is as short as possible. Where the transport facilities will not be available for use within a period of five years from occupation of the building, they cannot be considered for determining compliance with the BREEAM criteria. Methodology The methodology for calculating the Accessibility Index uses Transport for London s Public Transport Accessibility Level (PTAL) method, itself based on a methodology developed in 1992 by the London Borough of Hammersmith and Fulham. For a detailed description of the PTAL methodology and how it works refer to appendix B of Transport Assessment Best Practice; Guidance Document: Calculating the average number of services For the purpose of the calculation, the frequency of public transport is the average number of services per hour. This is calculated by determining the number of stopping services at the node during the peak arrival/departure times for the building or the building's typical day s operating hours (see definition 'operating hours'), divided by the number of hours within that period. For example: the average number of services for an assessment of a building that operates between 08:00-19:00 hrs (11 hours) and is within proximity of a bus stop with 35 stopping services during this period is 3.2 (equivalent to an average service frequency of approximately 20 minutes). Multiple services Services that operate from more than one node within proximity of the building, i.e. two separate bus stops served by the same bus, must be considered only once - at the node in closest proximity to the building. Different services at the same node can be considered as separate. Bi-directional routes Routes will be bi-directional; however for the purpose of calculating the index, consider only the direction with the highest frequency (in accordance with the PTAL methodology). Buildings in Greater London Transport for London hosts a Planning Information Database that allows users to search for a specific London location by street name, co-ordinates or postcode and then calculate the Accessibility Index (AI) for that location. The Total AI is confirmed for the Point of Interest (POI) within the summary seport, which can be downloaded and used as evidence of compliance for the assessed building. Go to: 170 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

187 Tra 01 Public transport accessibility Transport Evidence Criteria Interim design stage Final post-construction stage 1-3 One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria. 1-2 A completed copy of the Tra01 calculator As per interim design stage Additional information Relevant definitions Accessibility Index A measure that provides an indicator of the accessibility and density of the public transport network at a point of interest (in the case of BREEAM, a building). The index is influenced by the proximity and diversity of the public transport network and the level or frequency of service at the accessible node. For example, a building that has a single public transport node 500m from its main building entrance with one service stopping every 15 minutes, i.e. four services per hour on average, will score an AI of approximately Alternatively, the same node with one service every 15 minutes, but 300m from the building entrance will achieve an AI of The same node with two services stopping every 15 minutes will score an AI of The greater the number of compliant nodes, services and their proximity to the building, the higher the AI. Additional building type classifications Tra 03 Cyclist facilities Higher Education type 1: H.E buildings located on a campus where less than 25% of students are resident on the campus or within 1km radius from the campus main entrance. Higher Education type 2: H.E buildings located on a campus where 25% or more of the students are resident on the campus or within 1km radius from the campus main entrance. Other Building - type 1: A building predominantly occupied by staff/employees with occasional business related visitors. Other Building - type 2: A building occupied by a number of core staff/employees with a larger number of consistently frequent visitors/users (either resident or non-resident). Other Building - type 3: As type 2, but building types specifically required to be located rurally as a result of its function, i.e. a building which would never be located within an urban area, e.g. a National Park visitor centre (see definition of rural and rural location sensitive buildings location). Compliant transport node A compliant node includes any bus service with a stop within 650m and any railway station within 1000m of the assessed building s main entrance, measured via a safe pedestrian route (not as the crow flies ). The service stopping at each node must provide transport from, or onward travel to, either an urban centre, major transport node or a community focal point e.g. doctor s surgery, library, school or village centre. Only local services should be assessed and any national public transport services should be excluded from the analysis, unless such a service can be said to provide a local commuter service. Prison and M.O.D sites:the distance requirement for a compliant node for buildings on these sites is 1000m for both bus and rail. Main building entrance The main building entrance is the entrance to the assessed building which is directly connected to the main building reception, circulation routes, lifts/stairs and is available to the majority of the building s staff and visitors on arrival, it is Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

188 Transport BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 not the site entrance (unless the site entrance is also the building entrance e.g. building with a boundary on a public highway). For prison/mod site assessments, the main entrance should be taken as the gatehouse entrance. Operating hours BREEAM seeks to define the building s accessibility to the public transport network for the period during which the majority of building users will travel to and from the building. In most cases the normal operating hours of the building can be used. Where shift patterns see the majority of building users (over 80%) arriving or leaving during a certain period, for example an office building where the majority of office workers arrive between 8-10am, then that period can be used as an alternative to the operating hours of the building. This accounts for some building types that operate a 24 hour day and on a shift work basis. During what typically would be deemed unsociable hours, and therefore periods where there is little if any public transport operating, such periods are not required to be accounted for in the assessment of this issue. Where the assessed building operates on a 24-hour basis or the operating hours are unknown at the time of assessment, then refer to and use the table of default operating hours, which can be found in the additional information section of this issue. BREEAM Tra 01 calculator tool A spreadsheet-based calculator used to determine the Accessibility Index for the assessed building and the number of BREEAM credits achieved. Rural location A rural location is defined in this context as a site clearly not within or on the boundary of a small, medium or large urban cover. An urban cover will have a population of 3000 people or more, located within a tract of continuously built-up urban land extending 20 hectares or more. Therefore, the definition of rural includes village locations, green field sites or small urban centres with a population of less 3000 people within a tract of land no greater than 20 hectares. Such locations will most likely be on a local bus route to larger urban areas or other local towns and may have local shops and other facilities. This classification is based on the Department of Transport National Travel Survey definition, which specifies urban areas based on the extent of urban development indicated on Ordnance Survey maps Rural location sensitive buildings This definition includes any of the building types (listed below) where there is a demonstrable social or economic need from a rural population for the service/demand, which the new building is intended to meet; and therefore locating the building at an alternative site which could have higher public transport accessibility levels, i.e. within an urbanised area, is unfeasible. The following building types are examples of those that may fall into this category. 1. Offices where providing services to the local community 2. Industrial where providing services to the local community 3. Retail where providing services to the local community 4. Pre-school, primary and secondary school 5. GP surgery Typical day The typical day is that which represents the period when travel to and from the building by its users and visitors will be at its highest. For most buildings this should be taken as a mid-week day. In choosing a typical day the assessor should check that timetabled information for that day is, within reason, representative of the public transport provision for the entire operating week (excluding Sundays). Other information Table 1.2-1:Default hours of operation by building type for a typical day Building type Default hours Commercial 8.00am pm 172 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

189 Tra 01 Public transport accessibility Transport Building type Default hours Pre-school, school, sixth form college 7.30am am,3.00pm pm Further & Higher Education 8.00am pm Healthcare 7.00am pm (encompassing visiting hours and the typical daytime shift pattern) Retail: Shopping centre 9.00am pm Retail: Supermarket 8.00am pm Retail: Service provider 8.00am pm Retail: Convenience store 7.00am pm Retail: DIY/retail park 8.00am pm Retail: shop 8.30am pm Multi-residential accommodation 8.00am pm Court 8.00am pm Prison 7am - 8pm (encompassing visiting hours and the typical daytime shift pattern) Other Buildings 8.00am pm Or use any of the above hours, as appropriate to the building type. 24 hour use building 7am - 8pm Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

190 Transport BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Tra 02 Proximity to amenities Number of credits available Minimum standards Building type dependent No Aim To encourage and reward a building location that facilitates easy access to local services and so reduces the environmental, social and economic impacts resulting from multiple or extended building user journeys, including transport related emissions and traffic congestion. Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance: Up to two credits - Proximity to local amenities 1. Where the building is located within close proximity of, and accessible to, local amenities which are likely to be frequently required and used by building occupants, as outlined in Table - 29 Checklists and tables Table - 29: Credits available for Tra02 for different building types Building types Criteria Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 4 Type 5 Type 6 No. of BREEAM credits No. of amenities Proximity (metres) Core amenities (3 out of the following 4 core amenities must be accessible and within proximity of the building) Appropriate food outlet ü ü ü ü ü ü ü Access to cash ü ü ü ü ü ü ü Access to an outdoor open space (public or private, provided suitably sized and accessible to building users) ü ü ü ü ü ü ü 174 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

191 Tra 02 Proximity to amenities Transport Building types Criteria Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 4 Type 5 Type 6 Access to a recreation/leisure facility for fitness/sports ü ü ü ü ü ü ü Additional amenities Publicly available postal facility ü ü ü ü ü ü ü Community space ü ü ü ü ü ü Over-the-counter services associated with a pharmacy ü ü ü ü ü ü ü A public sector GP surgery or general medical centre ü ü ü ü Child care or school ü ü ü ü ü Type 1: Offices, Retail, Industrial, Courts Type 2: Pre-school, Schools, Sixth Form Type 3: Higher Education and Further Education Type 4: Healthcare Type 5: Multi-residential (there are two credits available and each can be awarded independently of the other). Type 6: Other Building types This issue is not applicable to prison buildings/developments. Compliance notes Ref Terms Description Shell and core CN1 Applicable assessment criteria Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Simple buildings CN2 Applicable assessment criteria This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional guidance on how to apply the criteria. Country specific CN3 Country specific No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

192 Transport BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Ref Terms Description guidance building type and function apply. General CN4 Collective amenities One type of amenity may also exist within or as part of other types of amenities, e.g. a grocery store in a petrol station, cash point or pharmacy in a supermarket etc. It is not a requirement of this issue that each amenity is stand alone. CN5 Amenities within assessed building or on site An amenity within the building or on the same site as the proposed development, e.g. where the assessed building is part of a campus, retail or business park/centre, complies with the assessment criteria. CN6 Phased developments The guidance provided in BREEAM issue Tra 01 Public transport accessibility, concerning phased developments, also applies to this issue. Methodology None. Evidence Criteria Interim design stage Final post-construction stage 1 One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria. 1 Evidence showing: 1. Location of assessed building 2. Location and type of amenities 3. The route to the amenities 4. Plan/map scale OR Where the amenities do not currently exist but are due to be developed a letter from the client/developer confirming: a. The location and type of amenities to be provided b. The timescale for development of the amenities. As per interim design stage 176 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

193 Tra 02 Proximity to amenities Transport Additional information Relevant definitions Accessible amenities Amenities (as listed) that are within the required proximity (distance in metres) of the building and accessible via safe pedestrian routes, e.g. pavements/paths and safe crossing points or, where provided, dedicated pedestrian crossing points. The distance should not be measured in a straight line, as the crow flies. Appropriate food outlet A means of accessing a food supply that is affordable to the majority of the buildings users as well as being appropriate for their day-to-day needs. For example, a small office building would benefit from having a small shop selling sandwiches or snacks or a multi-residential building would benefit from having a restaurant in the local area. Community space An internal space that is inclusive to the majority of building users who will occupy the assessed building/development. The space will serve to facilitate community activities applicable to the assessed building type,for example for a multi-residential building a community centre or village hall. Other information None. Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

194 Transport BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Tra 03 Cyclist facilities Number of credits available Minimum standards Building type dependent No Aim To encourage building users to cycle, so promoting exercise and helping reduce congestion and emissions, by ensuring adequate provision of cyclist facilities, Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance for: One credit - Cycle storage (excluding sheltered housing, care homes, supported living facilities and prison building types) 1. Compliant cycle storage spaces that meet the minimum levels set out in Table - 30 (see checklists and tables) are installed. One credit - Cyclist facilities (excluding sheltered housing, care homes and supported living facilities, Student residents, key accommodation, transport hub and MOD residential and prison building types) 2. Criterion 1 has been achieved. 3. At least two of the following types of compliant cyclist facilities have been provided (see compliance notes for the scope of compliant cyclist facilities): a. Showers b. Changing facilities c. Lockers d. Drying spaces One credit - Cycle storage and cyclist facilities (sheltered housing, care homes and supported living facilities and prison building types only) 4. Where criteria 1 to 3 have been met for cycle space and cycle facilities requirements. Checklists and tables Table - 30: Cycle space criteria for each building type Building type No. spaces per unit of measure Unit of measure Notes Commercial Offices, Industrial 1 10 staff 178 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

195 Tra 03 Cyclist facilities Transport Retail Large Retail 1 10 staff The number of staff should be the maximum number using the building at any time/shift. The staff spaces must be provided in addition to customer spaces. Whilst they do not need to be separate from customer spaces, this is encouraged. This is subject to providing a minimum of 10 cycle customer spaces. Any retail development that provides at least 50 customer cycle storage spaces will comply regardless of the number of parking spaces public car parking spaces Small retail 10 Total The spaces must be publicly accessible within proximity of a main building entrance. Compliant cyclist facilities are intended for staff only i.e. it is not a requirement of compliance to provide facilities for customers. Education Pre-school or creche 1 10 staff Primary School 5 Per form or class in year group For example: where a primary school has been designed to accommodate three classes per year, a total of 15 compliant cycle storage spaces are provided for the whole school. Where there are varying numbers of forms/classes per year, the calculation must be based on the year with the greatest number of classes/forms Secondary schools and sixth form, Further and Higher Education (FE and HE) 1 10 staff & pupils/students total FE/HE: student numbers must account for both under and post graduates, as well as PhD students and Post- Doctorates. Healthcare All healthcare building types 1 10 staff Unit of measure: use the measure which is the largest for the building type e.g. if hospital then use beds, if GP surgery then use consulting rooms. The requirement for 1 2 consulting rooms OR 10 beds consulting rooms/beds is subject to a minimum of four compliant cycle storage spaces being provided. Courts and Prisons Prison establishment located building 1 10 staff Only one credit available with the provision of two cyclist facilities. Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

196 Transport BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Law Court 1 10 building occupants (staff and visitors) Multi-residential Student residences, key worker accommodation 1 10 staff The requirement is subject to a minimum of one compliant space being provided. 1 2 residents Sheltered housing, Care homes, Supported living facility 1 1 Compliant wheelchair or electric buggy storage spaces 10 staff 10 residents* * Or spaces specified in accordance with the number required as identified by the likely resident profile. Where the resident profile is not the elderly or physically disabled or impaired then, where appropriate, the requirement for wheelchair or electric buggy spaces should be changed to compliant cycle spaces Other buildings Transport type 1* Use the criteria defined for office buildings. Transport type 2* 1 10 staff 1 10 visitors or beds Transport type 3* 1 20 staff A single credit can be awarded where spaces for staff only are provided as well as the appropriate compliant cyclist facilities. The Compliance note allowing a reduction building visitors/ beds to the cyclist provision in rural locations has been accounted for in the unit of measure for this transport type. It should not therefore be applied again. Transport hubs 1 10 public users Apply the sliding scale (as per compliance note) to a maximum of 5000 daily public users. Public users refer to regular peak time users of the service who start and/or finish their public transport journey at the assessed building. MOD nonresidential 1 10 living-out personnel These criteria apply to MOD buildings where the majority of personnel live off-site. MOD residential 1 2 residents 180 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

197 Tra 03 Cyclist facilities Transport Note : Where the number of building users (based upon the unit of measure) exceeds 200 the sliding scale of compliance can be used to identify the appropriate number of cycle spaces required (see Methodology section). * See definitions in the BREEAM issuetra 01 Public transport accessibilityfor classification of transport type 1, 2 and 3. Compliance notes Ref Terms Description Shell and core CN1 Applicable assessment criteria Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Where the credits are being sought the compliant number of cycle storage spaces must be provided as part of the base build. Compliant cyclist facilities (showers, changing areas etc.) can be provided in shell and core areas of the building as part of the base build.alternatively, compliance can be demonstrated where the shell and core building is designed to facilitate future installation of the compliant number and type of cyclist facilities by the tenant/owner-occupier through the provision of an appropriately sized and dedicated space in the base building, including either the installation of the appropriate services (for showers) or infrastructure to allow the future installation of the relevant services e.g. capped water supply, service /ventilation ducts, drainage etc. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options. Simple buildings CN2 Applicable assessment criteria This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional guidance on how to apply the criteria. CN3 Use of local compliant cycle storage For all buildings which form part of a larger site / development, use of existing local BREEAM compliant cycle storage space is acceptable. CN4 Compliant cyclist facilities and noncompliant local storage spaces Where the assessed building has compliant cyclist facilities, plus access to some local cycle storage spaces that are not BREEAM compliant, one credit can still be awarded. CN5 Compliant cycle spaces but no cyclist facilities Where the assessed building meets the minimum number of compliant cycle spaces required for two credits, but does not have or meet the minimum provision for compliant cyclist facilities, then one credit can be awarded. Country specific CN6 Country specific guidance No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

198 Transport BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Ref Terms Description General CN7 Existing/new site wide facilities For assessments of new infill buildings on an existing site where there exist shared compliant facilities, or where the new building will form a part of a larger development (e.g. campus, retail or business park), the required number of facilities can be determined on a development-wide basis. The number of compliant facilities must be large enough to cater for the building occupants of the assessed building, in addition to the occupants of any existing or other new buildings that will share those facilities. CN8 Building locations with a high level of public transport accessibility For sites where at least 50% of the available BREEAM credits for Public transport accessibility (Tra 01) have been awarded (rounded to the nearest whole credit), the number of compliant cycle spaces required in Table - 30 can be reduced by 50%. This reduction will also reduce the requirement for compliant shower/lockers by the same margin for most building types by default, since the calculation is based on the number of cycle storage spaces. Building types where the number of required showers/lockers is not based on cycle storage provision can reduce the actual requirement for compliant showers/lockers by 50%. CN9 Rural locations For sites in rural locations the following can be applied; 1. Where the distance to the nearest urban location is greater than 10 miles, the number of compliant cycle spaces can be reduced by 50%. 2. Where the distance to the nearest urban location is greater than 20 miles, the number of compliant cycle spaces can be reduced by 70%. 3. Where the distance to the nearest urban location is greater than 30 miles, the number of compliant cycle spaces can be reduced by 90%. This reduction will also reduce the requirement for compliant shower/lockers by the same margin for most building types by default, since the calculation is based on the number of cycle storage spaces. Building types where the number of required showers/lockers is not based on cycle storage provision can reduce the actual requirement for compliant showers/lockers by 50%, 70% or 90% as appropriate. A percentage reduction in this context cannot be applied in addition to the 50% reduction due to the building's Public Transport Accessibility level (as described in the Compliance note above). The definition of a rural location (and urban location) can be found in the BREEAM issue Tra 01 Public transport accessibility Additional information. CN10 Number of building occupants unknown If it is not possible to confirm the number of building occupants commuting to the development, e.g. speculative developments, then the default occupancy rates given in the table in Tra 04 Maximum car parking capacity Tra 04 Maximum car parking capacity can be used to determine a default number of users. Alternatively, the number of building occupants in an existing development of similar type and size can be used (the assessor needs to justify/validate the number used in their certification report). Building type specific CN11 Education (schools only) Compliant showers In the case of a pre-school or primary school shower provision is for staff only and set at a rate of one shower for every 10 cycle storage spaces provided (subject to a minimum of one shower being provided). For example, where a primary school has 182 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

199 Tra 03 Cyclist facilities Transport Ref Terms Description - additional requirements, see criterion 3 been designed to accommodate three classes per year, a total of 15 compliant spaces are required to meet the BREEAM criteria for cycle storage, and therefore two showers for staff use would be required for compliance with the cycle facilities criterion. In secondary schools (and sixth forms) where there are less than 100 pupils, a minimum of two showers must be provided for pupils with one male and one female shower (where applicable). A minimum of one shower for staff should be provided in all cases. CN12 Sheltered housing or care homes and supported living facilities Compliant wheelchair and buggy storage facilities are those that meet the following: 1. Charging points for electric buggies (at least two) provided within the storage space 2. The storage area must be secure yet easily accessible. 3. Lighting of the storage facility must be compliant with the external (or internal where relevant) lighting criteria defined in BREEAM issue Hea 01 Visual comfort. The lighting must be controlled to avoid operation during daylight hours, where there is sufficient daylight in or around the facility. 4. Where access to and from the building main entrance needs to be tightly controlled for the safety/security of residents, and it can be demonstrated that compliance with points 2 and 3 above impact on this (e.g. where residents include those with mental health problems), these two items can be excluded from the compliance requirements. CN13 Residential buildings with transient visitors such as hotels, hostels and training centre The unit of measure for visitors or beds does not apply in residential buildings with transient visitors, e.g. hotels, hostels, training centres where the visitor typically resides for less than one month. For a secure accommodation unit compliance should be based on visitors (not beds). In this case, cyclist facilities for staff must be accessible to all building users to ensure that visitors and patients/community that will travel to and use or work within the building are provided for. Methodology Sliding scale of compliance To recognise the increased confidence in availability that occurs where there is larger scale provision of facilities, it is acceptable to reduce the provision requirement for building users by increasing the standard unit of measure (defined in Table - 30) and potentially the provision of cyclist facilities on a sliding scale as follows: 1. For buildings with more than 200 users but less than 300 the unit of measure can be increased by a ratio of For buildings with more than 300 users but less than 400 the unit of measure can be increased by a ratio of For buildings with more than 400 users, the unit of measure can be increased by a ratio of 2.5. For example, an office building with 800 users would be required to provide the following number of cycle storage spaces: space per 10 users = 20 spaces space per 15 users (standard unit of measure x 1.5) = 7 spaces space per 20 users (standard unit of measure x 2) = 5 spaces space per 25 users (standard unit of measure x 2.5) = 16 spaces Total compliant cycle storage spaces required = 48 spaces Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

200 Transport BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 The sliding scale of compliance does not apply to the following building types: small and large retail, primary schools, multiresidential buildings and MOD residential buildings. Minimum cycle storage provision Where the calculated number of required cycle storage spaces is less than four, total provision should be based on the lower of the following: a. A minimum of four compliant storage spaces must be provided OR b. One space per user (staff and where appropriate other user groups). Evidence Criteria Interim design stage Final post-construction stage All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria Additional information Relevant definitions Compliant cycle storage spaces Compliant cycle storage spaces are defined as those that meet the following: 1. Cycles can be secured within spaces in rack(s).they are covered overhead and the cycle racks are set in or fixed to a permanent structure (building or hard-standing). Alternatively the cycle storage may be located in a locked structure fixed to or part of a permanent structure with appropriate surveillance. 2. The distance between each cycle rack, and cycle racks and other obstructions, e.g. a wall, allows for appropriate access to the cycle storage space, to enable bikes to be easily stored and accessed. 3. The storage facility or entrance to the facility is in a prominent site location that is viewable/overlooked from either an occupied building or a main access to a building. 4. The cycle storage facility has adequate lighting, this could be demonstrated with the lighting criteria defined in BREEAM issue Hea 01 Visual comfort. The lighting must be controlled to avoid out-of-hours use and operation during daylight hours, where there is sufficient daylight in or around the facility. Compliant showers Compliant showers are defined as those that meet the following: 1. Provision of one shower for every 10 cycle storage spaces (unless stated, see below), subject to a minimum provision of one shower. 2. Any development providing eight showers or more will comply regardless the number of cycle storage spaces provided. 3. Both male and female users must be catered for i.e. either separate showers within shared gender-specific facilities (required provision split 50-50) or single shower cubicles and changing space for mixed use. 4. The showers do not need to be dedicated to cyclists and can be those shared with other users/uses. Compliant changing facilities Compliant changing facilities are defined as those that meet the following: 1. Appropriately sized for the likely/required number of users. The assessor should use their judgement to determine whether the changing area is appropriately sized given the number of cycle storage spaces or showers provided. 2. Changing areas must include adequate space and facilities to hang or store clothing and equipment whilst changing or showering, e.g. bench seat and/or hooks. Toilet/shower cubicles cannot be counted as changing facilities. 184 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

201 Tra 03 Cyclist facilities Transport Compliant lockers Compliant lockers are defined as those that meet the following: 1. The number of lockers is at least equal to the number of cycle spaces required. 2. Lockers are either in or adjacent to compliant changing rooms. 3. The lockers are sized appropriately for the storage of a cyclist's equipment. Compliant drying spaces A compliant drying space is defined as a space that is specifically designed and designated with adequate heating/ventilation for the drying of wet clothes. A plant room for example is not a compliant drying space. Small retail type Includes smaller retail units/shops that may form part of a wider retail/business district, city or town centre or mixeduse development and typically do not have the scope to provide their own dedicated cyclist facilities. Large retail type Includes large retail developments, such as shopping centres, retail parks and supermarkets, which typically will have covered or uncovered parking or external areas and therefore scope to provide their own dedicated cycle facilities. Other information None. Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

202 Transport BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Tra 04 Maximum car parking capacity Number of credits available Minimum standards Building type dependent No Aim To encourage the use of alternative means of transport other than the private car to and from the building, thereby helping to reduce transport related emissions and traffic congestion associated with the building s operation. Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance: Up to two credits - Car parking capacity 1. The building s car parking capacity is compared to the maximum car parking capacity benchmarks intable - 31 and the relevant number of BREEAM credits awarded. For most building types, except those where stated, the benchmarks vary according to the buildings public transport Accessibility Index (determined in accordance with BREEAM issue Tra 01 Public transport accessibility). Therefore, for these building types the AI must be determined prior to assessing this issue. This is required to ensure that the building s car parking capacity is relative to the development's accessibility to the public transport network. Checklists and tables Table - 31: Credits available in Tra04 Maximum car parking capacity for different building types Building type Criteria Building s Accessibility Index No. of credits < < 8 8 Max. parking capacity 1 space per x building users, where x is: Office, industrial, student residences and key worker accommodation Sheltered housing, care homes and supported living facility Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

203 Tra 04 Maximum car parking capacity Transport Building type Criteria Building s Accessibility Index No. of credits < < 8 8 Further and Higher Education Other Building Transport type 1 and Other Building MOD (where building users are living-out personnel ) For the building types listed below, the maximum number of parking spaces provided must not be greater than the total of the following: Healthcare - Hospitals (acute, specialist, teaching, mental health) One parking space for every four staff, plus; One parking space for every four beds, plus Two parking spaces for each consulting, examination, treatment, therapy room and A&E cubicle. 1 Healthcare - GP surgery, health centre, community hospital One parking space for every two medical staff, plus; One parking space for every three nonmedical staff, plus; Two parking spaces for each consulting, examination, treatment, therapy room and A&E cubicle. 1 Pre-school, schools, sixth form, Retail, Prison, Court, Other Building Transport type 3, Other Building Transport hubs Issue not assessed for these building types Compliance notes Ref Terms Description Shell and core CN1 Applicable assessment criteria Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

204 Transport BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Ref Terms Description Simple buildings CN2 Applicable assessment criteria This issue is not applicable to simple buildings assessments.. Country specific CN3 Country specific guidance No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. General CN4 General No general guidance applicable under this issue. Methodology None. Evidence Criteria Interim design stage Final post-construction stage All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria. All Where relevant, a completed copy Tra 01 calculator confirming the building's Accessibility Index As per interim design stage. Additional information Relevant definitions Accessibility Index Refer to Tra 01 Public transport accessibility Building Users Where the term building users is referenced in this BREEAM issue it refers to the following, where relevant to the building type: 1. Staff (who will work within the building). 2. Students (who will access the building for work or study during a typical academic term-time /semester day). 3. Residents (who will reside permanently or for a short period of time in the building). If known, or can be reasonably estimated, project specific occupancy figures should be used. If this is not possible, for example where the building is a speculative development, use the default occupancy rates given in Table - 32 in the Other information section (below) to determine the number of users. Where the number of building users is variable, 188 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

205 Tra 04 Maximum car parking capacity Transport provision of parking spaces should be based on the maximum number of building users likely to be using the building at any time during a typical day. Care homes For the purpose of BREEAM, care homes are defined as those buildings which are legally required to register with the Commission for Social Care Inspection by the Care Standards Act, Sheltered housing Sheltered housing falls within Class C3 of the Town and Country Planning (use Classes) Order 1987, and can be defined as self-contained accommodation, usually with an emergency alarm system, communal facilities and a resident warden. This includes all sheltered housing defined as 'Category 1, 2, 2.5 and 3' in accordance with the 1969 Ministry of Housing and Local Government circular 82/69 and Local Authority Guidelines. MOD Living-out personnel This refers to staff that work in the assessed building and are not residents on the MOD site where the assessed building is located. Other building types See the BREEAM issuetra 01 Public transport accessibility for a definition of other building types 1, 2 and 3. Other information Table - 32: Table - 32Default occupancy rates by building type Building type and function area Occupant density Building type and function area Occupant density Business Secure Residential Institution Office area (including reception areas) Cell Food preparation area (staffed) Reception Small workshop/category lab space Hall/lecture theatre/assembly area Industrial Eating/drinking area Food preparation area Workshop - small scale Industrial process area Laundry Laboratory Classroom Reception Office and consulting areas Warehouse storage Food preparation area Generic Office Area Libraries, Museums, Galleries Hospitals, care homes Reception Reception Food preparation area Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

206 Transport BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Building type and function area Occupant density Building type and function area Occupant density Post Mortem Facility Hall/lecture theatre/assembly area Food preparation area Laboratory Physiotherapy Studio Workshop - small scale Bedroom Unit Display and Public areas Laundry Generic Office Area hours consulting/treatment areas General Assembly and Leisure, Clubs, Theatres Assembly areas/halls Dry sports hall Hydrotherapy pool hall Fitness Studio Industrial process area Fitness suite/gym Laboratory Food preparation area Operating theatre Hall/lecture theatre/assembly area Classroom Auditoria Diagnostic Imaging Ice rink Generic Ward Performance area (stage) Office and consulting areas Public circulation areas Primary Healthcare Reception Reception 0.11 Sales area - general Office and consulting areas Swimming pool Further and Higher Education Workshop - small scale Residents Bedroom Generic Office Area Classroom Display area Food preparation area Community/day centres 190 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

207 Tra 04 Maximum car parking capacity Transport Building type and function area Occupant density Building type and function area Occupant density Hall/lecture theatre/assembly area Reception Computer lab Dry sports hall Laboratory Food preparation area Laundry Workshop - small scale Reception Hall/lecture theatre/assembly area Workshop - small scale Office and consulting areas Office and consulting areas Other spaces/buildings Hotels Data Centre Bedroom Server Room Food preparation area Heavy Plant Room Reception Generic Office Area Notes for Table - 32 of default occupancy rates: 1. The net floor area for each function must be multiplied by the equivalent occupant density to determine an overall occupancy for the function area. 2. Not all potential building areas are listed, only those required to reflect estimated building occupancy for the building type. For example, an office building may have a canteen but it will be the staff that predominantly uses the canteen. The office staff numbers will be estimated using the default occupancy rate for the office area; therefore to include the canteen would result in double counting of occupancy. 3. If a building type is not listed, occupancy rates for a similar building type or function area may be used. 4. The above occupancy rates have been sourced from the activity database of the Simplified Building Energy Model (SBEM). Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

208 Transport BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Tra 05 Travel plan Number of credits available Minimum standards 1 No Aim To recognise the consideration given to accommodating a range of travel options for building users, thereby encouraging the reduction of reliance on forms of travel that have the highest environmental impact. Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance for: One credit - Travel plan 1. A travel plan has been developed as part of the feasibility and design stages. 2. A site specific travel assessment/statement has been undertaken to ensure the travel plan is structured to meet the needs of the particular site and covers the following (as a minimum): a. Where relevant, existing travel patterns and opinions of existing building or site users towards cycling and walking so that constraints and opportunities can be identified. b. Travel patterns and transport impact of future building users. c. Current local environment for walkers and cyclists (accounting for visitors who may be accompanied by young children) d. Disabled access (accounting for varying levels of disability and visual impairment) e. Public transport links serving the site f. Current facilities for cyclists 3. The travel plan includes a package of measures to encourage the use of sustainable modes of transport and movement of people and goods during the buildings operation and use. 4. If the occupier is known, they must be involved in the development of the travel plan and they must confirm that the travel plan will be implemented post construction and supported by the buildings management in operation. Checklists and tables None. Compliance notes Ref Terms Description Shell and core 192 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

209 Tra 05 Travel plan Transport Ref Terms Description CN1 Applicable assessment criteria Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. A travel plan is still required even if the end user/occupier is not known, albeit that it may only be an interim travel plan or one that broadly addresses all the issues covered in the assessment criteria. The developer must confirm that they will hand over a copy of the travel plan to the building s future tenant(s)/owner-occupier, so that it may inform their own travel plan/strategy. Simple buildings CN2 Applicable assessment criteria This issue is not applicable to simple buildings assessments.. Country specific CN3 Country specific guidance No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. General CN4 Existing travel plan,see criterion 3 The credit can be awarded if the assessed building is part of a site that has an existing up-to-date organisational travel plan that is compliant with BREEAM, is applicable to all building users (in existing and assessed new buildings) and accounts for the additional travel resulting from users of the new building. CN5 Travel assessment or Statement see criterion 2 A travel assessment (also referred to as transport assessment) will be required where a proposed development is likely to have significant transport and related environmental impacts. The study area for a transport assessment related to a proposed development should be determined in discussion between the developer and appropriate authorities. A transport statement is required where the proposed development is not likely to have a significant transport impact. A transport statement is suitable to demonstrate compliance with BREEAM when the proposed development is expected to generate relatively low numbers of trips or traffic flows, with minor transport impacts. For further guidance refer to: Methodology None. Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

210 Transport BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Evidence Criteria Interim design stage Final post-construction stage All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria. Additional information Relevant definitions Travel plan A travel plan is a strategy for managing all travel and transport within an organisation, principally to increase choice and reduce reliance on the car by seeking to improve access to a site or development by sustainable modes of transport. A travel plan contains both physical and behavioural measures to increase travel choices and reduce reliance on single-occupancy car travel. Building users Where the term building users is referenced, this refers to the following, as appropriate to building type: 1. Staff (commuter journeys and business travel) 2. Pupils/students 3. Visitors 4. Patients 5. Customers 6. Community users 7. Personnel who make deliveries/collections to and from the development 8. Contractors/service providers, who regularly work at and access the building/development 9. Residents of multi-residential buildings Other information None. 194 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

211 Water Water Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

212 Water BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Wat 01 Water consumption Number of credits available Minimum standards 5 Yes Aim To reduce the consumption of potable water for sanitary use in new buildings from all sources through the use of water efficient components and water recycling systems. Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance for: Up to five credits 1. An assessment of the efficiency of the building s domestic water consuming components is undertaken using the BREEAM Wat 01 calculator. 2. The water consumption (litres/person/day) for the assessed building is compared against a baseline performance and BREEAM credits awarded based upon Table The efficiency of the following domestic scale water consuming components must be included in the assessment (where specified): a. WCs b. Urinals c. Taps (wash hand basins and where specified kitchen taps and waste disposal unit) d. Showers e. Baths f. Dishwashers (domestic and commercial sized) g. Washing machine (domestic and commercial or industrial sized) The BREEAM Wat 01 calculator defines the building types and activity areas for which the above components must be assessed. 4. Where a greywater and/or rainwater system is specified, its yield (l/person/day) is used to off-set non potable water demand from components that would otherwise be supplied using potable water. 5. Any greywater systems must be specified and installed in compliance with BS :2010 Greywater Systems - Part 1 Code of Practice 1. Any rainwater systems must be specified and installed in compliance with BS 8515:2009 Rainwater Harvesting Systems - Code of practice Healthcare and prison buildings: refer to the relevant Compliance note for additional criteria regarding the specification of particular water consuming component controls. 196 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

213 Wat 01 Water consumption Water Checklists and tables Table - 33: BREEAM Credits available for percentage improvement over baseline building water consumption. % improvement No. of BREEAM credits 12.5% 1 25% 2 40% 3 50% 4 55% 5 65% Exemplary performance Note: for some building types an alternative approach to compliance must be used to award credits (for further information please refer to the Methodology section, below, and the BREEAM Wat 01 calculator) Compliance notes Ref Terms Description Shell and core CN1 Applicable assessment criteria All criteria Option 1 - Shell only: This issue is not applicable to this shell and core assessment option. Option 2 - Shell and Core only: compliance for this issue must be assessed on the basis of all water consuming components and greywater and/or rainwater systems specified and installed by the developer. Components or systems listed in the criteria that are not being specified by the developer, but may be specified by the tenant, do not need to be assessed for a shell and core project. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options. Simple buildings CN2 Applicable assessment criteria This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional guidance on how to apply the criteria. Country specific Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

214 Water BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Ref Terms Description CN3 Country specific guidance No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. General CN5 No fittings present Where a project under assessment contains none of the specified components, the performance specification for components provided in facilities in an adjacent and accessible building must be used in the calculation, i.e. those facilities most likely to be used by the occupants and visitors of the assessed building. This rule also applies where a project under assessment consists solely of an extension to an existing building, i.e. where the extended building contains no new sanitary facilities because there are facilities present within the existing building. Building specific CN6 Healthcare Components in healthcare facilities See criterion 6. In addition to meeting the criteria defined above, the flushing control for each WC or urinal in a healthcare facility must be suitable for operation by patients with frail or infirm hands or activated by electronic sensors. Components in clinical areas maybe omitted from the calculation. For the purpose of this compliance note clinical areas refers to all areas where a scrub-up trough, clinical sink or clinical basin is installed. This is not an exhaustive list and guidance should always be sought from the appropriate professional, such as a Health Authorities Infection control officer or a client infection control representative or equivalent, to ascertain areas of exemption specific to infection control and other considerations. Although exempt, HTM07-04 contains guidance on water savings from medical related activities. Furthermore, in some cases, the use of water-efficient fittings and appliances may not be appropriate to the needs of the patient, and inappropriate specification may adversely affect the incidence and propagation of infections. In such instances, the assessor will need to confirm with BRE Global the exemption of components from the relevant building areas. The design team should also consult NHS guidelines concerning appropriate selection of sanitary fittings and fixtures and the control of legionella. CN7 Prisons Components in prison cells on HM Prison developments See criterion 6. In addition to meeting the criteria defined above, the following requirements apply: Where sanitary components are specified within a prison cell, a volume controller must be specified on the individual fittings or water supply to each cell. A volume controller is an automatic control device to turn off the water supply once the maximum pre-set volume is reached within a defined period. Methodology A non domestic building s water-efficient performance is determined using the BREEAM Wat 01 calculator in one of two ways, using either the standard approach (common building types) or alternative (other building type) approach. Each approach is summarised below. 198 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

215 Wat 01 Water consumption Water Standard Wat01 method The standard BREEAM method determines water efficiency (measured in l/person/day and m 3 /person/yr) for a building based on the buildings actual component specification and default usage patterns for the building type and its activity areas. This modelled output is compared with the same output for a baseline component specification and the percentage improvement used to determine the number of BREEAM credits achieved. The baseline component specification is equivalent to the water efficiency of industry standard components (seetable - 34), steered by the minimum levels required by the Water Supply (Water Fittings) Regulations. The BREEAM percentage improvement benchmarks have then been determined based on progressively more efficient standards for water consuming components and, for the higher levels of performance, the specification of greywater and rainwater systems. The standard approach is the default method for calculating water efficiency of a BREEAM assessed building and is that used for most of the common building types, where usage data are available. For buildings types where usage data are not available, and therefore the standard approach of determining performance cannot be used, an alternative approach to compliance must be used (described below). Refer to the BREEAM Wat 01 calculator for the current list of building types which can be assessed using the standard approach. Alternative Wat01 method Where it is not possible to use the standard approach to determine the building's water consumption total (litres/person/day) the assessment can be completed on an elemental basis, as follows: 1. Using the list of applicable domestic scale water consuming components (see criterion 3), determine those that are specified/present in the assessed building. 2. Compare the actual specification for each component type with the table of water efficient consumption levels by component type (Table - 34) to determine the level of performance for each type. Note that the volumes quoted are maximums for that level and the % WC or urinal flushing demand is a minimum for that level. 3. Define each component s level of performance in the 'Other building type calculator' worksheet of the BREEAM Wat 01 calculator. a. For the alternative approach, the calculator applies a building type specific weighting to each component level to reflect its in-use consumption relative to the other components present. A component with high in-use water consumption therefore has a larger weighting than one with lower in-use consumption and contributes relatively more to the building s overall level of performance under this BREEAM issue. b. The weightings are derived from data on actual water consumption per day from non domestic buildings, sourced from BNWAT22 3. They can be found in the BREEAM Wat 01 calculator. 4. Based upon the performance categorisation of each component type and the component weighting, the calculator will determine an overall,aggregate level of performance and award the relevant number of BREEAM credits as follows: Greywater/rainwater level achieved Overall Component level Baseline 0 credits 1 credit 2 credits Level 1 1 credit 2 credits 3 credits Level 2 2 credits 3 credits 4 credits Level 3 or 4 3 credits 4 credits 5 credits Level 5 4 credits 5 credits 5 credits Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

216 Water BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Note: 1. An innovation credit for exemplary level performance can be awarded where the component specification achieves level 5 and > 95% of WC or urinal flushing demand is met using recycled non potable water. 2. Due to the use of the weightings, the overall component level achieved will not necessarily be a whole number, e.g component level 4. Where this is the case the methodology will always round down to the nearest component level and therefore BREEAM credit(s) level, e.g. if the component specification achieved is 3.6 credits, the actual number of credits awarded is 3 credits (the methodology will not round up to 4 credits because the performance specification for 4 credits has not been achieved). 3. Where the assessed building development has multiple specifications for the same water consuming component type, the number of fittings and component level achieved for each specification can be entered in the 'Other building type calculator'. Using this information, the calculator will determine the building s aggregated performance level for that component type. Please note: whilst attempts have been made to align the benchmarking of both methodologies described above, they do determine performance in different ways. The number of BREEAM credits awarded by each method could therefore differ for the same water component specification. This could lead to variation in the credits achieved when applying BREEAM New Construction to a number of different building types that form a part of the same overall development. Component Type Table - 34 outlines the standards, by component type, used to define the performance levels set in BREEAM. These defined levels of efficiency have been steered by a range of published sources of information (see references 4 ) and therefore reflect robust levels of typical, good, best and exemplary practice. Table - 34: Water efficient consumption levels by component type Component Performance Levels (quoted numbers are minimum performance required to achieve the level) Base Unit WC Effective flush volume (litres) Wash hand basin taps litres/min Showers litres/min Baths litres Urinal (2 or more urinals) litres/bowl/hour Urinal (1 urinal only) litres/bowl/hour Greywater/ rainwater system Kitchen tap: kitchenette 0% 0% 0% 25% 50% 75% % of WC/urinal flushing demand met using recycled non potable water litres/min Kitchen taps: restaurant (pre-rinse nozzles only) litres/min Domestic sized litres/cycle 200 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

217 Wat 01 Water consumption Water Component Performance Levels (quoted numbers are minimum performance required to achieve the level) Base Unit dishwashers Domestic sized washing machines litres/use Waste disposal unit litres/min Commercial sized dishwashers litres/rack Commercial/ Industrial sized washing machines litres/kg Please note that specifying components for a building in accordance with the above levels will result, in most cases, in the corresponding number of BREEAM credits being achieved. However, please bear in mind that the component specifications above are akin to thresholds between each level. Therefore caution should be taken when defining a component specification for a BREEAM assessed building using exactly the same levels as the threshold levels. It is recommended that, where Wat 01 BREEAM credits are being targeted, the performance of a particular building s component specification is verified using the BREEAM Wat 01 calculator before committing to a particular specification and ordering/installing components. This will provide greater assurance that the component specification achieves the targeted number of BREEAM credits. Water consuming components - data requirements Table - 35: defines for each component type the appropriate data that will need to be collected from manufacturers product information to complete the assessment. Domestic component Data requirements WCs Actual maximum or, where dual flush, effective flush volume in litres/use. Urinals Flush volume in litres/use for single use flush urinals. For cistern fed systems, the flushing frequency/hour and cistern capacity in litres Taps Flow rate of each tap, at full flow rate in litres per minute measured at a dynamic pressure: For high pressure (Type 1) taps - 3 ± 0.2 bar (0.3 ± 0.02 MPa) OR For low pressure (Type 2) taps ± 0.02 bar (0.01 ± MPa) (BS EN 200:2008, sanitary tapware, single taps and combination taps for supply systems of type 1 and 2. General technical specifications) This includes any reductions achieved with flow restrictions. Showers Flow rate of each shower at the outlet using cold water (T 30 C), in litres per minute measured at a dynamic pressure 3 ± 0.2 bar (0.3 ± 0.02 MPa) for high pressure (Type 1) supply systems OR 0.1 ± 0.05 bar (0.01 ± MPa) for low pressure (Type 2) supply systems (BS EN 1112:2008, Sanitary tapware. Shower outlets for sanitary tapware for water supply systems type 1 and 2. General technical specifications). Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

218 Water BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Kitchen taps Maximum flow rate litres/minute. Baths Capacity to overflow in litres. Taps on baths should not be included in the calculation, as the water consumption from bath taps is taken account of in the use factor for baths. The calculation of water consumption for baths will assume 40% of the capacity to the overflow. This is to reflect that: a) Users tend not to fill the bath to overflow; and b) The displacement affect the user has on the actual volume of water required for a bath. Dishwasher Litres/cycle for domestic applications and/or appliances or litres/rack for commercial applications and/or appliances. Washing machine Litres/use for domestic applications (for a typical wash cycle) and/or appliances or litres/kg for commercial applications and/or appliances, e.g. in hotels. Waste disposal unit Flow rate in litres/minute. Unspecified water consuming components As the methodology and BREEAM credits for water efficiency compare the buildings modelled water consumption performance against the performance of a baseline specification for the same component types, where a component type is not specified it is not accounted for in the methodology, i.e. the component is excluded from both the proposed and baseline building. Therefore no benefit is gained in terms of BREEAM performance, by deciding not to specify a particular component. However, the methodology will reflect the reduction in overall water consumption (litres/person/day) for the building, as a result of not specifying a particular component. Buildings with a greywater and rainwater system(s) The following information is required where a greywater and/or rainwater system is specified: Rainwater: In accordance with BS 8515 intermediate approach : 1. Collection area (m 2 ) 2. Yield co-efficient (%) 3. Hydraulic filter efficiency (%) 4. Rainfall (average mm/year) Rainwater: In accordance with BS 8515 detailed approach : 1. Daily rainfall collection (litres) Greywater: in accordance with BS 8525 : 1. Manufacturer or system designer details. 2. The percentage volume of waste water collected (and re-used) from the following (where relevant); wash hand basins, showers, kitchen basins, dish-washers, baths, washing machines and sources of waste water from non-domestic components. Where greywater and/or rainwater systems are specified there is a minimum level of component efficiency that must be achieved to award 4 or 5 BREEAM credits and the exemplary level credit. This is to avoid awarding a higher number of BREEAM credits where performance from less efficient fittings is off-set by the specification of a greywater and/or rainwater collection system. 202 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

219 Wat 01 Water consumption Water The intention being to ensure demand reduction is prioritised before off-setting consumption. Where a greywater/rainwater system is specified/installed, the component specification must achieve a percentage reduction in water consumption (over the baseline specification) equivalent to that required for 2 credits, i.e. a 25% improvement. Where this level is achieved, all of the total water demand met by greywater/rainwater sources can contribute to the overall percentage improvement required to achieve BREEAM credits. If it is not achieved, the percentage of greywater/rainwater allowable will be equivalent to the percentage improvement in water consumption achieved for the component specification, i.e. percentage improvement on baseline performance. For example, if only a 20% improvement is achieved, and therefore the building is not meeting the 25% requirement, then only 20% of the water demand met via greywater/rainwater sources can be used to off-set water consumption from the micro components. This minimum requirement does not apply where only 1, 2 or 3 credits are sought or where no greywater/rainwater system is specified, i.e. percentage improvement is based solely on the water efficiency of the microcomponent specification. BRE Global may allow some exemptions to this rule in instances where a particular fitting type requires a high flow rate due to specialised end-user requirements, and its specification prevents compliance with 25% improvement. Buildings with a mixture of different functional areas For the majority of buildings using the standard Wat 01 method, the BREEAM Wat 01 calculator defines the building type and range of different water consuming activity areas within that building; for example, a retail development with sales area and goods storage or an office that includes a canteen and gym. However, where carrying out a single assessment of a building/development which consists of a diverse mix of activity areas/building types, all of which can be assessed separately within the calculator, the following applies: Determine the building s total water consumption performance by carrying out separate assessments for each relevant activity area/building type. On completion of each assessment, the assessor will need to determine the percentage improvement as follows: I=100 1 Where: (T 1Act T 1Occ)+...+(T nact T nocc) (T 1Base T 1Occ)+...+(T nbase T nocc) I = Overall improvement (%) Tn Act = the modelled net water consumption (L/person/day) for each building type Tn Base = the modelled baseline water consumption for the corresponding building type Tn Occ = the total default occupancy rate for the corresponding building type. Where greywater/rainwater systems are specified, the assessor should take care to avoid unintended double counting of the yield from such systems and using it to off-set demand for each activity area/building type. Fixed water use The BREEAM water efficiency calculation includes an allowance for fixed water use. This includes water consumption for vessel filling (for building users drinking water), cleaning in kitchens and food preparation in buildings with a catering facility. Fixed uses are included to provide greater accuracy in reporting of the building s overall estimated water consumption. As these uses are fixed for both actual and baseline building models, their totals do not influence the achievement of BREEAM credits. Other permissible component demand for non-potable water The focus of this BREEAM issue is the performance of the building's permanent domestic scale water consuming components. Where a grey water or rainwater system is specified, the yield from the system should be prioritised for such uses, i.e. WC orurinal flushing. However, where the building demonstrates that it has other consistent (i.e. daily) and equivalent levels of non-potable water demand, and such demands are intrinsic to the building s operation, then it is permissible for the demand from these non-domestic uses to be counted, i.e. the demand for rainwater/greywater yield from such Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

220 Water BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 systems/components can be used as well as, or instead of non-potable water demand from the building's WC/Urinal components. Examples of consistent and intrinsic demands could include laundry use in hotels/multi-residential developments or horticultural uses in garden centres, botanical gardens and golf courses. Demand for general landscaping and ornamental planting irrigation are not considered as equivalent/intrinsic by BREEAM. Other permissible source of non-potable water The methodology allows for the collection and recycling of non-potable water from the relevant components listed in the criteria i.e. taps, showers, baths and dish-washers or washing machines. In addition, where non-potable water is collected from a non domestic component or source that is intrinsic to the building, then the amount collected can be accounted for in the methodology. This could include for example wastewater from active hygiene flushing, i.e. a regular hygiene flushing programme to minimize poor water quality in a potable cold or hot water system. In order for the method to account for this total, the design team will need to confirm to the assessor the yield from the component/system (in litres) and the frequency of that yield (in days), i.e. if once a week then frequency would be seven days. Evidence Criteria Interim design stage Final post-construction stage 1-6 One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria. 1 A completed copy of the BREEAM Wat 01calculator As per interim design stage Additional information Relevant definitions BREEAM Wat 01 calculator for New Non-Domestic Buildings The BREEAM Wat 01 calculator is a method for the assessment of water efficiency in most common types of new non-domestic buildings. The calculator assesses the contribution that each internal domestic scale water consuming component (as listed in the criteria) has on whole building water consumption).the calculator and accompanying guidance on its application is available separately from this Scheme Document. Please note; the calculator is a compliance tool and not a design tool for water demand and drainage systems. The tool uses default usage and occupancy rates to provide a benchmark of the typical consumption given the specified fittings (in litres/person/day and m 3 /person/year) and their impact on the buildings overall water efficiency. Due to the impacts and differences of actual user behaviour and occupancy rates the results of the method will not reflect directly the actual water use during building operation. The results from the methodology should, therefore, not be used for the purpose of comparison with or prediction of actual water consumption from a non-domestic building. Domestic scale components Domestic scale components include water consumed (potable and non-potable) by internal building components including kitchen taps, wash hand basin taps, baths, showers and dishwashers, WCs, urinals, washing machines and waste disposal units. Effective flush volume Effective flush volume is the volume of water needed to clear the toilet pan and transport any contents far enough to avoid blocking the drain. The effective flush volume of a single flush WC is the volume of water used for one flush. The effective flush volume of a dual flush WC is the ratio of full flush to reduced flush. This is taken to be one full flush for every three reduced flushes for non-domestic buildings and one full flush for every two reduced flushes in 204 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

221 Wat 01 Water consumption Water domestic (residential) buildings/areas. The effective flush volume can therefore be calculated as follows, using a 6/4 litre dual flush volume WC as an example: Non-domestic: {(6 litre x 1) + (4 litre x 3)}/4 = 4.5 litre effective flushing volume (for a 6/4 dual flush WC) Domestic: {(6 litre x 1) + (4 litre x 2)}/3 = 4.67 litre effective flushing volume (for a 6/4 dual flush WC) The differing ratio between non-domestic and domestic buildings reflects the different patterns of user behaviour between these building types. Greywater recycling The appropriate collection, treatment and storage of domestic wastewater (which is defined as that discharged from kitchens, baths or showers, laundry rooms and similar) to meet a non-potable water demand in the building e.g. WC flushing, or other permissible non potable use on the site of the assessed building. Potable water Water suitable for human consumption that meets the requirements of Section 67 (Standards of Wholesomeness) of the Water Industry Act is referred to as wholesome water. Non potable water Any water other than potable water, also referred to as unwholesome water (BS 8525, see references). Rainwater recycling The appropriate collection and storage of rainwater run-off from hard outdoor surfaces to meet a non-potable water demand in the building e.g. WC flushing, or other permissible non potable use on the site of the assessed building. Clinical areas Refer to BREEAM issue Hea 01 Visual comfort. Other Information None 1 BS :2010, Greywater systems Part 1 code of practice, BSi, BS 8515:2009, Rainwater harvesting systems Code of practice, BSi, BNWAT22: Domestic water consumption in domestic and non-domestic properties (version 1.1). Market Transformation Programme, AECB Water Standards: Delivering buildings with excellent water and energy performance, vol 2 The water standards, technical background report (version 1), Grant, Thorton, AECB, BNWAT22: Domestic water consumption in domestic and non-domestic properties (version 1.1). Market Transformation Programme, BNWAT07: Baths - water efficiency performance tests (version 2.0). Market Transformation Programme, BNWAT23: Reliability of information on water consumption of appliances (version 1), Market Transformation Programme, BS6465-3:2006, Sanitary installations Part 3: Code of practice for the selection, installation and maintenance of sanitary and associated appliances. BSi, 2006.CIRIA W10, Key Performance Indicators for water use in hotel, Rachel Waggett and Catherine Arotsky, CIRIA, CIRIA W11, Key Performance Indicators for water use in offices, Waggett, Arotsky, CIRIA, Conserving water in buildings, a practical guide. Environment Agency, Enhanced Capital Allowance Water Technology List criteria: Report by Entec UK Ltd for CLG: Research to Assess the Costs and Benefits of Improvements to the Water Efficiency of New Non-household Buildings, Final Report, Oct SD129: Certification and Listing of Low Flush WC appliances. BRE Global, 2008 SD174: Certification and Listing of Water Efficient Terminal Fittings. BRE Global, SD175: Certification and Listing of Water Efficient Baths. BRE Global, The Building Regulations 2000, Part G: Sanitation, hot water safety and water efficiency (2010 edition). HM Government. Waterwise: Water Efficiency Calculator for New Dwellings. Communities and Local Government, Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

222 Water BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Water efficient product labelling scheme: Water Supply (water fittings) Regulations 1999, DEFRA. Sustainable Products 2006: Policy Analysis and Projections, Market Transformation Programme, Water UK - Macerators, the impact on sewers: Water Efficient Buildings, water and planning, guidance for planners 5 Great Britain, The Water Industry Act London: The Stationery Office 206 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

223 Wat 02 Water monitoring Water Wat 02 Water monitoring Number of credits available Minimum standards 1 Yes (criterion 1 only) Aim To ensure water consumption can be monitored and managed, and therefore encourage reductions. Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance: One credit 1. The specification of a water meter on the mains water supply to each building; this includes instances where water is supplied via a borehole or other private source. 2. Water-consuming plant or building areas, consuming 10% or more of the building s total water demand, are either fitted with easily accessible sub meters or have water monitoring equipment integral to the plant or area (see Compliance notes). 3. Each meter (main and sub) has a pulsed output to enable connection to a Building Management System (BMS) for the monitoring of water consumption. 4. If the site on which the building is located has an existing BMS, managed by the same occupier/owner (as the new building), the pulsed water meter(s) for the new building must be connected to the existing BMS. Checklists and tables None. Compliance Notes Ref Terms Description Shell and core CN1 Applicable assessment criteria Criteria 1, 3 and 4 Both options: All Assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Criterion 2 Option 1 - Shell only: This criterion is not applicable to this shell and core assessment option. Option 2 - Shell and Core Only: Compliance with criterion 2 must be demonstrated Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

224 Water BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Ref Terms Description for water consuming plant/building areas identifiable by the developer (also see definitions). Water consuming plant/building areas to be added/installed by the tenant do not need to be assessed for this issue. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options. Simple buildings CN2 Applicable assessment criteria All Assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Country specific CN3 Country specific No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. General CN4 Water consuming plant or building area, see Criterion 2 As a minimum this includes the following (where present): 1. Buildings with a swimming pool and its associated changing facilities (toilets, showers etc.). 2. On sites with multiple units or buildings, e.g. shopping centres, industrial units, retail parks etc. separate sub meters are fitted on the water supply to the following areas (where present): Each individual unit supplied with water Common areas (covering the supply to toilet blocks) Service areas (covering the supply to outlets within storage, delivery, waste disposal areas etc.) Ancillary/separate buildings to the main development with water supply. 3. Laboratory: in any building with a laboratory or containing laboratories, a separate water meter is fitted on the water supply to any process or cooling loop for plumbed-in laboratory process equipment. 4. Healthcare: for sites with multiple departments, e.g. large health centres or acute hospitals, separate sub meters are fitted on the supply to the following areas where present: Staff and public areas Clinical areas and wards Letting areas: on the water supply to each tenant unit Laundries Main production kitchen Hydrotherapy pools Laboratories CSSD/HSDU, pathology, pharmacy, mortuary and any other major process water use Supplementary supply of water from a cold water tank CN5 10% of water demand, see criterion 2. The sub-meter requirement does not necessarily apply in the following cases, where the assessor confirms there will be no additional monitoring benefit resulting from their installation: 208 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

225 Wat 02 Water monitoring Water Ref Terms Description 1. Where a building has only one or two small sources of water demand (e.g. an office with sanitary fittings and a small kitchen) 2. Where the building has two sources of water demand, one significantly larger than the other, and the water consumption for the larger demand is likely to mask the smaller demand. CN6 Extensions to existing buildings, see criterion 4. If no new water supply is being installed because the occupants of the extended building will use the facilities in, and therefore water supply to the existing building, then the following must be provided in the existing building; 1. A water meter for the mains water supply 2. Sub-meters for large water consuming plant or facilities, e.g. evaporative cooling, swimming pool etc. (where present). The meters provided must have a pulsed output or connection to existing BMS in accordance with the assessment criteria. CN7 No water supply to the building or unit If there is no installed water supply to the assessed building because there will be no water-consuming fittings in the building, then in such instances the guidance given in the above Compliance note for extensions to existing building applies. Methodology None. Evidence Criteria Interim design stage Final post-construction stage All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in the BREEAM Evidential Requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria Additional Information Relevant definitions Staff areas Refer to BREEAM Issue Hea 01 Visual comfort. Clinical areas Refer to Hea 01 Visual comfort. Patient areas Refer to BREEAM Issue Hea 01 Visual comfort. CSSD Central Sterile Supply Department. Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

226 Water BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 HSDU Hospital Sterilisation and Disinfection Unit. Other information None. 210 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

227 Wat 03 Water leak detection Water Wat 03 Water leak detection Number of credits available Minimum standards 2 No Aim To reduce the impact of water leaks that may otherwise go undetected. Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance for: One credit - Leak detection system 1. A leak detection system which is capable of detecting a major water leak on the mains water supply within the building and between the building and the utilities water meter is installed. The leak detection system must be: a. A permanent automated water leak detection system that alerts the building occupants to the leak OR an in-built automated diagnostic procedure for detecting leaks is installed. b. Activated when the flow of water passing through the water meter/data logger is at a flow rate above a pre-set maximum for a pre-set period of time. c. Able to identify different flow and therefore leakage rates, e.g. continuous, high and/or low level, over set time periods. d. Programmable to suit the owner/occupiers water consumption criteria. e. Where applicable, designed to avoid false alarms caused by normal operation of large water-consuming plant such as chillers. One credit - Flow control devices 2. Flow control devices that regulate the supply of water to each WC area/facility according to demand are installed (and therefore minimise water leaks and wastage from sanitary fittings). Checklists and tables None. Compliance notes Ref Terms Description Shell and core CN1 Applicable assessment Leak detection system, criterion 1 Both options : All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

228 Water BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Ref Terms Description criteria apply. Flow control devices, criterion 2 Option 1 -Shell only: This criterion is not applicable to this shell and core assessment option. Option 2 - Shell and core only: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. The WC areas or facilities must be assessed as per criterion 2 regardless of whether or not the WC areas or facilities are fitted out. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options. Simple buildings CN2 Applicable assessment criteria Leak detection systems (1 credit) 1. Criterion 1 is applicable. OR 2. Install automatic excess flow valves at relevant locations to protect property from damage caused by leaking pipes or tanks. Flow control devices (1 credit) 3. Criterion 2 is applicable. CN3 Automatic excess flow valve, See point 2 CN2. An automatic excess flow valve acts as a flow switch ( fuse ) to automatically stop the flow of water and prevent uncontrolled release when the flow of water exceeds a predetermined rate (such as may occur in the event of failure of water supply pipes and tanks). Country specific CN4 Country specific No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. General CN5 Leakage ratess S See criterion 1. This issue does not specify what the high and low level leakage rates should be however the leak detection equipment installed must have the flexibility to distinguish between different flow rates to enable it to be programmed to suit the building type and owner/occupier s usage patterns. CN6 System criteria See criterion 1. It is anticipated that the leak detection credit will usually be achieved by installing a system which detects higher than normal flow rates at meters and/or sub-meters. It does not necessarily require a system that directly detects water leakage along part or the whole length of the water supply system. CN7 Water utilities meters See criterion 2. Where there is a water utilities meter at the site/building boundary, it may be necessary to install a separate flow meter (or alternative measurement system) just after the utility meter to detect leaks; however, if the water utility company agrees to some form of leak detection being installed on their meter, this would also be acceptable. 212 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

229 Wat 03 Water leak detection Water Ref Terms Description CN8 Flow control device See criterion 2. The following could be considered as types of flow control devices: A time controller, i.e. an automatic time switch device to switch off the water supply after a predetermined interval A programmed time controller, i.e. an automatic time switch device to switch water on and/or off at predetermined times. A volume controller, i.e. an automatic control device to turn off the water supply once the maximum pre-set volume is reached. A presence detector and controller, i.e. an automatic device detecting occupancy or movement in an area to switch water on and turn it off when the presence is removed. A central control unit, i.e. a dedicated computer-based control unit for an overall managed water control system, utilising some or all of the types of control elements listed above. CN9 Flow control systemssee criterion 2. Flow control systems may control combined WC areas, such as male and female toilets within a core; they are not required for each individual sanitary appliance. The criteria are set to encourage the isolation of the water supply to each WC block when it is not being used. CN10 Single WCs See criterion 2. The flow control criteria for this issue do apply to facilities which have only a single WC (potentially within smaller or low occupancy buildings). In these instances shutoff could be provided via the same switch that controls the lighting (whether proximity detection or a manual switch). CN11 No water supply to the building or/ unit See criteria 1 and 2. These credits are still assessed where there are no installed fittings and therefore no water supply to the building. In these instances the facilities likely to be used by the future occupants of the assessed building must meet the criteria, e.g. those facilities within the nearest accessible building. CN12 Extensions to existing buildings, see criteria 1 and 2 If the water supply to the new extension is via the existing building then the water supply to the existing building must be assessed against the criteria of this issue. Building type specific CN13 Clinical areas in healthcare buildings The criteria for this issue do not apply to toilet facilities in clinical areas. Methodology None. Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

230 Water BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Evidence Criteria Interim design stage Final post-construction stage All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in the BREEAM Evidential Requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria Additional information Relevant definitions Clinical areas Hea 01 Visual comfort. Other information None. 214 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

231 Wat 04 Water efficient equipment Water Wat 04 Water efficient equipment Number of credits available Minimum standards 1 No Aim To reduce unregulated water consumption by encouraging specification of water efficient equipment. Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance for: One credit 1. Identify the building's unregulated water demands and for each, estimate or model its contribution to the total nondomestic water consumption of the building. 2. Identify the system(s) or processes that have a major impact on the total unregulated water demand of the development and its operation, and demonstrate through either good practice design or specification a meaningful reduction in the total water demand of the building. Checklists and tables None. Compliance notes Ref Terms Description Shell and core CN1 Applicable assessment criteria Criteria 1 and 2 Both options: Where the only unregulated water demand comes from an irrigation system (because this is being specified/installed by the developer), then it must be used for the purpose of assessing compliance. Where no irrigation systems are specified, and therefore it is not possible to estimate or model any unregulated water demands for the building, this issue is not applicable to these shell and core assessment options. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options. Simple buildings Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

232 Water BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Ref Terms Description CN2 Applicable assessment criteria This issue is not applicable. Country specific CN3 Country specific No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. General CN4 Major impact on water demand For a typical office building this would constitute around 10% of total water demand. For different building types and developments what is deemed as 'significant' will vary. CN5 Reducing unregulated water consumption BREEAM does not prescriptively define all potential means or solutions for reducing unregulated water consumption. The design team needs to demonstrate to the assessor that they have identified key areas of water consumption in the building and that a reduction in unregulated water consumption has been achieved using existing 'tried and tested' solutions or new innovative solutions relevant to the building and its functional requirements. The following are some examples of solutions 'deemed to satisfy compliance' for a number of different building types or functions (where the unregulated water demand for that function is one of/the significant contributor in the building): 1. Drip fed subsurface irrigation incorporating soil moisture sensors. The irrigation control should be zoned to permit variable irrigation to different planting assemblages. 2. Reclaimed/recovered water from a rainwater collection or waste water recovery system, with appropriate storage, i.e. greywater collection from building functions or processes that use potable water, e.g. vehicle wash, sanitary facilities, irrigation etc. This should take into account the Government Buying Standards 1 where appropriate to the building type. 3. External landscaping and planting that relies solely on precipitation, during all seasons of the year. 4. All planting specified is restricted to contextually appropriate species that thrive without irrigation and will continue to do so in those conditions likely as a result of climate change, i.e. typically warmer and drier conditions. Methodology None. Evidence Criteria Interim design stage Final post-construction stage All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria. 216 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

233 Wat 04 Water efficient equipment Water Additional information Relevant definitions Unregulated water For the purposes of this BREEAM Issue, unregulated water is water not used for domestic purposes and is therefore not regulated by building regulations or other relevant legislation. This includes, but is not limited to, equipment used for irrigation and, for the relevant building types, vehicle wash plant/equipment. Other information None. 1 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

234 Materials BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Materials 218 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

235 Mat 01 Life cycle impacts Materials Mat 01 Life cycle impacts Number of credits available Minimum standards Building type dependent No Aim To recognise and encourage the use of construction materials with a low environmental impact (including embodied carbon) over the full life cycle of the building. Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance: Up to six credits 1. BREEAM awards credits on the basis of the building s quantified environmental life cycle impact through assessment of the main building elements, as set out in Table - 36 below: Table - 36: Elements assessed by building type Building type Element Type Assessed External walls Windows Roof Upper floor slab Internal walls Floor finishes/coverings Office ü ü ü ü ü Retail ü ü ü ü ü Industrial ü ü Education ü ü ü ü ü ü Healthcare ü ü ü ü ü ü Prisons ü - ü ü - ü Courts ü ü ü ü ü ü Multi-residential ü ü ü ü ü ü Other buildings ü ü ü ü ü ü 2. Credits are awarded on the basis of the total number of points achieved, as set out intable - 37 below, and calculated using the BREEAM Mat 01 calculator. This point s score is based on the Green Guide rating(s) achieved for the specifications that make-up the main building elements (as above). Note: Where an independently verified third-party Environmental Product Declaration (EPD), covering part of or the Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

236 Materials BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 whole life cycle, is available for a material or product that forms part of an assessed building element, this can be used to increase the contribution of that element to the building s Mat 01 performance (refer to Calculation procedure where a specific Environmental Product Declaration is available for a material under the Methodology section for more detail). Table - 37: Allocation of credits by building type and Mat 01 points Building type Total Mat 01 points achieved 1 and Available BREEAM credits Office Retail Industrial Education Healthcare Prisons Courts Multiresidential Other buildings Please refer tomethodology section (below) for a description of the methodology used to determine the number of points and BREEAM credits achieved. 2. Where the total points achieved exceeds the level required for maximum credits see the exemplary level criteria as the building may be eligible for an additional innovation credit. 3. Life cycle Green House Gas emissions (kgco 2 eq.) for each element are also required to be reported based on a 60-year building life. Where specific data is not available for a product or element, generic data should be used. Generic data can be obtained from the online Green Guide for each element and must be entered in to the BREEAM Mat 01 calculator. Exemplary level criteria The following outlines the two exemplary level routes available to achieve up to three innovation credits for this BREEAM issue. Route 1: Using the Green Guide to Specification (elemental approach) - one credit 4. Where assessing four or more applicable building elements, the building achieves at least two points in addition to the total points required to achieve maximum credits under the standard BREEAM criteria (as outlined in the table above) OR 5. Where assessing fewer than four applicable building elements, the building achieves at least one point in addition to the total points required to achieve maximum credits under the standard BREEAM criteria. Where the assessed building does not specify an element listed above, see the Compliance note regarding the exemplary level benchmark. 220 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

237 Mat 01 Life cycle impacts Materials Route 2: Using compliant life cycle assessment software tools (whole building approach) - two credits 6. Where the design team has used an IMPACT compliant software tool (or equivalent) to measure the environmental impact of the building. 7. Where the design team can demonstrate how the use of an IMPACT compliant software (or equivalent) has benefited the building in terms of measuring and reducing its environmental impact. See CN16 8. Where the design team submit the Building Information Model (BIM) from the IMPACT compliant software tool (or equivalent) for the assessed building to BRE Global (via the project s appointed BREEAM assessor).see CN17. Further information about IMPACT is provided in the Other information section of this BREEAM issue. Please note a project can achieve all three innovation credits where it is complying with exemplary level criteria 4 to 8, i.e. one route is not necessarily exclusive of the other, a project can comply with both routes 1 and 2 or choose to comply with only route 1 or only route 2 Checklists and tables None Compliance notes Ref Terms Description Shell and core CN1 Applicable assessment criteria Both options : All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Where floor finishes and internal walls are applicable to the building type being assessed, the following applies to both the options: In addition to the main building elements, all building areas where floor finishes and/or internal walls are being specified/installed by the developer (Including those in common areas, show areas and other fitted out areas) must be accounted for in the assessment of this issue. Office buildings: If the developer has specified floor finishes in a show area only (for compliance with BREEAM issue Wst 04 Speculative floor and ceiling finishes), the area (m 2 ) and Green Guide rating of the floor finishes in the show area must be accounted for in the assessment of Mat 01. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options. Simple buildings CN2 -Applicable assessment criteria This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional guidance on how to apply the criteria. Country specific CN3 Country specific guidance No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

238 Materials BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Ref Terms Description General CN4 Element not specified See criteria 1, 2, 4 and 5. Where the building does not contain an element listed above, for example there are no upper floors in a single storey building, the BREEAM Mat 01 calculator allows the BREEAM assessor to exclude the element from the assessment. In such instances the BREEAM Mat 01 calculator will re-calculate the standard and exemplary level benchmarks on the basis of the remaining applicable elements. CN5 Element consisting of more than one specification See criterion 2. Where more than one specification is present for a given element, the Green Guide rating and area for each specification should be entered into the BREEAM Mat 01 calculator. The calculator will then determine the total points score on the basis of each specifications rating and area as a proportion of the whole element. CN6 Finding exact Green Guide Ratings. See criterion 2. While exact matches in specifications are not always found, it should be possible to identify a similar specification and use its rating for the purposes of assessment (also see note below No Green Guide rating match ). CN7 No Green Guide rating match. See criterion 2. Where a generic Green Guide rating cannot be found for a specification the BREEAM assessor can use the online Green Guide calculator to determine a bespoke Green Guide rating for the specification (for any elements except floor finishes). Licensed BREEAM assessors can access the calculator via If a required component is not present via the online Green Guide calculator, the BREEAM assessor will need to submit a Bespoke Green Guide Query proforma. BRE Global will respond to the query with a solution and /or guidance to enable completion of a specification. Refer to Green Guide Calculator Online Tool guidance for more information. CN8 Environmental Profile Certification of products See criterion 2. Products with certified Environmental Profiles can be used to demonstrate compliance with this BREEAM issue. Products are certified with a product specific Green Guide rating as part of a relevant elemental specification, e.g. a manufacturer s concrete block as part of an external wall specification. This rating can be used in the same way as a generic Green Guide rating for this BREEAM issue (see the Additional informationsection for a screenshot example of a product listing from GreenBook Live). Where a certified product forms part of a different specification, for the same or different element type (i.e. different to that described on the Environmental Profile certificate), the guidance within the 'Methodology' section concerning Environmental Product Declaration types should be followed. This procedure outlines how BREEAM gives additional recognition for materials with robust Environmental Product Declaration types. Refer to BRE Environmental Profile Methodology under Additional information section for more information on where to source an Environmental Profile Certificate. CN9 Reporting life cycle GHG emissions See criterion 3. Where the data is available, it is a requirement that the life cycle GHG emissions (kgco 2 eq.) for each specification are gathered and reported, via the BREEAM scoring and reporting tool. BREEAM assessors can source this information as follows: For generic Green Guide ratings the. is reported via the online green guide Simply click on the relevant specification type (having 222 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

239 Mat 01 Life cycle impacts Materials Ref Terms Description already defined the building, category and element type) and the. are reported along with the individual category ratings for that element, at the bottom of the page (see screen shot in the Additional information section). The information is not available at present for bespoke Green Guide ratings. For Green Guide ratings based on a product manufacturer s certified Environmental Profile, Assessors will find the. in the product s Environmental Profile Certificate appendix, in the Characterised data section (against the Climate Change issue). CN10 New elements containing re-used materials See criterion 2. If a new element is specified e.g. external wall, and part of that element includes a reused material e.g. reclaimed bricks, the BREEAM assessor will need to submit a Bespoke Green Guide Query proforma. BRE Global will then calculate the rating and confirm the result to the assessor. CN11 Existing elements reused in the new construction Only new elements need to be assessed. Existing in situ elements adjoining a new construction, e.g. an existing building facade, do not require assessment. If this BREEAM scheme is being used to assess a major refurbishment project, where the assessed building is re-using existing in situ elements as part of its structure, those elements can be allocated an A+ Green Guide rating. If the existing element will contain substantial new materials the BREEAM assessor will need to submit a Bespoke Green Guide Query proforma. BRE Global will then calculate the rating and confirm the result to the assessor. CN12 Partial assessments See criterion 1. Where the assessment covers only some of the floors in the building, the roof must still be assessed as it is protecting the assessed building below. If the roof is directly above domestic accommodation (e.g. flats), the equivalent domestic Green Guide rating for the roof must be used as opposed to the ratings for non-domestic roofs. Roof areas not protecting parts of the assessed building or space can be omitted from the assessment. CN13 Specialist floor finishes in operational areas See criterion 1. Specialist floor finishes (See definition) in operational areas of buildings fall outside of the scope of the Green Guide.In such instances, only non specialist floor finishes and those in non-operational areas of the building should be included in the assessment of this BREEAM issue. See also guidance in Additional information section, on floor finishes. CN14 Roof lights, patio doors and glazed conservatories See criterion 1. For the purpose of this issue any doors with a large expanse of glazing, such as patio doors, should be assessed as windows. Similarly, glazed areas of conservatories and roof lights should be assessed as windows. CN15 Where integral insulated cold storage units form a part of the building fabric For insulated cold storage units forming an integral part of the building fabric the following must be followed 1. Where the cold storage unit forms part of, or is integral to the external wall element: As an external wall type the insulated units will be assessed in the Green Guide on the basis that it is a normal temperature building without the extra insulation, so a standard thickness of insulation will be considered. As such, the walls of the insulated unit should be treated as part of the external wall element for the assessment of this BREEAM issue. Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

240 Materials BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Ref Terms Description 2. Where the cold storage unit forms part of, or is integral to a ceiling element: As a roof element of the insulated unit, suspended ceilings are not included within the Green Guide. Therefore, the roof of the insulated unit will be assessed as a standard construction from the deck upwards, assuming a standard thickness of insulation. As such, the roof of the insulated unit should be treated as part of the ceiling element for the assessment of this BREEAM issue. 3. Where the cold storage unit forms part of an internal wall element: The insulated unit will be treated as meeting a very specific Functional Unit outside the scope of the internal wall elements listed in the Green Guide. The wall to the insulated unit should therefore be excluded from the assessment of the internal wall element. CN16 Demonstrating benefit See Criterion 7. This should take the form of a short qualitative statement from the design team providing comments on the following: 1. How and at what stages of the design the tool was utilised. 2. How the tool helped (or did not help) steer the design process to optimise cost and mitigate environmental impacts, giving examples of specific changes to the building design/specification that resulted. CN17 Scope of IMPACT Compliant (or equivalent) Tools and Data Submission Requirements See Criterion 8. Guidance note GN08 : Scope of IMPACT Compliant (or equivalent) Tools and Data Submission Requirements available via the Assessor Extranet outlines in detail the requirements for submitting the BIM from IMPACT compliant (or equivalent) software tools. The Guidance Note also contains instructions on how tools other than IMPACT compliant software tools can demonstrate equivalency for the purpose of this assessment issue. Assessors should review Guidance Note GN08 and ensure that submissions meet the criteria relevant to demonstrate compliance. Building type specific CN18 Building specific guidance All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Methodology Determining the number of BREEAM credits achieved as a result of each element s Green Guide rating The Green Guide uses an A+ to E rating system, whereby the rating relates to the relative life cycle performance of a specification in comparison with other types of specifications available for a particular building element type e.g. external wall. Three steps are undertaken to translate the performance of all the separate individual elemental specifications and their Green Guide ratings into an overall building performance score for life cycle impact, against which BREEAM credits can be awarded. Each of these steps is undertaken using the BREEAM Mat 01 calculator and the information collated by the BREEAM assessor. The steps in this process are as follows: Step 1: Translating the Green Guide rating into points The first step in the calculation procedure is translating a specification s Green Guide rating into a number of points. The table below illustrates the points available by Green Guide rating. 224 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

241 Mat 01 Life cycle impacts Materials Green Guide Rating Mat 01 Points A A 2.00 B 1.00 C 0.50 D 0.25 E 0.00 The maximum number of points available for an assessed building is a product of the number of elements assessed multiplied by three. For example, for an office building five elements are assessed so there are a maximum of fifteen points available; furthermore twelve of those fifteen points must be achieved to award all five BREEAM credits. Whilst it may appear that three points are available for each element assessed, and in many assessments this may be the case, the actual maximum number of points available for a particular element will depend on the impact of the element type compared with the other elements present and assessed (refer to step 3 below). This is because this issue assesses the life cycle impact of the whole building, taking in to account the relative performance and therefore contribution of the main building elements towards the building s overall performance. Step 2: Weighting the performance of individual specifications within an elemental category Where an element consists of several different specifications, the overall points achieved for that element are weighted according to the relative area and Green Guide rating of each of the individual specifications. An example of this is provided below for an external wall element consisting of three different types of external wall specification. Element type Specification Area (m 2 ) % of element type Generic Green Guide rating Points Area weighted points External Wall External wall type % A External wall type % C External wall type % B Element Total % This adjustment is made to ensure the contribution of points is balanced in accordance with the life cycle performance of each specification. Step 3: Weighting the performance of individual elements relative to all elements assessed Step three is completed in two parts: Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

242 Materials BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Part 1: Weights the performance of the building elements based on its area relative to the overall area of the different elements. This is done by multiplying the area of each element by the weighted Green Guide score, adding the total for all elements and then dividing by the total area of the assessed elements. For example, a 20-storey office block will have a smaller roof area than external wall area, and so the area weighting will take this into account by giving a smaller weighting to the points score for the roof in comparison to the external walls. Part 2: The range of impacts, measured using Ecopoints, for each of the elements will differ and therefore so will the increments between each Green Guide rating level. For example, the external walls have a larger Ecopoints range than the internal walls, therefore, if both elements achieve the same Green Guide rating, the rating of the external walls achieves a higher proportion of the overall points than the rating for the internal walls, thus recognising the relatively higher reduction possible in the environmental impact of the external walls, due to the larger Ecopoints range for that element. Calculation procedure where a specific Environmental Product Declaration is available for a material The Green Guide online provides users (design teams and clients) with information on the relative life cycle environmental impacts for a range of different building elemental specifications e.g. external wall, roof, windows etc. Each specification s online Green Guide rating is based on verified LCA data for generic construction products assessed according to BRE s Environmental Profiles Methodology. There are many different schemes producing EPD for products or services complying with BS ISO (there is specific construction product and service variant of BS ISO 14025; BS ISO 21930) using LCA according to the BS ISO series. Where a third party verified EPD is available for a product that forms part of an assessed element, for example a concrete block used in an external wall, the EPD can potentially be used to uplift the element s BREEAM performance, i.e. points and therefore credits achieved. The degree of uplift available in such instances depends on three factors: 1. The assessed element s existing Green Guide rating 2. The proportion of the total environmental impact of the element that the material with the EPD contributes 3. The manufacturer s Environmental Product Declaration type for the relevant product/material(s) Using this information, the points achieved for the existing Green Guide rating of the element is adjusted as follows (using the BREEAM Mat 01 calculator): 1. The proportion of the total environmental impact of the assessed element that the material with the EPD contributes is determined using the Online Green Guide Calculator 1 The Online Green Guide calculator will list the relative environmental impact of each constituent material of a defined element as a percentage. Select the percentage for the relevant material and enter this into the BREEAM Mat 01 calculator. If an element cannot be defined using the Online Green Guide Calculator the assessor will need to complete a Bespoke Green Guide Query Proforma and submit to BRE Global, who will then confirm the relevant proportional impact of the material(s) in question. This will also be required for a material with a BRE Environmental Profile which is specified as part of an element that differs from the elemental description on which that profile is based (see also relevant compliance note above). 2. Define the Environmental Product Declaration type and tier level (seetable - 38 below) for the material(s) in question. Table - 38: The Environmental Product Declaration (EPD) type and tier ranking EPD tier level EPD description 1 A third-party, independently verified EPD covering the whole life cycle (i.e. cradle-to-grave). 2 A third-party, independently verified EPD covering partial life cycle (i.e. cradle-to-gate or cradleto-gate with options*). *Partial life cycle EPD can cover: 226 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

243 Mat 01 Life cycle impacts Materials EPD tier level EPD description 1. The product stage only. Such an EPD covers raw material supply, transport, manufacturing and associated processes; this EPD is said to be cradle to gate ; 2. The product stage and selected further life cycle stages. Such an EPD is said to be cradle to gate with options In both cases, the above EPD must be produced in accordance with the requirements of the ISO series, particularly ISO and ISO (concerning environmental labels and declarations) and ISO and (concerning life cycle assessment). 3. Once the element s Green Guide rating and the relevant material(s) proportional impact and EPD type and tier level have been defined, the points uplift can be calculated (see Table - 39 below). The BREEAM Mat 01 calculator does this by multiplying the material s proportional impact by the maximum points uplift available for the Green Guide rating achieved for the element. The points uplift is then added to the points already achieved for that element s generic Green Guide rating (see worked example below). The BREEAM Mat 01 calculator then continues its calculation procedure, as outlined in steps 2 and 3 above, to determine the number of BREEAM credits achieved. Table - 39: Green Guide points uplift by EPD type Existing Green Guide Rating Generic Green Guide rating Points EPD Tier 1 Max points uplift EPD Tier 2 Max. points uplift A A B C D E The points uplift for tier 1 has been linked to the points available for achieving generic Green Guide ratings. An element whose constituent materials have each had their life cycle impacts quantified and independently verified i.e. tier 1 EPD, will achieve a points uplift to the next level above that achieved for the elements generic Green Guide rating. The tier 2 points uplift is set relative to tier 1, based on the fact that a tier 2 EPD covers only part of the material/element life cycle i.e. cradle to gate and not the full life cycle i.e. cradle to grave. Example: The following is an example of the above calculation for a theoretical external wall specification with a generic Green Guide B rating (which equates to one point). External wall specification Proportion of element impact EPD tier Points uplift Load bearing concrete cladding 65% x 1.0 = 0.65 Limestone finish 17% None 0 Medium density solid block 10% x 1.0 = 0.1 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

244 Materials BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 External wall specification Proportion of element impact EPD tier Points uplift Plasterboard and paint 5% x 0.5 = Insulation 3% None 0 Total points uplift 0.78 Total points achieved for element 1.78 In the above example therefore, having product specific Environmental Product Declarations for 80% (by impact) of the Green Guide B rated element s materials results in a points uplift of 0.78 (a 78% uplift on the element s BREEAM performance in this instance). This uplift could make a difference in the number of BREEAM credits achieved for the building. Evidence Criteria Interim design stage Final post-construction stage 1-5 One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria. 1-5 A copy of output from the BREEAM Mat 01 calculator tool,including Green Guide rating and element number for each specification assessed 1. Online Green Guide calculator output (where relevant). As design stage 6-8 A copy of the statement demonstrating benefit of the of using IMPACT compliant software (or equivalent) AND BRE Global confirmation for receipt of the Model. As design stage 1. Element numbers are unique but the available specifications may change. As a result assessors should keep a note of the element numbers they use to give Green Guide rating advice on BREEAM assessments for auditing purposes. Additional information Relevant definitions BREEAM Mat 01 calculator A spreadsheet-based calculator required to determine the number of credits achieved for this BREEAM issue, based on each applicable element s Green Guide rating. See Calculation procedures below for a description of how BREEAM determines the number of credits achieved for the life cycle impact of the building s main material elements. 228 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

245 Mat 01 Life cycle impacts Materials Ecopoint The Ecopoint used in the Green Guide online is single score that measures the total environmental impact of a product or process as a proportion of overall impact occurring in Europe. The annual environmental impact caused by a typical European citizen therefore creates 100 Ecopoints. Green Guide ratings are derived by sub-dividing the range of Ecopoints/m 2 achieved by all specifications considered within a building element. Environmental Product Declaration BS EN ISO 14025: defines an environmental label or environmental declaration as a claim which indicates the environmental aspects of a product or service. BS EN ISO 14020: goes on to state that environmental labels and declarations provide information about a product or service in terms of its overall environmental character, a specific environmental aspect, or any number of aspects. BRE s Environmental Profile Methodology and Green Guide to Specification is an example of an EPD. Life Cycle Assessment (LCA) is the tool underpinning EPD and the LCA should conform to the requirements of the BS ISO series. BRE Environmental Profile Methodology BRE Environmental Profile Methodology and subsequent product certification involves calculating the cradle to grave' environmental profile of a building material, product or system, and services. This is a measure of all key environmental impacts, during extraction, processing/manufacture, use (including maintenance and refurbishment) and disposal, over a 60-year study period. Once certified, environmental profiles are reviewed on an annual basis to ensure they remain valid, and are recalculated every three years. Frequently updated lists of building materials, products and systems assessed and certified under the Environmental Profiles Certification Scheme can be viewed at The listing also includes the Green Guide rating for the approved products. Where a product specified is claiming certification against the BRE Environmental Profiles Methodology, the BREEAM assessor should ask for a copy of the certificate and its appendix (which contains characterised data, normalised data and the Ecopoints score) or the certificate number and certifying body from the relevant manufacturer or, alternatively, they can verify the claim via Green Book Live listings. The BREEAM assessor should include a reference to the BRE Global Approved certificate number in their assessment report. An example screenshot of a product specific Environmental Profile listing on GreenBook Live is provided in the Additional Information section of this issue. Green Guide to Specification The Green Guide to Specification is an easy-to-use comprehensive reference website and electronic tool, providing guidance for specifiers, designers and their clients on the relative environmental impacts for a range of different building elemental specifications. The generic elemental ratings within the online Guide are based on LCA data generated using the BRE Environmental Profiles Methodology. The Environmental Profiles Methodology has been peer reviewed to comply with BS ISO and represents the Product Category Rules for BRE Global s environmental labeling scheme (EPD - ISO 14025, Type III) for construction products and elements. Green Guide element number A unique BRE Global reference number given to a Green Guide rating for any particular building element type specification. Both standard Green Guide ratings and those calculated using the Online Green Guide calculator will have an element number. Online Green Guide calculator BRE Global have developed the online Green Guide Calculator to enable BREEAM and CSH assessors to quickly and efficiently generate Green Guide ratings for a significant proportion of specifications not listed in the Green Guide Online. The Green Guide Calculator database is based on the components currently used to create specifications within the Green Guide online. These components can be selected and combined to generate instant Green Guide ratings for a multitude of different specifications. To access the Green Guide Calculator, you must be a licensed BREEAM/EcoHomes/Code for Sustainable Homes Assessor. Please note that, at the time of writing, the Green Guide Calculator is not yet available for public use. Reused materials Reused materials are materials that can be extracted from the waste stream and used again without further processing, or with only minor processing, that does not alter the nature of the material (e.g. cleaning, cutting, fixing Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

246 Materials BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 to other materials). Specialist floor finishes For the purpose of BREEAM specialist floor finishes are defined as those which have been designed to meet specific high performance requirement such as chemical resistance, temperature resistance, impact resistance, thermal shock protection, electrical resistivity, anti-microbial and easy decontamination. Other information Using the online Green Guide to Specification The Green Guide categorises ratings by building type and element. When using the Green Guide online, ( the main page asks the user to select a building type from the following options: 1. Domestic 2. Commercial (offices) 3. Health 4. Retail 5. Industrial 6. Education To obtain the appropriate Green Guide ratings for the assessed building elements, select the category that corresponds to the assessed building type. See below for guidance on which category to select for building types not listed above. Please note there are a number of common building elements (see below) and therefore Green Guide ratings. As these elements are common, any building type can be selected to determine the appropriate rating (regardless of the actual nondomestic building type being assessed). Table - 40: Building type and the use of appropriate Green Guide ratings Building type Green Guide ratings Further or Higher Education buildings When carrying out a BREEAM assessment of a Further or Higher Education building, in most cases the Green Guide ratings listed under the Education category can be used. Alternatively, if the elemental specification of the building/space is more akin to a commercial, retail, industrial or health specification in terms of its Green Guide functional unit, then select and use the Green Guide ratings from the relevant the building type. Prison buildings To obtain appropriate ratings for elements that are not common (upper-floors, roofs and floor finishes), select the healthcare category. For prison building types that are more akin to commercial buildings in their construction e.g. visitors centres, catering buildings, sports halls select the commercial category. These categories include ratings that are most appropriate to the elemental specifications used for these types of prison buildings. Law court buildings To obtain appropriate Green Guide ratings for elements that are not common (internal walls, roof, upper floor slab and floor finishes) select the schools category for court buildings. This category includes ratings that are most appropriate to the elemental specifications used for this building type. For floor finishes, it is permissible to select flooring from another building type other than schools, if the function/use in the assessed building is more appropriate to that type. Other buildings For many other building types assessed it may be clear which category of building type to select for Green Guide purposes (for elements that are not common). If it is not clear the BREEAM assessor will need to contact BRE Global for advice, supplying a description of the building including the relevant function(s). BRE Global will then confirm to the BREEAM assessor the appropriate category to select. Common The following elements, for the purpose of non-domestic buildings, have common Green Guide ratings 230 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

247 Mat 01 Life cycle impacts Materials Building type Green Guide ratings elements irrespective of the building type: 1. External walls 2. Landscaping 3. Windows - commercial The user can therefore search for ratings for the above elements under any building category. Guidance for the assessment of floor finishes The Green Guide online, under each building type, has categories of flooring specifications commonly used for the key floor areas for that building type. For example, the Retail category contains ratings for hard and soft floor finish specifications for public access areas based on the functional unit for that type of space. However, any given building will normally contain several different floor areas with different wear requirements. Therefore, the BREEAM Assessor will need to refer to floor finishes under other building type categories to find the relevant specification and Green Guide rating for the building (if floor finishes are one of the applicable elements). For example, for back of house office and corridor areas in a retail development, it will be necessary to search the floor finishes specifications and ratings under the commercial category of the Green Guide online. To aid users of the Green Guide online, there is a diagram that will direct you to the appropriate ratings to be used for other floor areas. The diagram is found in the guidance under the Floor Finishes category. Specialist floor finishes in operational areas of buildings fall outside the scope of the Green Guide. This is due to the specific high performance requirements of the specifications, such as chemical, temperature and/or impact resistance etc., all of which limit the options available for specification. For this reason such floor finishes can be omitted from the assessment. IMPACT (Integrated Material Profile And Costing Tool) IMPACT is a specification and database for software developers to incorporate into their tools to enable consistent Life Cycle Assessment (LCA) and Life Cycle Costing (LCC). IMPACT compliant tools work by allowing the user to attribute environmental and cost information to drawn or scheduled items in the BIM. IMPACT takes quantity information from the BIM and multiplies this by environmental impact and/or cost rates to produce an overall impact and cost for the whole (or a selected part) of the design. The results generated by IMPACT allow the user to: analyse the design to optimise cost and environmental impacts. compare whole-building results to a suitable benchmark to assess performance, which can be linked to building assessment schemes. The benefit of BIM enabled whole-building assessment is that the calculations are based on real design data and accurate quantities, rather than generic specifications for particular building elements. IMPACT compliant tools also allow users to accurately model the life cycle performance of primary structures and substructures, which are not covered by the Green Guide to Specification. IMPACT was developed by an industry consortium led by BRE. The work was funded by the UK s Technology Strategy Board. Further information about IMPACT and IMPACT compliant software tools (identified by the IMPACT compliant logo) is available from Submission of an IMPACT (or equivalent) BIM BRE Global requires the submission of the Building Information Model (BIM) from the IMPACT compliant software tool (or equivalent) in order to: Facilitate the establishment of robust building level life cycle performance benchmarks in BREEAM. This will enable future BREEAM versions to recognise and reward those designs which achieve above average performance. Fulfil BREEAM Quality Assurance requirements Conduct further research using data from real life projects. Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/

248 Materials BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014 Any data supplied to BRE Global will be treated in confidence and the use of BIM data for research purposes will ensure individual projects are unidentifiable. Tools equivalent to but not compliant with IMPACT Tools that are considered by BRE Global to be equivalent to an IMPACT Compliant tool will be eligible for the same Exemplary credits. Equivalence will be judged by BRE Global based on the following:- Suitability of the BIM content for refining benchmarks Format in which the BIM is transmitted. Please contact BRE Global at the earliest opportunity to establish equivalence status of a non-impact compliant software tool. Indoor Air Quality and the Green Guide flooring category ratings The Green Guide Online does not cover the potential health and wellbeing issues associated with flooring materials and indoor air quality, this impact is covered in BREEAM issue Hea 02 Indoor air quality. Screenshot of a specification from the BRE Green Guide Online 232 Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/2014

249 Mat 01 Life cycle impacts Materials Screenshot of a product specific Environmental Profile listing on GreenBook Live 1 At the time of publishing the pre-live version of this Scheme Document (March 2011) this Online Green Guide Calculator functionality is not present. 2 BS EN ISO 21930:2007 Sustainability in building construction. Environmental declaration of building products. BSi, BS EN ISO 14040:2006 Environmental management. Life cycle assessment. Principles and framework. BSi, BS EN ISO 14044:2006 Environmental management. Life cycle assessment. Requirements and guidelines. BSi, BS EN ISO 14025:2010, Environmental labels and declarations - Type III environmental declarations, Principles and procedures. BSi, BS EN ISO 14020, Environmental labels and declarations - General principles. BSi, Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) Issue Date: 11/02/